Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
2.1.2
© Copyright : FORSK 1997-2003
Table of contents
Table of contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I GETTING STARTED.............................................................................21
I.1 GENERAL PRESENTATION .............................................................................................21
I.2 WHAT'S NEW IN ATOLL 2.1.........................................................................................21
I.3 INSTALLING AND REMOVING ATOLL .............................................................................27
I.3.1
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................27
I.3.2
W HAT'S INSTALLED WITH ATOLL.....................................................................................................27
I.3.3
INSTALLING ATOLL ........................................................................................................................27
I.3.4
REMOVING ATOLL.........................................................................................................................28
I.3.5
INSTALLING DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING SERVER .................................................................................29
I.3.6
REMOVING DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING SERVER ..................................................................................29
I.3.7
TROUBLESHOOTINGS AFTER INSTALLATION ......................................................................................30
I.4 GETTING HELP ............................................................................................................31
I.4.1 W AYS TO GET ASSISTANCE .............................................................................................................31
I.4.2 TECHNICAL SUPPORT ......................................................................................................................31
I.5 RUNNING PROJECT TEMPLATES ....................................................................................32
I.5.1 STARTING A NEW PROJECT ..............................................................................................................32
I.5.2 TEMPLATES PROVIDED ....................................................................................................................32
I.5.3 CREATING YOUR OWN TEMPLATE .....................................................................................................33
I.5.4 BUILDING A PROJECT ......................................................................................................................34
Getting started
Getting Started
I GETTING STARTED
More than an engineering tool, ATOLL is an open, scalable and flexible technical information system that
integrates easily with other IT systems, increases productivity and shortens lead times.
ATOLL supports a full range of implementation scenarios, from standalone to enterprise-wide server-based
configurations using distributed and parallel computing.
Open and flexible architecture: support of multi-user environments through an innovative database
architecture that provides data sharing, data integrity management and easy integration with other IT
rd
systems. Integration of 3 party or proprietary modules through a set of programming interfaces (API).
Distributed and parallel computing: ATOLL allows for the distribution of calculations over multiple
workstations and supports parallel computing on multi-processor servers, thus dramatically reducing
prediction times and getting the most out of your hardware.
State-of-the-art GIS features: ATOLL supports both multi-format and multi-resolution geographic
data and integration with GIS tools. Large, dense urban and countrywide databases are supported and
displayed interactively with multiple layers including engineering and prediction studies. It features an
integrated raster and vector editor.
ATOLL is made of a main module to which you can add optional modules such as the UMTS module
(allowing CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects) dedicated to W-CDMA/UMTS network analysis and planning, the
Measurements module which allows the importation and management of concrete measurements, the
Automatic Frequency Planning module for the optimisation of GSM/TDMA frequency plans using a state-
of-the-art optimisation engine from prestige telecom, Canada and the Microwave planning module.
General features
User configuration
It is now possible to create user configurations. You can define some settings in an .atl project and
store them in an external file. This file has a XML international format and .cfg or .geo extension; it can
be shared between several users. A user configuration file may contain following information
(Geographic data set and description - including raster and traffic, computation zone, folder
configurations, definition of prediction studies).
ATOLL Interface
ATOLL now provides an event viewer indicating the calculation progress (start and end) and status
(running, successful or failed). Information can be also stored in a log file.
A refresh button is now available. This allows the user to refresh maps and folder as currently
configured.
Geographic data
It is possible to define a display range for each object depending on the zoom level. Outside of this
range, objects are not displayed.
It is now possible to import/export shape files with a name file longer than 8 characters.
Information on the pointed clutter type on the map is now given in the status bar, in addition to its
coordinates and altitude.
Vector edition
It is now possible to create vector layers from scratch, to draw vectors and perform operations
(combination, split, intersection) on polygons.
It is also possible to assign attributes to vectors (e.g. traffic polygons) and to manage a table with all
the vectors and their attributes (easy modification, deletions,...)
The vectors can be exported in MapInfo or Arcview format. This new feature allows to exchange traffic
maps between two projects.
Polygonal zones
Instead of defining a unique working zone to manage both calculations and display as before, the user
can now define two polygonal areas, one for computation ("computation zone") defining involved
transmitters, traffic clipping ,... the other for analysis ("focus zone").
Reports and statistics are related to the focus zone. Any polygon can be used as computation or focus
zone. If no focus zone is explicitly defined, the computation zone is considered as the focus zone.
Site altitudes
It is now possible to choose a real altitude for sites and keep displayed the DTM associated altitude in
the dialog window of each site.
names.
Station templates
It is now possible to create a new station template from an existing one.
Station template dialogs have been modified.
ATOLL Calculations
It is now possible to work with ATOLL while calculations (of path loss, simulations, studies,...) are
running in background.
Distributed path loss calculations using several PCs is now available.
You can also run calculations (of path loss, simulation, studies,...)in multi-threading using the available
processors of a PC.
Point analysis
It is possible to obtain point to point analysis from either any site to point or any site to site.
Additional information on cursor position is available in a Results tab in the point analysis window.
Coverage studies
Transmitter and study graphic display can be now managed independently. For instance, transmitter
colours and associated coverage area colours are not necessarily the same.
It is possible to define study templates (customised studies). Once the parameters of a coverage study
are set, these can be saved in a template that will then be available for coming studies.
The display tab of the any study dialog window has been homogenised on the same model as the
other objects in ATOLL.
Coverage predictions can now be exported in raster format in addition to the existing vector export.
PlaNET imports
PlaNET import has been improved. Consistent data is now imported without stopping if errors, which
are listed in the event viewer.
Environment improvement
Display dialog has been homogenised on the same model as the other objects in ATOLL
A new dialog containing hydro-climatic parameters to be taken into account in calculations is available.
More interactivity between pointer and displayed profile is available, as well as additional information
along the profile
Calculation models
Propagation modelling can be based on the ITU recommendation 530-3, but also on the 530-8.
Correction on diffraction can be taken into account or not in computations.
Link analysis
Additional outputs are provided in link analysis
Interference computations
You can access the IRF dialog from the Links folder or from any interfered equipment.
It is possible to introduce user defined fields in equipment and in IRF tables.
General templates
GSM/DCS and GPRS are now gathered in an unique project template.
API AFP
A Programming interface in order to import your own AFP tool into ATOLL is now available with the
base tool.
Cell definition
A new level has been introduced in CDMA radio data : cells. Each carrier on a transmitter defines a
cell (UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000).
Powers (UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000), scrambling codes (UMTS only), and neighbours are now
defined at the Cell level (UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000).
Active Set Threshold is not any more a global parameter. AS_Threshold is now defined at the Cell
level (UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000).
Traffic maps
A new kind of traffic map per sector and per service is available. Here, you may enter directly a
number of UL and DL active users per service for each transmitter (UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000).
It is possible to import/export traffic maps per transmitter and per service in .agd (ATOLL internal
format) format.
It is possible to export vector traffic maps in mif, shp or .agd format.
Shadowing modelling
The way of modelling shadowing margin in simulations has changed (UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000). A
random shadowing value is drawn to each terminal in the network and added to the average predicted
path loss. The level of reliability and therefore, the shadowing margin, are only introduced in prediction
studies and point analysis (UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000).
CDMA/W-CDMA Simulations
The algorithm convergence criteria has been modified (UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000).
OVSF/Walsh codes are now considered as an additional limitation in simulations.
Users rejected because of load saturation can be rejected either at admission control or at congestion
control (UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000).
Simulations outputs
New simulation outputs are available, on transmitters (UMTS, CDMA/CDMA 2000), and on mobiles
(UMTS, CDMA/CDMA 2000).
Prediction studies
It is now possible to possible to study a coverage prediction or a point analysis (including AS analysis)
on a specific carrier (or all).
Service description
You may specify UL and DL Eb/Nt targets, maximum and minimum traffic channel power for the FCH
nominal rate and different SCH rates.
New 1xEV-DO service type.
Terminal definition
The nominal rate is now a terminal property.
You have the possibility to enter a percentage of the mobile total power dedicated to the UL pilot
channel.
Management of power gains (related to pilot power) for the different 1xEV-DO physical channels
(DRC, Data, ACK) in terminals.
You may define a certain instantaneous data service rate (SCH rate) in any CDMA/CDMA 2000 -like
prediction study (point analysis or coverage prediction).
Point to point analysis and studies based on selected carrier type (implementation of specific coverage
calculations for uplink and downlink 1xEV-DO services).
Disk 2 Gb free on disk recommended (or more according to the used geographic
database)
If you choose to install the distributed computing server, this is installed as a service on your local machine.
To make it unavailable, you will need to stop it in the Services (Administrative tools) dialog of your operating
system.
Moreover, from the installation CD, you may find several versions of Adobe Acrobat® Reader (German,
English, French, Italian and Spanish versions) as well as the updated (from the last ATOLL version) and
usermanual pdf files.
By default, the ATOLL installation directory path is C:\Program Files\Forsk\ATOLL. To define another
directory path, click on the Browse... button during the installation.
Note : During the installation, it is possible to tick/unticking options in order to make them installed or not :
Help files,
ATOLL development kit,
User manual (in pdf format),
the distributed computation tool.
When the file search is finished, all the unwise.exe files are displayed.
To install the distributed computing server, tick the distributed computing server option in the Select
components box during the setup process. The application will then be installed as a service on the local
machine, i.e. will run as far as the local pc is on, even with no user connected.
Service management like the distributed computing server application can be accessed from the
Administrative tools icon in the Control Panel. Then choose the Services application.
Notes
Like for ATOLL installation, you must be connected with administrative rights when installing the
application.
In order to be able to access some potential centralized geo data for computation, check that the
account on which is "installed" the service has enough rights (which is not always the case by default).
If not, access the properties of the Service and assign it to an appropriate account (e.g. in the Log on
window for windows 2000 OS).
The first step of uninstalling is to stop the corresponding service. To do that, proceed as follows :
Access the Control Panel connected on an account with rights allowing you to stop Services,
Click on the Services Icon,
Select the ATOLL server item,
Access the Control Panel connected on an account with rights allowing you to stop Services,
Open the Administrative Tools,
Click on the Services Icon,
Select the ATOLL server item,
Either,
Right click on the item to open the context menu,
Click the STOP command,
Or,
Open its property dialog box,
Click the STOP button in the Service status part.
Firstly, please be sure to have installed ATOLL on an administrator account, to have rebooted your
computer and logged in again on an account with administrator rights in order to complete installation with
libraries that were in use during the first installation step (including mdac and the sentinel driver).
Please also check the validity of the folder in which you installed ATOLL. Because ATOLL is installed by
default in an ATOLL folder, be sure that you didn't put yours in that way, for example : C:\Program
Files\Forsk\XXX\ATOLL\..., where XXX was the name of the main folder in which you wanted to install
ATOLL.
If the MDAC version of your PC is too old, you might install a newer version of mdac (available in the
ATOLL installation cd) in order to allow communications with databases.
In case of the message "Protection key error", please check your connection and the key validity. If you
use a hardware Superpro dongle, try first to reboot your computer after installation on an administrator
account. Then, install again the sentinel driver (by using the setupx86.exe file in the setup folder from your
current ATOLL main folder).
Note : Even if it is possible to plug a Nethasp dongle on a pc equipped with Windows 2000 server, ATOLL
does not support single user hardware key for this operating system.
Caution:
It is advised to switch off your computer before unplugging or plugging hardware key into it.
Do not change the PC date.
When the Superpro dongle is temporary:
- Do not reprogram it even if you plug it into another computer.
- Do not put the time bomb off without the FORSK support help.
Nethasp key (Multi-user licence) is supported under Windows 2000 Server only using from Licence
manager 8.09.
Click on the Content tab to scroll through a table of content. When you have found in the list the
topic you are interested in, simply double-click on it. A window containing the information about
the subject will then be displayed on your screen. You will notice in the text some words or
sentences in green, these are links to other topics relating to the word or sentence.
or
Click on the Index tab to refer to the index inputs. Choose in the list the input you are interested
in, double click on it. A window containing the information about the subject will be displayed.
or
Click on the Find tab to search for specific words or sentences that might be in a help topic.
Type the word or the sentence you search, choose in the list a subject and then press Display to
open the window containing information.
You can also consult the support section of the Forsk web site : www.forsk.com. In this, you will be able to
download :
• latest version patches,
• ATOLL documentation,
• geo data sample,
• problem report templates,
• corrected bugs,
• known bugs,
• holidays,
• coming versions,
• additional information.
Because ATOLL projects can be translated in a database structure, it is possible, from an existing project
template, to define a personal template.
working around the 2 GHz band, using the W-CDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access)
technology. This technology is supported using the UMTS project template.
1xRTT (1st eXpansion Radio Telephone Technology) : 2.5th generation numeric telephony norm
working around the 900 MHz band, using the CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) technology. This
technology is supported using the CDMA2000 project template.
IS95-CDMA (Interim Standard 95) : 2th generation numeric telephony norm working around the 800
MHz band, using the CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) technology, also known as CDMAOne.
95 refers to an accepted industry protocol. This technology is supported using the IS95-CDMA project
template.
When this is done, the template is available when a new ATOLL project is started in the Project type dialog
box.
2.
Open an ATOLL project template (located in C:\Program Files\Forsk\ATOLL\Templates by
default) in MS Access as a model,
You can modify the databases as you want in order to obtain your customized template. For
example, you can import your own table of antennas,
Use the Save as... command in the File menu, to save this template in the Templates
subfolder where ATOLL is installed.
When this is done, the template is available when a new ATOLL project is started in the Project
type dialog box.
Step 2: Define the projection and display coordinate systems, the length, reception and transmission
units.
Step 4: Define a station template and locate stations or groups of hexagons on the map.
Step 9: Optimising the networks with neighbours (all projects 1 2 3), planning (GSM/TDMA),
scrambling codes (UMTS-W/CDMA)
The user interface uses standard Windows interface functionality along with a few additional features to
make your environment easy to use. Moreover, the drag and drop feature can be commonly used between
any folder explorer and ATOLL in order to import or open any objects with a compatible format.
Two common window types are document windows and docking windows. The position and size of
document windows can be changed within the ATOLL window. They can be maximized and minimized.
Docking windows, however, attach to the borders of the application window, or float anywhere on your
screen.
You can have more than one document file open in ATOLL. Document windows are attached to a single
document. You can have many document windows attached to a single document. Examples of document
windows are maps, datasheets and studies reports. When you close the last document window attached to a
document, this document is closed.
Docking windows are shared among open documents. They reflect the content of the active document. The
active document is the one attached to the active window. Examples of docking windows are the Explorer
window, the Panoramic window and the Legend window.
ATOLL provides many features dealing with the use on the map. Hence, you can easily move , zoom in and
out, changing scales, and choosing visibility range for objects displayable on the map. Several ways of
exporting the current environment are also possible.
In ATOLL, most of the items are organized in folders in the Explorer window. This folders can be displayed
in tables in order to make easy the management of large data in the same time. Hence, filters, groups and
sorts are easily made either in folders, tables and on the map (filtering only), and can be saved in
configurations.
This generic organization method is also applied to the display of objects in ATOLL. A generic display dialog
is available when working on the properties of radio data (sites, transmitters, microwave links), prediction
studies, measurements, simulations and some geo data objects (DTM map or vector objects).
ATOLL provides several handy tools, like a Undo/Redo function, windows classical and specific shortcuts,
the possibility to use icons and several shapes of cursors related to working processes. Furthermore, ATOLL
provides a powerful search tool helping you to locate easily any site of a network.
To position a floating window over a dock (without docking it), proceed as follows :
Point to the title bar of the window.
Hold down the CT key and drag the window over any dock area of the application window.
Note : The window positions for docking windows are not associated with the current project; they remain
the same no matter which project you open.
In order to print the active window, one the print setup is made, select the Print command in the File menu
(or use the Ctrl+P shortcut) in the case of maps or tables.
For other objects like antenna patterns, legend or point analysis windows (for example), just select the
Print... command from the related context menu (right click in the window).
The map is displayed with the previous scale in the scale listbox.
The map is displayed with the next scale in the scale listbox.
Note : in case of refresh problems on the map, use the icon from the zoom toolbar (or the F5 shortcut).
Several operations may be performed from the Panoramic window; they are detailed below.
Position the pointer at the corner (or any border) of the zoom area (darker rectangle). The
pointer becomes a double arrow.
Press the left mouse button.
Slide the pointer.
Release the mouse button.
Note : If you drag the icon band containing the scale scrolling box from the toolbar to a side of your
environment, you may find it again by clicking on the upper button
Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available
This feature enables you to display in the workspace an object depending on the zoom level.
Notes :
In case of sites and transmitters, the visibility range is globally specified in the folder Properties
window.
This feature is an add-on, like visibility boxes or layer order, to manage object visibility in the
workspace; the defined visibility ranges have no influence on the objects taken into account in
calculations.
Visibility scales defined for objects are taken into account during printings or print previews. Objects
will appear only if the printing scale is within their respective visibility range.
Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the window.
Note :
Each point are separated by straight lines,
ATOLL reads azimuth in a clockwise direction.
Appearance Meaning
Wait The hourglass tells you to wait. When it disappears, you can enter
another command.
Arrow Use the arrow mainly to select objects or commands. It will remain as
long as a new command has not been activated
Use the zone selection arrow to define a selection region. You can use it
Selection arrow inside a map to define a zone to print or copy and in the panoramic view
to define the zone to be displayed on the map. You must define a
«window» on the active map or panoramic view by left clicking (1st corner
of the «window» top left) and «Sliding».
Polygonal Use the polygonal zone selection arrow to define a non-rectangular
selection arrow selection region. You can use it inside a map to define a zone to filter
either sites or transmitters.
You must define a "closed polygonal zone" on the active map by left
Hand clicking several times. Close the polygon by clicking twice. Only active on
maps, use the hand to move the visible part of the displayed map.
Zoom area The magnifying glass tells you that ATOLL is waiting for a zoom
«window» to be defined on the active map by left clicking (1st corner of
the «window» top left) and «Sliding».
The transmitter symbol tells you that ATOLL is waiting for you to place a
New transmitter transmitter on the active map by left clicking. You can place as many
transmitters as you want by holding down the button while you move the
mouse and pressing down the Ctrl key at the same time.
Sights The sights symbol will appear as soon as you have activated one of the
Profile/Reception/Interference functions. This informs you that ATOLL is
waiting for you to left click on a point of the active map.
Sights placed The sights «placed» symbolizes the Receiver and indicate the point on
(Receiver) the map used for calculations displayed in the Measurements or Point
analysis window (Profile / Reception / Interference/AS analysis). You can
access menu by right clicking on the point analysis window.
Pencil The pencil indicates that you can define polygonal zones without the
clutter. ATOLL is waiting for you to left click on various points on the
active map. Double clicking will close the polygon.
Deletion ATOLL is waiting for you to select by left clicking a newly created
polygonal zone.
Position ATOLL is waiting for you to select an edge of the newly created polygon
indicator by left clicking. When you click, the cursor changes into the Select/create
points on polygons cursor (below). Right clicking will open a context-
sensitive dialog box allowing you to add a point, delete the polygon and
centre the map on the polygon.
Select/create Left clicking followed by dragging one of the polygon edges, will add a
points on new point to the polygon and modify its contour. Left clicking on a point
polygons that already exists on the polygon, followed by dragging allows you to
move the point. Right clicking opens a context-sensitive dialog box
allowing you to delete a point, delete the polygon and centre the map on
the polygon.
Placing a ATOLL is waiting for you to left click on a point on the active map so it
measurement can place a measurement point there.
point
point in a ATOLL is waiting for you to left click on a point on the active map so it
measurement can start a measurement path. Once you have made your first click, the
path cursor will change shape and ATOLL will wait for you to left click on
various points on the active map. Double clicking will end the path.
st
Microwave link ATOLL is waiting for you to left click on a point on the active map (1
start point in the microwave link). Once you have made your first click, the
End cursor will change shape and ATOLL will wait for you to left click on a
nd
second point on the active map to end the link (2 point in the microwave
link)
Measurements Use the measurement tool to display projected distances and azimuths in
on the map the status bar .
Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in windows
Note : Visibility scales defined for objects are taken into account during printings or print previews. Objects
will appear only if the printing scale is within their respective visibility range.
Caution : When using the Fit to page option, it is not possible to know the printing scale in advance.
Note : Three file formats, *.tif, *.bil and *.bmp are supported. The *.bmp format is rather dedicated to images
and the *.tif and *.bil format to georeferenced images. Thus, to use the exported map as an image, choose
*.tif and *.bmp formats and define a scale and a resolution; this last one will be written in the file. On the
other hand, if you want to use the exported map as geographic data, prefer the *.bil format and specify the
pixel size. For additional information see Supported data formats.
Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the dialog box
Note : if the ATOLL file is modified and saved, the linked image is automatically updated.
To copy the north-west and south-east point coordinates of the image to another application, proceed
as follows :
Click on the select an area tool in the zoom toolbar.
Define the area to be exported: Position the pointer on the map. Press and hold the left
mouse button at the north-west corner of the area, drag the pointer to the south-east
corner and then release the mouse button.
Select the Copy Image... command in the Edit menu. In the Copy image dialog box, choose
the screen resolution option or define the pixel size (m) and then, press OK to validate.
Open the application.
Select the Paste command in the Edit menu (or the Unformatted text option when choosing the
Paste Special... command).
Note : The point coordinates vary according to the chosen option (screen resolution or pixel size).
The Data tab allows the radio data and calculation management; it consists of diverse folders depending on
the modules included in the ATOLL application:
• Sites
• Antennas
• Transmitters
• E/GPRS equipment
• Predictions
• UMTS Parameters (or CDMA/CDMA 2000 Parameters)
• UMTS Simulations (or CDMA/CDMA 2000 Simulations)
• Hexagonal design
• Microwave links
• Measurements
The Geo tab allows to handle geographical data; it initially contains three folders and more when you import
other geographical data types (vector data, scanned images) such as :
• Clutter
• Digital Terrain Model
• Traffic (TDMA, UMTS, CDMA/CDMA 2000)
A Propagation models folder where the following propagation models are listed :
• Longley-Rice
• Okumura-Hata
• Costa-Hata
• Standard Propagation Model
• ITU 526-5
• ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93)
• WLL
The list of the several AFP models available in your current ATOLL version.
In each tab, the created or imported objects are listed in corresponding folders using a tree-structure
presentation. Each object and folder offer a context menu available by left clicking this one.
Note : depending on the object type, properties can be accessed by just double clicking on it. Double clicking
as the same function than the one in bold in the associated context menu (left click on the object).
Either
Right click the object from either the explorer window or on the map (radio data),
Select the Delete command in the context menu,
or
Click on the object from the explorer window,
Press the Suppr key.
In the example below, the Antennas folder is open, and the Sites folder is closed. A check box is displayed
next to each object visible in the Work space.
The folders with grey check box contain visible and invisible objects.
In the example, the sites are not displayed in the work space unlike the transmitters. Moreover, some
prediction studies listed in the Prediction folder are not visible.
The different folders composing any environment can be ordered in layers with a view to manage their
display priority on the map. For example, in the example above, the layer associated with the predictions is
displayed over the layer associated with the UMTS simulations. Indeed, in the tree above, the Predictions
folder is located higher than the UMTS simulations one. This feature is particularly useful for the display
managing of geo data objects.
Note : Putting over layers may get invisible under layers. To avoid that, do not forget to adjust the
transparency level of objects located over the others.
Double click on the data folder (not available for prediction reports),
Or
Right click on the data folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose Open in the scrolling menu.
It is possible to check and to manage (addition and deletion of new types) the data stored in the table. In
this window, are displayed the names, types, allocated lengths, and default value (if existing) of the data
available. Some objects are custom objects of ATOLL and cannot be removed and other are user-
definable.
Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the window.
Notes
When creating a new column (Add.. button from any table tab window), you can fill a choice list
associated with the new variable (only with text format). Hence, when assigning a value to this variable
in the associated cell, you will be able to take either one of the items from the scrolling choice list.
Moreover, the cell can be also edited any value can be assigned to it.
It is possible to define a default value to any new user-defined field. This default value is automatically
reported to the choice list box (only in text format).
Even if tables summarise the characteristics of each item, it is possible to edit, individually, most of
them by two ways (See Editing contents in tables)
Data/Table of transmitters
or by editing and changing the value or the text directly in the box :
Data/Table of transmitters
Note : sometimes, clicking on narrow cells drives to just editing it. To avoid such a behaviour, and to open
the property dialog for sure, double click on the extreme left part of the table in the appropriate row.
freeze columns.
Note : You can define a different width for each column. The height of the cells will be defined for the entire
table.
Freeze/Unfreeze a column
In large tables where the use of scroll bars is necessary, it may be useful to keep some columns visible, by
freezing them on the screen. This feature is always possible except for tables containing reports.
To do so, proceed as follows :
Activate the Table window,
Select the column to be frozen by left clicking on the corresponding title (to freeze several
st
columns, slide on the associated titles after the 1 click - you can only select several columns if
they are adjacent to each other - ),
Select the Freeze columns command from the Format menu
To unfreeze frozen columns, select the Unfreeze columns command from the Format menu
Hide columns
There are three ways to hide columns :
1
Activate the Table window,
Left click on the title of the column to hide (to hide several columns, hold the Ctrl key when
selecting the other columns to hide),
Select the Hide columns command on the Format menu.
2
Activate the Table window,
Do as the same way as in the resize columns method seen above, and slide the pointer on
the title bar in order to obtain a zero width column.
3
Unselect the concerned column in the Display columns command from the Format menu.
To display again the hidden columns, use the Display columns command from the Format menu.
Moving columns
In large tables it can be practical to group columns of interest, or to read data in a special order. In ATOLL,
the column order can be managed easily.
To do so, proceed as follows :
Activate the Table window,
Select the column to be moved by left clicking on the corresponding title (to move several
st
columns, slide on the associated titles after the 1 click - you can only move several columns if
they are adjacent to each other - ),
Click again on the selected columns zone and drag it until the required target. When this
zone is dragged, the place where the columns will be displayed is referenced by a red line.
Moreover, it is possible to paste several times the same cell in a table. To do so, proceed as follows :
Activate the table window,
Select the cell zone where you want to copy the data,
If you want to copy the top cell in the selected cells, either use the Fill down (Ctrl+D)
shortkey or the Fill down command from the Edit menu,
If you want to copy the bottom cell in the selected cells, either use the Fill up (Ctrl+U)
shortkey or the Fill up command from the Edit menu,
Like for maps and reports, it is also possible to preview the print to be made on tables.
Sorting in Tables
Data may be sorted in ascending (A to Z, 1 to 10) or descending (Z to A, 10 to 1) order. Any field except the
antenna patterns field may be sorted.
To sort data in a table, proceed as follows :
Activate the table window,
Select a title of a column. This column will be the sort reference.
When selected, right click or select the Records menu. Then select the Sort Ascending or
Sort Descending option from the scrolling menu.
Filtering in Tables
To filter a type of data in a table, proceed as follows :
Activate the table window,
Select an item, a type of antenna on the transmitters table, for example,
When selected, right click or select the Records menu. Then select the Filter by selection of
Filter excluding selection option from the scrolling menu to keep only or to reject the type of
the firstly selected item.
Filtering data in several columns is possible in the same way not only if selected items are adjacent to each
other. To select different cells, hold the Ctrl key pressed when left clicking.
Filtering, by any way, applies automatically to maps and data folders. As in tables, ATOLL permits to
manage easily data from folders.
the data folders. You may filter, identically, from the table or from the Data table, in order to obtain the same
filtering results. All data not checking the filters are not taken into account in calculations.
To filter any folder from its associated Properties dialog box, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the folder you want to sort to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Select the General tab from the opened window,
Click on the button,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened filtering
dialog window,
Click the Filter tab and choose the filtering reference variable(s) and the associated filtering
way(s).
Select a field you want to use for filtering among the discrete fields. ATOLL lists the choice list
if the selected field is a text field with a choice list, or all the values of the selected field in table.
Tick/untick boxes to keep/exclude values from tables, map and explorer. ATOLL displays the
defined filter at the bottom of the dialog.
Click OK to apply filter.
Notes :
The way the data contained in the current folder are filtered can be saved in a configuration template in
order to be used later.
It is also possible to use wildcard characters when defining advanced filter criteria on fields with the
text format.
Application: Sites may belong to several groups. In this case, let us assume that each site has an associated
field such as a list of groups (for example “gr1 gr3 gr5”). Therefore, by entering *gr5* as criterion, you can
filter all the sites included in gr5.
It is possible to select several values at once. To do this, click one or several values using shift
and/or Ctrl button at the same time and then, tick/untick one of boxes.
An example of filtering/sorting
The result indicates there have been no filtering. The final table is identical with the initial table.
Example 1 :
Data table window/Filter by selection (site 32) Site 32 filtered in Data table window
In this 1st example, are kept only transmitters located on site 32. The result are displayed both on the folder,
map and table windows.
Example 2 :
Inactive GSMA090-12-6 antennas in increasing sort in Inactive GSMA090-12-6 antennas displayed on the
the Data table window map window
In this 2nd example, are kept only transmitters with inactive GSM090-12-6 antenna type, sorted by site
number. The result are displayed both on the folder, map and table windows.
N.B. : you can retrieve all your data with the Show all records either from the Records menu or from
choosing it on a scrolling list appearing when right clicking on the table.
In ATOLL, every item folder can be sorted in the same way as in tables. Whenever a Data table is sorted,
the display of the corresponding item is automatically modified in the associated folder.
Moreover, you can sort any folder from its associated properties dialog box. To do so, proceed as follows
:
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the folder you want to sort to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Select the General tab from the opened window,
Click on the button,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened sorting
dialog window,
Choose the sorting reference variable(s) and the associated sorting way(s),
Click OK to validate.
Note : The way the current folder is sorted can be saved in a configuration template in order to be used later.
To come back to a standard display, either choose the Group by none option in the scrolling menu or use the
grouping dialog window and put back the grouping reference variables in the Available fields box.
Note : The way the data contained in the current folder are grouped can be saved in a configuration
template in order to be used later.
The obtained transmitters folder is classified in two groups, one for the active sites, one for the inactive sites :
Note : in ATOLL, activity is a boolean. Active has the true value, whereas inactive has the false value.
Note : For transmitters, a default configuration called As Sites folder is available. Using this configuration
enables you to arrange transmitters in the Transmitters folder according to the organisation criteria defined
for sites.
You can define several configurations and use them when needed. The configurations you’ve created are
available from the context menu associated with any folder by using the Configuration command and one of
the listed objects in the scrolling menu. To apply the configuration used to newly created objects, select the
Apply current configuration command in context menus.
Existing configurations are not saved in database. Nevertheless, in order to keep these, and potentially
share them between user, ATOLL provides a feature allowing you to save user configurations (including also
geo data set and computation zone) in an external file.
You can manage your data in subfolders as in the original folder. Every subfolder is associated with a Data
table window. You can display each subfolder on the map, by ticking ( ) or not ( ) the check box
associated with each subfolder. You can manage the visibility of the data as described in the Object visibility
topic.
If you delete a subfolder, of course, data are not deleted. If you delete the last remaining subfolder, its data
go directly to the initial folder. due to refresh consideration, it may happen that data disappear. To come back
to the display of all objects of the folder, use the group by none function related to the considered folder.
Note : the configuration is automatically applied to radio data dropped on the map. For example, let's
assume that the current configuration filters transmitters which azimuth is 240°. We build a tri-sector station
which azimuth are 0,120 and 240°. Once dropped, 0 and 120° azimuth transmitters are automatically
consistent with filter. Only the 240° azimuth transmitter is kept.
The remaining objects in the polygon are displayed both in the data folders, in the Data tables and on the
map.
In this zone, you may use current sorts, filters or groups or create new ones.
Notes :
You may filter sites inside a polygon even if they are grouped. The filter is applied to subfolders,
The polygon filtering can be saved in a Site folder configuration,
This filter is automatically applied to transmitters,
The filter is saved in the .atl document,
The filter is taken into account when defining a configuration,
The current computation or focus zone can also be taken as polygon filter (see their associated
context menu)
will be able to choose or not to display related legend in the corresponding window.
When working on the display of an item folder (e.g. Site or Transmitter folder), it is possible to choose among
several display types:
single: same representation for any object of the folder.
discrete values: bin representation according to the value of a discrete field available in the table
related to the current object(s).
values interval: bin representation according to the value of a numerical field available in the table
related to the current object(s).
Notes :
Whatever is the display type chosen, it is possible to change the displayed colours. To do that, select
the threshold to modify and use the commands contained in the scrolling menu when clicking the
button.
You can modify globally thresholds and associated parameters using the values interval display type
and the Shaded... command (Actions button).
Each individual display property (e.g. of just one site) is reachable by selecting the display tab from the
related property dialog.
To open the Legend window, just check the Legend command from the View menu in the menu bar. A new
window is then displayed in the current environment.
Notes :
Only displayed objects can have their legend in the Legend window,
The contents of the legend is given in the threshold window definition and is editable.
The legend window can be printed as any other active window. To do this, right click in it and select
the Print.. command in the opened context menu.
You can use this association to provide a colorimetric representation of received signal levels, path losses, or
any other field displayed in values interval in ATOLL.
The definition of thresholds is available by using the button of ATOLL generic display windows.
The several commands are available are listed below :
Select all : ATOLL automatically selects all the representations available in the table.
Delete : ATOLL removes representations selected in the table.
Insert before : This command is available only if a representation is selected in the table. ATOLL adds
a new threshold in the table and places it before the selected one.
Insert after : This command is available only if a representation is selected in the table. ATOLL adds a
new threshold in the table and places it after the selected one.
Properties : This command is available only after selecting one or several representations of the table.
ATOLL opens the Display window where you may change colour and style.
Shading : ATOLL opens the Shading window. You can define the number of value intervals and
configure their displays. Enter the highest (First break) and lowest (Last break) thresholds and an
interval between thresholds. Define the colour shading by choosing beginning end colours. Finally, you
can select a coverage interior and a style of line for coverage contour.
You can set coverage transparency by moving the cursor on the transparency scale and specify a visibility
scale.
If available, the legend associated with each threshold allows you to display a text instead of the threshold in
the legend. If no text has been entered, thresholds are displayed with associated colours.
Defining thresholds
In the example above, in the case of the signal level option, the defined thresholds mean :
Signal level >= -65 red (1st colour from top),
-65 > Signal level >= -105 shading from red to blue (9 thresholds),
Signal level < -105 not drawn on coverage.
Note :
Shading, Insert before and Insert after features are only available in case of a value intervals display
type.
When double-clicking on any representation in the table, ATOLL opens the associated Display
window.
This display definition works exactly the same in the case of other object groups that display properties
are managed using the ATOLL generic display windows.
To make displayed permanently labels related to any object on the map, proceed as follows :
Click the appropriate tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the folder related to the objects you want to display related labels on the map,
Left click the Properties command from the opened context menu,
Click on the Display tab from the opened window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Check the items to be displayed in the Label scrolling menu,
Click OK to validate,
The associated labels are now displayed on the map close to the referring objects.
Note : You can display as many labels than parameters related to the considered object. E.g., even if you
add a new field in the transmitter table, this field will be available to be displayed as a label for all the
transmitters.
To make available information related to any pointed object on the map, proceed as follows :
Click the appropriate tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the folder related to the objects you want to display related tables on the map,
Left click the Properties command from the opened context menu,
Click on the Display tab from the opened window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Tick the items to be displayed in the Tips text scrolling menu,
Click OK to validate,
The associated information can be now given in help popups when pointing any item on the
map with mouse.
To make active the tips information, click the from the toolbar. To inactive this function, click it again (
).
Note : You can display as many information in popups than parameters related to the considered object.
E.g., even if you add a new field in the transmitter table, this field will be potentially available to be displayed
in tip balloons.
Note : the last 10 actions can be undone, unless you perform an action which is not supported by the undo
feature. In that case, the undo memory is cancelled.
To do this, use the button from the tool bar or the shortcut key F5.
Note : this features allows you to cancel some potential refresh problems of the map.
The way tables and maps are printed can also be managed easily in order to provide well-organized and
customized printed outputs.
Note : the selected options (e.g. : erase outside of focus zone) are taken into account in print preview.
This bar becomes a floating window by double-clicking on it. In this case, it is possible to resize it.
To search an existing site in a network using the search site tool, proceed as follows :
In the Search bar, type the first characters of the site name in the Find site box. ATOLL
displays a scrolling list containing all the sites, which the name begins with this string of
characters.
Then, either
Select the site in the list,
Or
Go on typing the site name to reduce the number of sites in the list.
After choosing the site in the list, ATOLL automatically centres the map on the selected site.
Notes :
As in advanced filters, it is possible to use the “contains” (*string*) and “begins with” (string*) criteria to
search for sites which name contains or begins with the given string. Be careful, *string is unknown.
Use the F3 shortcut to be automatically placed in the Find site box.
: Draw points
: Allows the user to merge several vector polygons
: Allows the user to make holes in polygons
: Permits to keep only overlapping areas in order to create the resulting polygon
: Allows the user to cut a polygon in several parts
The different available shortcuts are listed below (some of them are linked with icons of the toolbar):
Note : when a letter is underlined in a command (Use the Alt button to make underlines active in Windows
2000), press Shift+letter to run it.
Once these folder are created (Traffic description is linked with radio data - depending on the project type -
even if present in the Geo tab of the ATOLL environment) , you may manage them (display, data location
managing, clutter description...) easily. It is also possible to display vector objects over coverages by
importing/transferring these objects directly in the Data tab.
ATOLL also provides some features dealing with data priority like multi-layer management and multi-
resolution management.
Some edition tools for raster or vector objects are also available. Moreover, most of the geo data objects can
be exported in external files (DTM, clutter, raster polygons, vector layers). Finally, maps can be exported as
an image in external files, or in other applications.
Notes : We can distinguish the display unit as described above from the internal unit. The internal unit
cannot be changed by the user. In any case (.atl project connected to a database or not), the internal length
unit is the “metre”. When environments are connected to a database, display and internal unit systems are
stored in the database:
the internal unit is used as length unit in the database,
the display unit is memorised and taken into account when opening a project from the database.
The Universal Transverse Mercator projection (UTM): a portion of the earth is mathematically
projected on a cylinder tangent to a meridian (which is transverse or crosswise to the equator). This
projection type is useful for mapping large areas that are oriented north-south.
The geographic system is not a projection, but a representation of a location on the earth surface from
geographic coordinates (degree-minute-second or grade) giving the latitude and longitude in relation to the
origin meridian (Paris for NTF system and Greenwich for ED50 system). The locations in the geographic
system can be converted into other projections.
[1] Snyder, John. P., Map Projections Used by the US Geological Survey, 2nd Edition, United States
Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 313 pages, 1982.
[2] www.colorado.edu/geography/gcraft/notes/gps/gps_f.html
ATOLL integrates two databases including more than 980 international coordinate system references, a
database based on the European Petroleum Survey Group and another one regrouping only France's
coordinate systems. ATOLL distinguishes the cartographic coordinate systems for projection and either
cartographic or geographic coordinate systems for display.
The maps displayed in the Work space are referenced in a particular projection system intrinsic to the
imported geographic data files; thus, the projection system depends on the imported geographic file. By
choosing a specific display system, you may see (using the rulers or status bars) the location of sites on the
map in a coordinate system different from the projection coordinate system. You may also position on the
map sites referenced in the display system: the coordinates are automatically converted in the projection
system and the site is displayed on the map.
In the example below, the French Riviera geographic data file has been imported. The map shows the
French Riviera projected using the cartographic NTF (Paris) / France II étendue system (coordinates in
metres). On the other hand, site coordinates are stated in the geographic WGS 72 system (coordinates in
degrees-minutes-seconds).
Note : if all the imported geographic files are referenced in the same projection system and if you do not
need to convert coordinates in another system; it is not necessary to define projection and display systems.
By default, the two systems are the same.
Notes :
You can add the selected coordinate system to a catalogue of favourite systems by using the
button.
When exporting an ATOLL project in a database, the currently chosen display coordinate system
becomes the internal one.
Default systems cannot be modified.
Notes :
If the display coordinate system is cartographic, X and Y respectively correspond to abscissa and
ordinate.
If the display coordinate system is geographic, X and Y respectively refer to longitude and latitude.
Cartographic systems are identified by the symbol left to the systems, whereas geographic ones
are symbolized by .
You can add the selected coordinate system to a catalogue of favourite systems by using the
button.
Default systems cannot be modified.
Geographic coordinate system (symbolised ) is a latitude and longitude coordinate system. The latitude
and longitude are related to an ellipsoid, a geodetic datum and a prime meridian. The geodetic datum
provides the position and orientation of the ellipsoid relative to the earth.
A cartographic coordinate system (symbolised ) is obtained thanks to a transformation method which
converts a (latitude, longitude) into an (easting, northing). Therefore, to define a projection system, you must
specify the geographic coordinate system supplying longitude and latitude and the transformation method
characterised by a set of parameters. Different methods may require different sets of parameters. For
example, the parameters required to define the projected Transverse Mercator coordinate system are:
- The longitude of the natural origin (Central meridian),
- The latitude of the natural origin,
- The False Easting value,
- The False Northing value,
- A scale factor at the natural origin (on the central meridian),
In the General part, type a name, choose a unit in the scrolling menu (to open it, select the cell
and left click on the arrow), and define usage.
In the Category part, choose in the Type scrolling menu (to open it, select the cell and left click
on the arrow) either Long/Lat in order to create a geographic coordinate system, or a type of
projection and its set of associated parameters for cartographic coordinate systems.
In the Geo part, specify the meridian and choose an existing datum in the Datum scrolling menu
(to open it, select the cell and left click on the arrow). The associated ellipsoid is automatically
selected. You can also describe a geodetic datum by selecting … in the Datum scrolling menu.
In this case, you must provide parameters (Dx, Dy, Dz, Rx, Ry, Rz and s) needed for the
transformation of datum into WGS84 and an ellipsoid.
Click OK to validate the display system.
Notes :
An identification code enables ATOLL to differentiate the existing coordinate systems. In case of new
created coordinate systems, assigned codes are integer values strictly higher than 32767.
Management in the coordinate system folder is possible. Use the Technical guide for a the process
description.
Caution: For an easier management and to avoid some confusion, take care to give a unique name to the
created coordinate systems.
bits),
Traffic (8 bits), image (1-
24 bits)
TIFF DTM, Clutter, Traffic, Image Yes via associated .tfw files if they exist
PlaNET© DTM, Clutter, Traffic, Image, Yes via index files
Vector data
BMP DTM, Clutter, Traffic, Image Yes after manually entering northwest and southwest point
coordinates of the image
DXF® Vector data, Vector traffic Yes
SHP Vector data, Vector traffic Yes
MIF/MID Vector data, Vector traffic Yes
IST DTM, Clutter, Traffic, Image Yes via .hdr files
Erdas DTM, Clutter, Traffic, Image Yes automatically embedded in the data file
Imagine
Note : In most of documents, Digital elevation model (DEM) and digital terrain model (DTM) are
differentiated and do not have the same meaning. By definition, DEM refers to altitude above sea level
including both ground and clutter while DTM just corresponds to the ground height above sea level.
In any project, you can import or create traffic 8 bits/pixel (256 classes-raster maps). For each bin of the
map, is assigned a code linked with a particular environment class (density of user profiles with associated
mobility) for UMTS, CDMA and CDMA 2000 projects or a traffic density (Erlang/km2) in the other projects
(e.g. GSM/TDMA). The raster maps are macroscopic traffic estimation.
In the UMTS, CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects, you can additionally use traffic vector maps and traffic maps per
transmitter and per service.
- Vector maps detail traffic estimations (lines or polygons may have a specific traffic). Each polygon or line is
assigned a specific user profile with associated mobility and density. They can be built from population
density vector maps.
- When traffic is actual information on connections (and no longer subscriber estimation), coming from the
network and dealing with rates per transmitter and service, it is possible to create and use traffic maps based
on this network feedback. They are built from a coverage by transmitter prediction.
Comment: DTM, clutter, and scanned images are raster data unlike vector data. Traffic data can be raster or
vector.
*The nbits value depends on the geographic data type. Indeed, nbits are respectively 16 (16 bits) for DTM
nrows 1500
ncols 1500
nbands 1
nbits 8
byteorder M
layout bil
skipbytes 0
ulxmap 975000
ulymap 1891000
xdim 20.00
ydim 20.00
Line Description
100.00
0.00
0.00
-100.00
60000.00
2679900.00
Note : ATOLL supports also TIFF files using the LZW compression mode.
DTM :
The DTM directory consists on three files, the height file and two others:
The index file structure is simple, it is an ASCII text file which holds positional information about file. It
contains five columns. You can open an index file using any ASCII text editor. The format of the index file is
as follows:
The projection file provides information about used projection system. This file is optional, it is an ASCII text
file with up to four lines.
Line Description
Spheroid
Zone
Projection
Central Latitude and longitude of projection central meridian and equivalent x and y coordinates in
meridian metres (optional)
Australian-1965
56
UTM
0 153 500000 10000000
Clutter :
The Clutter directory consists on three files, the clutter file and two others:
The menu file, an ASCII text file, defines the feature codes for each type of clutter. It consists of as many
lines (with the following format) as there are clutter codes in the clutter data files.
Feature-name String Name associated with the clutter-code. It may contain spaces
The index file gives clutter spatial references. The structure of clutter index file is the same as the structure of
the DTM index file.
Vector :
Vector data contains features such as coastlines, road, etc. Each of these features are stored in a separate
vector file. Four types of file are used, the vector file ,where x and y coordinates of vector paths are stored,
and three other files:
The menu file, an ASCII text file, lists the vector types stored in the database. The menu file is composed of
one or more records with the following structure:
Vector type code Integer > 0 Identification code for the vector type
Vector type name String (up to 32 characters in length) Name of the vector type
The index file, an ASCII text file, lists the vector files and associates each vector file with one vector type and
optionally, one attribute file. The index file consists of one or more records with the following structure:
The attribute file stores the height and description properties of vector paths. This file is optional.
Image :
The Image directory consists of two files, the image file with .tif extension and an index file with the same
structure as the DTM index file structure.
Essentially a DXF file is composed of pairs of codes and associated values. The codes, known as group
codes, indicate the type of value that follows. Using these group code and value pairs, a DXF file is
organized into sections, which are composed of records, which in turn are composed of a group code and a
data item. Each group code and value are on their own line in the DXF file.
Each section starts with a group code 0 followed by the string, SECTION. This is followed by a group code 2
and a string indicating the name of the section (for example, HEADER). Each section is composed of group
codes and values that define its elements. A section ends with a 0 followed by the string ENDSEC.
Note : shp filenames are not limited in number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made of more than 8 characters.
MapInfo data are contained in two files with .MIF and MID. extensions. Graphics reside in a .MIF file and
textual data is contained in a .MID file. The textual data is delimited data, with one row per record and either
Carriage Return, Carriage Return plus Line Feed, or Line Feed between lines. The MIF file has two areas --
the file header area and the data section. The MID file is an optional file. When there is no MID file, all fields
are blank
ATOLL supports uncompressed as well as compressed (or partially compressed) DTM .img files,
You can create a .mnu file to improve the clutter map loading,
The association colour-code (raster maps) may be automatically imported from the .img file,
These files are auto-georeferenced, i.e. they do not need any extra file for georeferencement,
For image files, the number of supported bands is either 1 (colour palette is defined separately) or 3
(no colour palette but direct RGB information for each pixel). In case of 3 bands, only 8 bit per pixel
format is supported. Therefore, 8-bit images, containing RGB information (three bands are provided:
the first band is for Blue, the second one is for Green and the third for Red), can be considered as 24
bit per pixel files. 32 bit per pixel files are not supported.
The .ist and .dis formats are ASCII files used for Digital Terrain Model only. Ist images come from Istar,
whereas dis images come from IGN (Institut Géographique National). Ist format works exactly like bil format,
except for DTM images, for which ist format uses a decimetric coding for altitudes, whereas bil images uses
only a metric coding.
The .bmp format is the standard Windows image format on DOS and Windows-compatible computers. The
bmp format supports RGB, colour-indexed, greyscale, and bitmap colour modes, and does not support alpha
channels.
Note : the imported geographic files like clutter, traffic density or DTM are listed in their respective folder in
the Geo tab. Vector and image objects are automatically created after importing vector data and scanned
images. Finally, geographic data are displayed in the Work space (See Setting geo data priority).
Use the What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the window.
Notes :
The drag and drop feature is available from any file explorer application to ATOLL.
Shp filenames are not limited in number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made of more than 8 characters.
.geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of imported file paths
between users.
The import procedure is the same as for the other geo data images (Import command from the File menu).
When obtaining the classic Open dialog box, select the All supported file or PlaNET® geo data (index)
format and locate the appropriate file. When clicking the Open button, a dialog box opens in which you must
indicate the image data type.
Note : The drag and drop tool is available to import such a group of Tiff/Bmp files.
Where :
• XMAX = XMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width)
• YMAX = YMIN + (number of vertical bins x bin height)
Example of a two images index file located in the folder C:\TEMP. These two files are located in the same
directory.
nice1.tif 984660 995380 1860900 1872280 0
nice2.tif 996240 1004900 1860980 1870700 0
To do so, check the validity of an associated .mnu file in the map folder before achieving the import geo data
procedure.
Practical advice: ATOLL can be used to create easily the MNU file. Just import the clutter (or traffic) file
(slow loading) in ATOLL and paste the class description (Description tab in the Properties window) in a text
file.
0 none
1 open
2 sea
3 inland_water
4 residential
5 meanurban
When you import geographic data without selecting the embed in document option, ATOLL just memorizes
the location where the source files are stored (directory path) and creates a link to source files: the objects
are linked. If you modify the source file, information will be automatically taken into account in the document
.atl. On the other hand, some applications as deleting or moving the source file in another directory involve
the link break. In this case, ATOLL proposes you some solutions to repairing it.
The embedded geographic files are totally included in the document .atl, they become a part of the
document: There is no more link between the document .atl and the source files. Therefore, the ATOLL
document is not updated if you modify the source file.
Practical advice: Prefer the linked objects in order to limit the ATOLL document size.
Note : the distributed calculations do not work in case of embedded geographic data.
To embed geographic data in the current .atl project during the import procedure, just tick the Embed in
document box in the object import dialog box.
To embed geographic data in the current .atl project from an existing data item, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Or
Double click the scanned map/vector file you want to embed in the current
project,
Click the button if you want to locate the geo data file by yourself. At the same time,
ATOLL automatically searches for the file with the nearest match based on size, date and type.
When it has found it, it displays the error message below.
If the localisation is not successful, you have to link again the geo data file to the project by yourself from
the geo item properties. To do so, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
To check the geocoding of any data object (see above), proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Depending on what you want to display, you can choose in the display type scrolling menu:
single: same representation for any bin
discrete values: bin representation according to the value of a discrete field (sea level) describing the
DTM object.
values interval: bin representation according to the value of a numerical field (altitude) describing the
DTM object.
Whatever the display type you have chosen, you can customize the graphical representation of bins. In the
table, for each line, click on each row.
You can manage the contour line visualisation by using the relief trackbar.
Note : path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.
Notes :
You may manage the display of each vector individually. To do so, after having expanding the vector
folder, choose the properties option from the considered vector context menu (left click), then set the
display parameters. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the
opened window.
Path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.
Attributes used in the vector display can be modified thanks to the vector edition features.
To do so, when importing a vector file, you may select Data tab as import destination in the Vector import
dialog.
In addition, a Transfer command (either in Geo, or in Data) is available in each vector layer context menu
(right click on vector layer to open context menu); it enables you to switch vector layers from Geo to Data
tabs or vice versa.
Note : path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.
In the example below, vector data (including highways, coastline, riverlake, majorroads, majorstreets,
railways and airport), clutter, DTM and scanned image have been imported and traffic raster map has been
edited inside the computation zone. In the work space, we can see the linear objects (roads, riverlake,...)
inside and beyond the computation zone and the traffic layer (green colour) inside the computation zone.
The clutter layer is visible in the area where no traffic data has been edited (outside the computation zone).
On the other hand, the DTM layer which is underneath the clutter layer and the scanned map which is
underneath the DTM layer are not visible.
To make a layer visible in the work space, either untick the check box of the other layers (see object
visibility), move the layer on the top of the list, or adjust the transparency level of objects (clutter, traffic and
scanned image) when available.
Note : path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.
To describe the different clutter classes available in the current project, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Either
Right click on the Clutter folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Clutter folder,
Click the Description tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Assign colour, name and height (m) to each code.
Press OK or Apply to validate.
To assign a colour to a clutter class, click on the colour box and choose a colour in the colour table. Then,
manually enter name and height for all clutter classes. Furthermore, you may indicate manually, for each
clutter a standard deviation per clutter class (in dB) that will be used to calculate the shadowing margins, and
in UMTS projects, an orthogonality factor per clutter class (Orthogonality factor can be modelled by a value
between 0 and 1. A 0 value indicates no orthogonality at all, instead a 1 value in the case of perfect
orthogonality at mobiles).
Note : The description table can be fully copied and pasted (using Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V) in a new ATOLL
project after importing the clutter file. To select globally the clutter class table, just left click on the top left
angle of the clutter table.
Comments:
If the height column is not filled in, the models using this information (WLL model for example) will
consider a zero clutter height.
The white colour is associated with the transparent colour. Thus, the geographic layer below the clutter
will be visible in the area where the transparent colour is assigned.
Before importing a clutter file, it is important to define a reference class corresponding to zero code,
white colour and no data. Thus, the code "0" is allocated to area without clutter.
The class names cannot exceed a length of 50 characters.
Clutter description (and clutter file path) is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files.
Advice: Use this function to keep consistency between the clutter classes described in the table and in the
imported file.
Example: ATOLL automatically memorizes the different clutter classes of imported file. Even after deleting
the file, the clutter classes are stored in the description table. Pressing the button will remove
them.
Si
% of i = × 100
∑ Sk
k
Notes :
The statistic study is limited to the computation zone (or focus zone if existing), just the clutter area
inside the computation zone is taken into account,
Current statistical results are printable by clicking the button,
Data contained in the statistics window can be copied by selecting them (Ctrl+A) then copying them to
the clipboard (Ctrl+C).
The editor tool bar consists of a selection box to choose the clutter (or traffic) class you want to edit, a
polygon drawing tool , a polygon deletion tool and a close save button.
Note : The clutter (or traffic) class you want to edit must be previously defined in the Description tab of
Clutter properties (or Traffic properties) dialog box.
Use either the clutter editor to add clutter data or traffic editor to produce traffic data,
Select the clutter (or traffic - raster map) class you want to edit from the selection box,
Note : to make available clutter (or traffic) classes in the selection box, previously define them (clutter or
traffic) in the Description tab of Clutter properties (or Traffic properties) dialog box.
The created polygon is displayed with the same colour as the edited clutter class (or traffic class). As long as
the cartography editor is open, the polygonal area is delimited by a thin black line rewiring the created points.
Note : The clutter or traffic layer must be visible (see multi-layer management in Setting geo data priority) if
you want the modifications to appear on the map.
Left click on the black line (limits of the polygonal area). The pointer becomes position
indicator ( ),
Right click to open the associated context menu,
Select the Delete polygon command from the opened scrolling menu,
or
Select the Polygon deletion tool,
Click on the polygonal area you want to delete,
Press the Close button to validate.
To know the surface and the type of edited data, proceed as follows :
Rest the pointer on the polygonal area until the associated information (code, name, etc...)
appears. Surface is given only in the case of closed polygonal areas.
The coordinates (in the display system) of the point composing the polygon are then displayed in a table
window.
Note : like for the focus or computation zone, the Copy-Paste feature is available in the polygon coordinates
table.
It is possible to create new vector layers containing polygons, lines and points.
ATOLL creates a folder called Vectors in explorer, either in the Geo tab, or in the Data tab. In fact, the folder
location depends on the open tab of explorer. So, the folder will be placed in the Geo tab if this one is
displayed when creating the new layer.
The new vector layer is listed in the Vector layer scrolling menu .
Then,
For polygons or lines
Position the pointer on the map,
Press the mouse left button to create the first point of polygon or line,
Move the pointer on the map and press the mouse left button to create another point,
Carry out the two last steps until you draw the polygonal area or the line you want,
Double click to close off polygonal area or to stop the line drawing.
For points
Position the pointer on the map,
Press the mouse left button to create a point,
To clear the current icon selection, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click on the selected icon.
Indeed, it is possible:
To merge several polygons thanks to the Combine icon ,
To make a hole in a polygon by using the Erase icon ,
To keep only overlapping area of two polygons thanks to the Intersection icon ,
To cut a polygon in two or more by using the Split icon .
The vector layer must be in edition mode in order to be able to modify shape of its polygons.
ATOLL considers all the polygons as a group of polygons. If there is overlapping areas between some
polygons, ATOLL merges them to make a single one.
To clear the current icon selection, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click on the
selected icon.
To clear the current icon selection, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click on the
selected icon.
ATOLL only keeps the intersection areas between polygons and erases all the areas outside.
To clear the current icon selection, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click on the
selected icon.
ATOLL uses each polygon side intersecting the existing polygon(s) to cut them.
To clear the current icon selection, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click on the
selected icon.
Additional management features are available when right clicking on any vector object on the map (polygons,
lines or points).
When a vector layer is in Edition mode, you may select in the vector object context menu:
Delete: To remove vector objects on the map,
Convert to line: To convert a polygon into a closed line,
Convert to polygon: To convert a closed line into a polygon,
Open line: To open a closed line; ATOLL removes segment between the last and the first point,
Close line: To close line; ATOLL adds a segment between the last and the first point of the line,
Insert point: To add a point into polygon contour or line; the point is created at the pointer location,
Move: To shift vector objects on the map (place the pointer where you want to locate vector object and
left click to release it),
Vector table
All the vectors (polygons, lines, points and groups of polygons) of a vector layer and their attributes are listed
in the corresponding table.
Standard features for managing table contents (Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, Delete, Display columns, Filter,
Sort, Fields…) are available in a context menu (when right clicking on column(s) or record(s)) and in the
Format, Edit and Records menus.
Property dialog
As classical property dialog in ATOLL, vector layer property dialog consists of a General tab, a Table tab
and a Display tab.
- If the vector layer is embedded in the .atl document or just linked. In this case, ATOLL displays the
directory path used to access the file,
The Embed button can be used to embed the vector layer in the .atl document when this one is just linked.
The Find button enables you to redefine a new path when file location has changed.
In addition, you can define, in this tab, sort and filter criteria that will be applied to vector objects of the layer
contained in the table.
The Table tab enables you to manage the vector layer table content. Therefore, you may add custom fields
in the table in order to describe vector attributes.
The Display tab enables you to manage the vector layer display; it is possible to display vectors with colour
depending on any attribute.
Notes :
When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in the
same folder. The .hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain
geocoding information and resolution,
DTM file path is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files.
zone in another file. As soon as the file is saved, an additional clutter object is created and
listed in the Clutter folder. To enable this option, you must have drawn a computation zone
beforehand.
A resolution value is suggested; it is defined for clutter from the following criteria :
If one clutter object is clipped, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution.
If several objects are extracted, the suggested resolution will be the smallest
resolution of the objects.
The resolution value must be an integer
The minimum resolution is set to 1 metre.
Click OK to validate.
Note :
When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in the
same folder. The .hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain
geocoding information and resolution.
Clutter file path (and clutter description) is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files.
Comment: When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in
the same folder. The .hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain
geocoding information and resolution. Saving a file with the BMP format doesn't involve the automatic
creation of georeferencement file. Thus, it is advised to associate with .bmp files a text document including
the same information as the .hdr or .tfw files.
Select one of the options and define the resolution (in metres) of file in the opened Export
dialog box,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened dialog box,
The whole covered region option allows to save in the file the whole clutter map (or traffic map)
including the clutter (or traffic) modifications made by the user. As soon as the modifications are
saved, the properties of clutter (or traffic) object listed in the Clutter (or Traffic) folder are
updated.
The only pending changes option allows just to save in the file the created clutter (or traffic)
polygonal area. As soon as the modifications are saved, an additional clutter (or traffic) object is
A resolution value is suggested; it is defined for clutter from the following criteria:
If one clutter object is modified, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution.
If several objects are modified, the suggested resolution will be the smallest resolution of
the altered clutter objects.
If there is no initial clutter object, the resolution will equal the resolution of DTM object
which the modifications are made on or the smallest resolution of the merged DTM objects
if the modifications are performed on several DTM objects.
If you draw your own clutter data without initial DTM, clutter or traffic object, a 100 m
default resolution will be suggested.
For any raster object, the resolution value must be an integer.
The minimum resolution is set to 1 metre.
The same criteria are used to define the resolution of traffic objects: firstly, ATOLL looks for
resolution in the modified traffic objects, secondly in the clutter objects if there is no imported
traffic objects, then in DTM objects in case neither traffic nor clutter data is available and finally
give the 100 m default resolution if there is no traffic, no clutter and no DTM data.
Click OK to validate.
Caution : once the modifications are saved, the polygon dimensions are fixed and cannot be modified.
Note : the existing file is made of a fixed size matrix. Hence, changes made outside from this matrix will not
be taken into account.
Notes :
Only polygons can be saved in the Arcview (.shp) format. Therefore, a vector layer mixing polygons
and lines, polygons and points, or containing just points or lines can only be saved in MapInfo (.mif) or
ATOLL internal format (.agd).
The ATOLL internal format (.agd) is a new format only supported by ATOLL. Reading of .agd files is
faster than other vector files with classical supported formats (MapInfo, Arcview, Autocad).
In addition, in case of linked file, it is possible to save modifications performed on the vector layer.
ATOLL displays a warning to inform you that the source file will be modified,
Note : the Save command is available only if there are some pending changes on the vector layer.
All the organisation tools (filters, sorts, groups, etc...) described in the user interface basics can be applied
on the radio data, working in the explorer, tables or on the map. That way, working on sites, antennas,
transmitters (including multi-sectored stations and multi-antennas transmitters) stays always easy. Moreover,
it is also possible to define easily, and in the same way in any technology, radio equipment, that will be
assigned to each transmitter of any network.
Specific parts dealing with radio data on GSM/TDMA, UMTS/W-CDMA and CDMA/CDMA 2000 will be seen
next. Optimisations on networks will be described also on specific parts dealing with each of these project
templates.
ATOLL allows you to define the units of measurement for transmission and reception of signal levels, in your
working environment. The options for units are as follows :
Signal transmission units : dBmilliwatts (dBm), Watts or kiloWatts;
Signal reception units : dBmilliwatts (dBm), dBmicroVolts (dBµV) or
dBmicroVolts/meter (dBµV/m).
To define reception and transmission units in the current project, proceed as follows :
From the menu bar, select the options... command in the Tools menu,
Left click on the Units tab from the opened window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available and the way to use them,
Choose in the scrolling lists the default reception/transmission units for the current .atl
ATOLL project.
Click OK to validate.
The default unit length can be defined in the same dialog box.
IV.3 SITES
Left click the New command from the opened scrolling menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the new site dialog
window.
Notes :
If the new site seems to not appear on the map, expand the Site folder by left clicking on the
associated button. Right click on the site you want to see in order to open a menu from which you
select the centre map option.
Site is automatically created when dropping a base station on the map.
From the Display tab window, you can display sites with colours depending on their attributes. The attributes
of the sites can be displayed as labels in the workspace or in help popups using the tip tool.
In UMTS and CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects, in addition to the geographic information, the definition of site
equipment and their use has to be tuned.
The syntax in order to define a new prefix to site names in the ATOLL.ini file is the following :
[Site]
Prefix=”newprefix”
Each new site will be named “newprefixN” instead of “SiteN”.
Notes :
This file is read only when ATOLL is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the ATOLL session
and to restart it in order to take into account any modification performed in ATOLL.ini.
Naming automatically transmitters is also possible, either from a fixed prefix or based on the site name
with which the considered transmitter refers.
The displayed window contains 3 tabs (General, Table, Display). The General tab allows you to use the
advanced filter/sort/group by features. The Table tab manage the contents of the Site table. The Display tab
is designed to assign colours, labels and tips to sites. An additional Other Properties tab is possible if some
user defined fields are added to the Site table.
The displayed window contains at least 2 tabs (General and Display). An additional Other Properties tab is
possible if some user-defined fields are added to the Site table. In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects, an
additional tab dealing with Site equipment is available.
A context menu is associated with each created site. This can be obtained identically by right clicking on the
site on the map or in the Sites folder from the Explorer window.
Note : in the General tab of the site properties window, you can also change the name of the site, add
comments for each site, and lock its position on the map. Locking the site position allows "safety" for manual
movements (using the mouse) for sites on the map. When you move the site, a message will ask you to
confirm your action.
Note : ATOLL can use either the DTM or a user-defined height for sites in computations
define "real" altitudes that will be the one taken into account for computations. It is possible to have both
altitudes per site, one altitude read from the DTM map (non editable value) and another one that the user
may define in the Real box. Only the real altitude defined by the user is stored in database (Sites table).
Notes :
— In the Sites table, ATOLL displays the real altitude of the site if defined or the DTM altitude in brackets
in case the site has no real altitude.
— In calculations, ATOLL takes into account the site real altitudes and the DTM value in case it does not
find any real altitude. You may force ATOLL to consider only site altitudes determined from the DTM
map by selecting the Compute with the DTM altitudes option in the Properties window (General tab)
of the site folder. In this case, ATOLL ignores the entered real altitudes.
— Altitude is global height compared with sea level (Sea is 0 altitude) and depends on the data of the
imported DTM file (which could be DEM, i.e. including clutter height)
Note : You can access directly to the grid parameters from the Grid option from the site context menu.
Clicking ok is equal to ticking the Show radial grid box.
Example :
To display the line of sight area associated with a site, proceed as follows:
Left click on the desired site in the Sites folder (Explorer window) or on the map
Left click to select the Line of sight area option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the opened dialog window,
Enter the desired parameters and left click,
Click on OK to validate. ATOLL then displays the line of sight area.
By left clicking on the symbol button, you may change the symbol font, colour, type,
style (bold, italic, underline) and background (colour and type). Concerning the background, you may
choose between :
- , none,
- , halo,
- , opaque.
Display of the site name, or not and define the related font style,
Display of a radial grid around the site, or not.
Note : If you use the Display tab in the Site folder properties dialog box in the Explorer window, you may
define globally symbol and text sites display, depending potentially on their attributes.
Note :
When deleting a site where transmitters are positioned, ATOLL automatically removes the site and the
transmitters without displaying a warning. Hence, to cancel a deletion, use the undo feature available
in the Edit menu.
Sites can be deleted directly on the map, using their context menu.
IV.4 ANTENNAS
Furthermore, ATOLL permits you to create antennas and set the parameters for the characteristics of each
of them (Name, manufacturer, gain, horizontal pattern, vertical pattern, and comments).
Note : Creating and setting parameters for different antennas on the basis of manufacturers data is a long
and meticulous operation. To make it easier for you ATOLL allows the use of copy and paste functions as
easily as in all office automation tools. You may thus create an antenna from a blank sheet or from an
existing one ; the ATOLL display is compatible with most of spreadsheets or word processors.
Notes :
When performing a calculation along an angle on which no data is available, ATOLL computes a linear
interpolation from existing pattern values.
In the other properties tab, there are 3 ATOLL custom properties like the Antenna beamwidth,
minimum and maximum frequencies corresponding to the antenna utilization range. The Beamwidth is,
in a plane containing the direction of the maximum lobe of the antenna pattern, the angle between the
two directions in which the radiated power is one-half the maximum value of the lobe. Translated in
terms of dB, half power corresponds to -3 dB. In this window, you may enter this angle in degrees.
An Electrical tilt field is available in the General tab, but is not taken into account for computations.
Patterns must already integrate this parameter in their shape.
You may change the values by filling new ones directly on the tables. Patterns can be copied to clipboard or
printed.
Note : it is possible to display antenna patterns with either linear or logarithmic axes. To choose your
display system, right click in the pattern window and choose the appropriate option from the opened scrolling
menu. The new shape is automatically displayed in the pattern window.
Notes :
By using the copy (Ctrl+C) and paste (Ctrl+V) functions, you may even attribute patterns from one
antenna to another one by working directly on the pattern cells of the antenna table,
The way pattern are displayed (linear or logarithmic) is reported in the antenna table as chosen in any
single antenna properties dialog box.
Example :
In the following table, an new antenna called Antenna1, from Martin SA, has been built, with a 12 dBi
Gain, and some patterns. The goal, here, is to export the patterns of a certain antenna to the one of
Antenna1.
To do so
Activate the antenna table,
Select the pattern cell from the antenna you want to export the patterns,
Copy the cell by using the Ctrl+C function,
Select the pattern cell from the antenna you want to change the pattern,
Paste the patterns by using the Ctrl+V option.
ATOLL replaced the old pattern by the new one both in the antenna table and properties window. You can
check that data have also been adapted in the patterns table of the modified antenna properties window.
Switch to ATOLL,
Click the first top left cell of the corresponding pattern table in the antenna properties window,
Paste the data by using the Ctrl+V shortcut.
Left click on the Apply button
as just above. When pasted, blank lines are being compacted in the pattern table when the apply button is
pressed.
IV.5 TRANSMITTERS
Then depending on the project type, transmitters are managed differently. Hence, additional levels are
introduced like subcells and TRXs in TDMA/GSM projects, cells (one carrier on a transmitter) for UMTS/W-
CDMA and CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects.
So, the items referenced in this part deal with common management of transmitters and station templates.
All specific parts depending on the technology are described in their respective parts. In the coming sections,
will be described the steps consisting on the creation, deletion, moving and setting of the global properties of
the transmitters and station templates.
ATOLL opens the "Transmitter new element properties" window containing the main characteristics
describing the transmitter you are building. This window contains at least 2 tabs, additional tabs being linked
with the type of project template you are working on.
The standard tabs are General and Transmitter, and deal with the definition of the transmitter, its location,
the assignment to some specific radio equipment (leading to losses computation), and the antenna(s) used
on this transmitter. The power definition is located in the Transmitter part in GSM/TDMA projects, whereas its
definition is made at the cell level in UMTS/W-CDMA or CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects.
Note : The Other Properties tab window is available for any project if a user-defined field has been added to
the transmitter table.
The syntax in order to define a new prefix to transmitter names in the ATOLL.ini file is the following :
[Transmitter]
Prefix=”newprefix”
Each new transmitter will be named “newprefixN” instead of “TxN”.
Notes :
This file is read only when ATOLL is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the ATOLL session
and to restart it in order to take into account any modification performed in ATOLL.ini.
Naming automatically sites is also possible.
The 4 standard tab windows are : General, Table, Propagation and Display.
- The General tab deals with folder organisation and associate configurations.
- The Table tab helps you to manage contents in the Transmitter table.
- The Propagation tab makes possible to assign the same propagation model and calculation radius to all
filtered transmitters of the folder.
- The Display tab allows you to manage the display of transmitters depending on their attributes, to manage
the legend, labels on the map, and the contents of help popups using the tip tool .
Note : To attribute different colours to the transmitters (used in coverage prediction for example) in the
network easily, use the automatic command from the Display type scrolling box in the Display tab window
(and validate by pressing the Apply button).
The displayed window contains at least 4 tabs (General, Transmitter, Propagation, Display). The Other
Properties tab is available if some user defined fields have been added to the Transmitter table :
- The General tab deals with the referring site and the location of the current transmitter
- The Transmitter tab is linked with the definition of power (in GSM/TDMA projects), assigned losses and
antennas built on this transmitter,
- The Propagation tab make possible to assign a propagation model an a calculation radius to the current
transmitter,
- The display tab allows you to manage the colour assigned to the current transmitter.
Note :
You can open the property dialog of the Site on which is built the transmitter by clicking the button
right to the scrolling site selection box in the General tab.
You can open the property dialog of the Antenna used as main antenna on the transmitter by clicking
the button right to the scrolling antenna selection box in the Transmitter tab.
Nevertheless, it is possible to move a transmitter by using your mouse. To do so, proceed as follows :
Select the transmitter you want to move on the map by left clicking on it and
maintaining it, a specific second pointer appears close to the mouse pointer,
It is also possible to modify the azimuth of the first antenna of any transmitter by using your mouse. To
do so, proceed as follows :
Select the transmitter you want to move on the map by left clicking on it and release
the mouse button,
Move the pointer to the arrow extremity of the selected transmitter, a specific rotation
pointer appears close to the mouse pointer,
Left click on the green dot and maintain the mouse button pressed,
Drag the pointer in order to execute a rotation around the original location,
The value of the azimuth is displayed in real time in the extreme left part of the status
bar ,
Release the mouse button when the desired angle is reached.
Azimuth value for the first antenna of the considered transmitter is automatically modified in the transmitter
properties.
Notes :
Entering 0% in the Percent_power column means that only the first antenna will be considered.
The other used antennas are automatically placed at the same height as the first one.
The characteristics of additional antennas are no longer described in the Transmitters table.
You may also manage the transmitters activity from the context menu associated with each transmitter
individually (right click on the transmitter subfolder in the geo tab from the explorer window) or globally (right
click on the transmitters folder in the geo tab from the explorer window)
Another alternative is to delete the line associated with the transmitter you want to delete in the Transmitters
table.
Note : When selecting a transmitter, be careful to reach the selection. is different. In that case,
that is the site which is selected. Since the deletion action is possible on sites on which transmitters are built,
be sure of your selection.
The new station template is then available in the station scrolling menu.
Note : In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000, the station template must integrate the site equipment properties
related to the site on which it will be dropped.
Select the template you want to manage in the Available templates box,
Click the button to open the station template properties dialog box,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Set the parameters of the current station,
Click OK to validate.
Note : the properties you can adjust are similar to the ones of the transmitter properties.
Select the template you want to delete in the Available templates box,
Click the button,
Click either OK or Cancel to close the dialog box.
You may also build several identical stations from a template in ATOLL. To do so, you must have
previously defined a hexagonal cell radius for the corresponding template in its properties dialog window.
When this is made, proceed as follows to create groups of stations :
Select in the station template scrolling box (located in the toolbar) the template to use,
1
Left click on the Hexagonal design button, left to the scrolling box,
Draw the zone in which you want to build the stations on the map as a computation or focus
zone,
Stations with associated hexagonal shapes around are built as well as possible in the drawn
zone.
Once built, stations objects (sites and transmitters) are put in the corresponding folders, and you may work
on them as if they were sites and transmitters. Hence, you may add additional antennas on each created
transmitter.
Notes :
When you select a specific template, if the Hexagonal design button is not available ( ), please
define a hexagonal cell radius for this template in its properties dialog window, used as the hexagonal
shape radius.
In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000, the site on which is dropped the station has UMTS equipment
properties which are defined in the station template dialog.
It is also possible to drop a station on an existing site.
Once the reference site is available, to drop a station from a template on it, proceed as follows :
Select in the station template scrolling box (located in the toolbar) the template to use,
Uncheck the visibility flag in front of the hexagonal design folder,
Left click on the New station button, left to the scrolling box,
Move your pointer until the reference site on your map,
When sticked on it, let the station on the site by left clicking.
1
An hexagonal design is a group of stations created from the same station template
To merge sites of different hexagonal groups located within a certain distance, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Display the several hexagon groups by ticking the box ( ) in front of the Hexagonal design
folder,
Right click on the Hexagonal design folder to open the context menu,
Choose the Merge sites... command from the opened menu,
Enter the distance within which you want to merge sites,
Click OK to start the merging process.
Example : let's imagine that two base bi-sector stations of different hexagon groups are located within a
radius of 200 metres, and their respective hexagon cell radius is 500 m and 1000m. With this feature, you
can merge sites located within a distance of e.g. 300 metres. At the end of the process, there will be only one
site on which 4 transmitters will be built.
ATOLL enables you to model transmitter equipment in any project except Broadcast. Radio equipment
consists of three main parts:
Tower Mounted Amplifier (also called Mas Head Amplifiers): it is used to reduce the composite noise
figure of the base station. TMAs are connected between antenna and feeder cable,
Feeders,
BTS.
All the components, tower mounted amplifiers, feeders and BTS, are described in three associated tables. In
addition, some characteristics, which may be different for transmitters using the same equipment, are
specified in each transmitter properties.
Notes :
Losses and gains must be positive values.
The Table tab window allows you to manage user-defined variables in the Records tab window.
Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects.
Notes :
Losses must be positive values.
The Table tab window allows you to manage user-defined variables in the Records tab window.
Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects.
Notes :
Noise figures must be positive values.
The Table tab window allows you to manage user-defined variables in the Records tab window.
Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects.
Notes :
Losses and gains must be positive values.
Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects.
To display calculated loss regarding to equipment specifications for each transmitters, open the properties
dialog associated with the considered transmitter, and choose the Transmitter tab window. Calculated values
are indicated in brackets right to the boxes linked with the different types of losses. This fields are editable
and can be user modified.
Notes :
When loss information is lacking, the following default values are considered: Gain=0dB and Noise
figure=0dB.
Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects.
ATOLL does not automatically recalculate total losses and total noise figure when modifying equipment
characteristics in their respective tables, in each transmitter Equipment specifications window or in the
Transmitters table. It keeps initial values and displays updated values in parentheses.
For automatic total losses and total noise figure update from equipment characteristics, proceed as
follows :
Either,
Right click on the Transmitters folder, choose Equipment : Apply to transmitters.
Or
Open the Transmitters table,
Select the whole column(s) you want to calculate
Empty it (them) using the Delete key on your keyboard.
Note : The first way enables you to update total losses and total noise figure of all the transmitters while the
second one can be used on a group of transmitters.
To enable the equipment modelling in existing projects connected to a central database, a specific
procedure must be achieved. This is given below :
Let several users be connected with a central database. The database administrator is one of
them,
In database, the administrator must create three tables, called ‘TMAEquipments’,
‘FeederEquipments’, and ‘BTSEquipments’, respectively dedicated to TMA, feeder and BTS
equipment. Tables are described hereafter. In each table, assign a primary key to the field
‘NAME’,
The administrator must also define fields, listed below, in the existing Transmitters and
TplTransmitters tables,
Users may then refresh their documents .atl or open a new one from the database from projects created
under ATOLL version prior to 1.9.2.
ATOLL provides also the possibility to limit the calculation loading and time by introducing polygonal zones
helping you to limit the computation to a certain set of transmitters. This is made by using two type of
polygonal zones : the computation zone and the focus zone. The first one is the one on which are made the
computations, the second one on which are made the statistical outputs.
Depending on the project type you are working on, you may choose between the different propagation
models available in ATOLL. You may even decide to attribute different ones to the different transmitters
composing the network.
All of these are easily manageable. Furthermore, ATOLL allows you to export coverage and path loss results
with a view to use them elsewhere in other application.
Notes :
For CDMA technology projects (UMTS and CDMA/CDMA 2000), ATOLL provides also an active set
analysis based on a particular scenario (given terminal, mobility and terminal) for an existing simulation
at a given point.
Other specific studies like interference studies (GSM/TDMA projects) or handover, service availability,
etc... (UMTS and CDMA/CDMA 2000) are also possible.
This feature is automatic. That means that, on a bi-processors pc, each processor works out one path loss
matrix, one prediction study or one simulation. Therefore, calculation times are divided in two.
It is also possible to distribute path loss calculation using several Pcs on the same time.
installed on a workstation, this one is considered as a potential calculation server for other workstations with
computing server application. Therefore, a user can distribute calculations of path loss matrices on another
workstation if the computing server application is installed on his workstation and the other one.
This application (working only on propagation computations) supports bi-processors configurations. Once the
computing server application is installed on some computation servers, the distributed computation feature is
possible for other computers of the network.
[RemoteCalculation]
Servers=Workstation_1;Workstation_2
If the list is empty, ATOLL considers that the distributed calculation option is inactive. Then, computations
are run on the local workstation.
Or,
When clicking on the Detect button, ATOLL searches and displays all the potential
calculation servers you can use.
Or,
When clicking on the All button, ATOLL displays the symbol * in the Use servers dialog. In
this case, it will scan all the potential calculation servers when starting calculations.
ATOLL will use all the found calculation servers.
Click OK to validate your choice.
When starting propagation computations, ATOLL searches the calculation servers of the list and distributes
calculations on the found servers. It displays in the Events tab the found calculation servers.
Notes :
If calculation servers entered in the list are not available (workstation is off), computations are run on
the local workstation.
The distributed calculations do not work in case of embedded geographic data and ISTAR format
maps (*.ist).
Several users can distribute their computations on the same calculation server. Path loss matrices are
st st
not simultaneously calculated but one after the others (e.g. 1 matrix from user1, 1 matrix from
user2…)
The ATOLL.ini file can be prepared by an administrator and marked read only.
Events tab
ATOLL lists some events and provides for each of them, the type, the hour the event occurred and a
description. Events detailed in the Events tab concern PlaNET imports and calculations (path loss matrices
and coverage studies). You may encounter three types of events, displayed with a specific symbol:
- Errors occurred during PlaNET import or calculations: ATOLL does not stop the import or calculation
process; it automatically opens the Events tab to warn you,
- Warnings about minor problems happened during calculations. Be careful, ATOLL does not open the
Some features in order to manage events are available. To access them, right click on the window in order to
open the related context menu. Then you will be able to :
- Delete the selected event(s) (Delete command),
- Delete all the events (Delete all command),
- Copy the event description in the clipboard (Copy command),
- Display the entire event description (Properties command).
Tasks tab
The Tasks tab enables you to visualise progress of path loss matrix, prediction study, UMTS, CDMA/CDMA
2000 simulation calculations and neighbour allocation.
As calculation progress is managed in the Tasks tab, it is now possible to work with ATOLL while
calculations are running.
Notes :
Messages listed in the events tab can be saved in a log file.
The log window is automatically magnetised within the other set of ATOLL window. To break this
magnetism, and freely move this window, use the CTRL key when dragging it.
Messages listed in this tab can be saved in a .log file. To do that, add an option when starting ATOLL from a
command line, with the syntax above :
“C:\Program Files\Forsk\ATOLL\ATOLL.exe” -log “C:\….\events.log”
To sum up, computation zone is the area where ATOLL works out path loss matrices, coverage studies,
Monte-Carlo and power control simulations while focus zone is the area where you want the results. These
features provide a practical way of analysing sub-areas once the main area is fully calculated. Furthermore,
they enable you to analyse simulation results and coverage without border effect.
Like other polygonal objects (e.g. clutter or traffic), computation and focus zone are easy to manage in
ATOLL. Hence, this zones can created either by drawing, or importing from an external file. Several drawing
tools are available, e.g. resizing, adding points to the zones, removing a point. Moreover, these can be
saved in external files. Information on these zones are also very easy to reach (size and coordinates).
Note : You may perform propagation calculations without geographic data (free space propagation).
Nevertheless, it is necessary to define a computation zone.
Clutter
ATOLL calculates the surface of each clutter class contained in the focus zone and its percentage.
Traffic
In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects, statistics are available only in case of traffic raster maps (traffic
maps based on environments). ATOLL works out surface of each traffic class (environment) contained in the
focus zone. For each of them, it provides surface of each clutter class covered by the traffic class and its
percentage.
In GSM/TDMA projects, ATOLL evaluates the surface of each traffic class contained in the working zone
and its percentage.
Coverage studies
Tip information on coverage is related to the computation zone. Currently, the focus zone is not considered
for tip information.
necessary to define it before computing coverage. When accessing the Statistics tab (in the study Properties
window), ATOLL considers only covered areas inside the focus zone. For each threshold value defined in
the Display tab, it works out the covered surface and its percentage. These data are evaluated for each
environment class, when using maps based environments as traffic cartography.
Study reports
To be taken into account, the focus zone must be defined before accessing reports. Reports are dynamically
updated to take into account the focus zone without requiring a coverage re-calculation. ATOLL considers
only covered surfaces inside the focus zone. Therefore, in case of coverage by transmitter, only transmitters
which coverage intersects the focus zone can be considered in the report.
Calculation
ATOLL drops mobiles on the traffic area contained in the computation zone. During power control, ATOLL
considers all the active and filtered transmitters which the calculation radius intersects rectangle containing
the computation zone.
Simulation reports
To be taken into account, the focus zone must be defined before checking simulation results (UMTS,
CDMA/CDMA 2000). It is not necessary to define it before calculating simulation. When accessing the results
of the simulation, only sites, transmitters and mobiles located inside the focus zone are considered. The
global output statistics are based on these mobiles.
Notes :
- If not defined, the focus zone is the computation zone. The computation zone is not used as filter.
Therefore, all the transmitters with a calculation area, even those located outside the computation zone, and
all the created mobiles are analysed in the simulation results.
- If the focus and computation zones are the same, only sites and transmitters located inside the focus zone
are dealt with in the simulation results.
Display
All the mobiles even those outside the focus zone are represented on the map. ATOLL provides information
for any of them, in tips and by left clicking on them.
Printing
You may print either the whole selected area or only the area inside the focus zone when selecting the Erase
outside of the focus zone option.
Note : If the focus zone is not defined, ATOLL will consider the computation zone instead of focus zone.
The selected computation zone is delimited by a red line. The focus zone is delimited by a green line and the
background is lighter.
Notes :
The drag and drop feature is available from any file explorer application to ATOLL to import the
computation (resp. focus) zone,
Any computation (resp. focus) zone must be a polygon,
The Tools: computation (resp. focus) zone menu is available only if the map of the project is currently
displayed.
Shp filenames are not limited in number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made of more than 8 characters.
To export the current computation (resp. focus) zone to a file, proceed as follows :
Select the Save as... command from the Tools : computation (resp. focus) zone menu in the
menu bar,
Specify the path, the name and the format of the file to export,
Press the SAVE button to validate,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
If necessary, precise the coordinate system associated with the file being currently exported,
Click the Export button to achieve the procedure.
Notes :
The Tools: computation (resp. focus) zone menu is available only if the map of the project is currently
displayed.
Shp filenames are not limited in number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made of more than 8 characters.
Note : Information about surface will appear only if the tips button is on.
Advice: To draw an appropriate computation/focus zone, you can copy a list of point coordinates from a
spreadsheet and paste it in the computation zone properties window. The format of the data contained in the
table is the following : X_coordinate TAB Y_coordinate on each line. TAB and Return functions are available
by using simultaneously the Ctrl key and the appropriate key. Coordinates are displayed as chosen
previously.
For any type of project, you must find the best suited one. Nevertheless, ATOLL allows you to manage any
project with several propagation models, even on each independent transmitter.
Some propagation models (Okumura-Hata and Cost-Hata) are based on a “model type” principle. On the
base of the formulae they offer, you can use these models to develop customized models by duplicating the
existing base model (Okumura-Hata and Cost-Hata).
The Okumura-Hata, Cost-Hata, Longley-Rice, Standard propagation model and WLL models available in
ATOLL are based on formulae whose parameters can be set. Okumura-Hata and Cost-Hata in particular are
based on one formula for each clutter class.
The ITU 526-5 and ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) models are deterministic and therefore their parameters cannot be
set.
Note : The calculation radius limits the scope of the calculations to the radius that has been defined. The
calculation radius prevents the system from calculating over too long distances (e.g. in an urban area). In the
case of very large environments, the calculation radius allows you to improve the calculation time. If no
calculation radius has been defined, ATOLL takes into account the prediction minimum threshold to define
the calculation radius for each transmitter.
For example, if you chose the same propagation model X for each transmitter separately, X will be displayed
as propagation model in the Transmitters folder properties. If you gave a propagation model X to some
transmitters and Y to others, no propagation model will be displayed in the Transmitters folder properties.
Because of the priority given to the transmitters for the choice in propagation models, the one displayed in
the Predictions folder will be kept as reference for the complete project if the (default model) has been
chosen for all the transmitters in the network.
Notes : Model signature corresponds to the MODEL_ID field you can find in .par files when externalising
path loss matrices. Nevertheless, the real name of the used propagation model is also explicitly written in
.par files (TX_MODEL_NAME field).
ITU 370-7 100 - 400 MHz - Terrain profile - Percentage time while - Long distances
Vienna 93 real field > calculated (d>10km)
field - Low frequencies
> Broadcast
Okumura-Hata 150 - 1.000 - Terrain profile - With diffraction or not 1 < d < 20 km
MHz - Statistical clutter (at - Urban loss + > GSM 900
the receiver) correction a(Hr)
- 1 formula per
clutter
- Reflection
Cost-Hata 1.500 - 2.000 - Terrain profile - With diffraction or not 1 < d < 20 km
MHz - Statistical clutter (at - Urban loss + > GSM 1800
the receiver) correction a(Hr)
- 1 formula per
clutter
- Reflection
Standard 150 - 2.000 - Terrain profile - With diffraction weight 1 < d < 20 km
Propagation MHz - Statistical clutter - K1, ..., K6 (single > GSM 900
Model - Effective antenna formula) > GSM 1800
height - LOS or NLOS (Automatic calibration
differentiation available)
- Loss per clutter with
clutter weighting
- Receiver clearance
To access the different managing properties of any propagation model, right click on the model you want to
manage or use as a model to open the related context menu. Then choose among the several available
commands : delete, duplicate, copy, rename.
All newly created propagation models will then be available in the propagation model selection boxes
(Prediction or Transmitter properties).
If there is an obstacle, an attenuation will be caused on contact with the relief with diffraction on the main
peak (represented by a red line). The main peak taken into account is the one that intersects the most with
the Fresnel ellipsoid. Any attenuation that occurs is then calculated between the station and the main peak
and between the main peak and the receiver. The result may then show up to two new attenuation peaks in
addition to the main peak. The various peaks are identified by red lines. The attenuation generated by all the
peaks is displayed above the main peak.
Vienna 93 model parameter setting is limited to defining the percentage of time during which the real field is
higher than the signal level calculated by the model (1%, 10% or 50% of the time). The 50% value is usually
used for coverage predictions, and 1% is usually used for interference studies.
Notes : when using this model, take care not to define reliability level different from 50%.
The possibility of setting loss parameters dealing with free space propagation and loss within the line
of sight area only or not,
If the option ‘Line of sight only’ is not selected, ATOLL computes Lmodel on each calculation bin, using
formula defined in the dialog box.
If the option ‘Line of sight only’ is used, ATOLL checks for each calculation bin if the receiver is in the
transmitter line of sight. Receiver is in the transmitter line of sight if 100% of the Fresnel half ellipsoid is
cleared (no obstacle along the transmitter-receiver profile).
If the receiver is in the transmitter line of sight, ATOLL computes Lmodel on each calculation bin, using
formula defined above.
When the receiver is not in the transmitter line of sight, ATOLL considers that Lmodel tends to infinity.
The use of an “altimeter” clutter whose heights for different items (trees, buildings, etc.) will be added
to those for DTM,
The possibility of defining a height and a receiver clearance associated with each clutter theme; (e.g..
receiver on a building, etc.) whose heights will be added to the heights of the clutter,
The WLL model uses the terrain profile but also takes into account the height of clutter components. These
components (houses, trees, buildings, etc.) will be added to the DTM altitudes to predict propagation and
path loss.
You can define a clearance space around transmitters and receivers (20 metres by default).This feature
permits in particular to simulate holes in clutter areas.
Example : the clearance can be used to simulate streets in an area of buildings where the clutter file used
does not show street detail.
Hata models are well adapted to urban environment. Nevertheless, in order to make them available in a
wide range of environments, It is possible to define several corrective formulas, and to associate each
one to each clutter class available in the opened project. Furthermore, it is also possible to define a default
formula used when no land use data will be available.
Choose from the dedicated scrolling menu one of the available formulas (tuneable by
accessing the Formulas dialog box) to assign to undefined zones,
Validate by clicking on Apply or OK.
Comment : Without this association, the Okumura-Hata model, which use the clutter classes, will be unable
to perform prediction calculations. The Configuration tab is only visible is there is a Land use folder in the
document.
Hata models are well adapted to urban environment. Nevertheless, in order to make them available in a
wide range of environments, It is possible to define several corrective formulas, and to associate each
one to each clutter class available in the opened project. Furthermore, it is also possible to define a default
formula used when no land use data will be available.
Comment : Without this association, the Cost-Hata model, which use the clutter classes, will be unable to
perform prediction calculations. The Configuration tab is only visible is there is a Land use folder in the
document.
The model may be used for any technology. It is based on the following formula :
Lmod el = K 1 + K 2 log(d ) + K 3 log(HTxeff ) + K 4 × Diffraction loss + K 5 log(d ) × log(HTxeff ) + K 6 (H Rxeff ) + K clutter f (clutter )
with,
All of these parameters are user-definable in the Standard Propagation Model Properties window consisting
in 4 tabs (General, Parameters, Clutter, Calibration).
Excepting for the f(clutter) (defined in the Clutter tab window), all parameters (including the Diffraction terms)
are user-definable in the Parameters tab window.
For all the other parameters, user may enter directly the appropriate values directly in the associated
boxes.
When opened, use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.
When opened, use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.
The Standard Propagation Model is a model particularly suitable for predictions in the 150-2000 MHz
band over long distances (1 < d < 20km) and is very adapted to GSM 900 and 1800 technologies. This
model uses the terrain profile, diffraction mechanisms (calculated in several ways) and takes into account
clutter classes (statistically) and effective antenna heights in order to calculate propagation. An automatic
calibration is available.
This tab manage parameters from the Standard Propagation model base formula.
In the Near transmitter and Far from transmitter parts, specify the maximum distance, max distance, and
four (K1,K2) sets (two sets per part).
Max distance is a maximum distance from transmitter. When d (distance between receiver and transmitter) is
inferior to the maximum distance, the receiver is near transmitter. On the other hand, if d is greater than the
maximum distance, the receiver is considered far from transmitter.
Two (K1,K2) sets, (K1,K2)los and (K1,K2)nlos, are defined in each part. They enable to differentiate the case
where the receiver is in the transmitter line of sight path (los index) or isn’t (nlos index).
Therefore, the (K1,K2) sets taken into account in prediction calculations will depend on d and visibility.
In the Effective antenna height part, define the Heff calculation method, the minimum and maximum
distances (distance min and distance max) and K3 factor. Heff may be calculated with six different methods.
Note : distance min and distance max are set to 3000 and 15000 m according to ITU recommendations and
to 0 and 15000 m according Okumura recommendations.
These values are only used in two methods and have different meanings according to the method.
In the Diffraction part, specify which method you want to use for calculating the Diffraction term and K4
factor.
These diffraction calculation methods are based on the General method for one or more obstacles
described in ITU 526-5 recommendations. The calculations take earth curvature into account via the effective
Earth radius concept.
Four different methods (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction and Millington) are available.
In the Other parameters part, specify the values for K5, K6, Kclutter and hilly terrain corrective factor.. Enter
1 or 0 to respectively take it into account or not. In the calculation profile, if you select the already
calculated option, ATOLL establishes a profile between each transmitter and each point located on its
calculation perimeter (user-defined by the calculation radius) and then, uses the nearest profile to make a
prediction on a point inside the calculation perimeter (radial optimisation). On the other hand, when
choosing the systematic option, ATOLL systematically determines a profile between each transmitter and
any points in its calculation area.
Comment: To avoid longer calculation times, choose the already calculated option.
Finally, you can perform the calculations at the centre (centred option) or in the bottom left corner (bottom left
option) of each grid.
Note : Default values have been assigned to multiplying factors. The default values correspond to the quasi-
open Okumura-Hata formula valid for a 935 MHz frequency. typical values for parameters composing the
Standard Propagation Model formula.
In the Effective antenna height part, define the Heff calculation method, the minimum and maximum
distances (distance min and distance max) and K3 factor.
where,
H 0Tx is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at transmitter (m).
H 0 is the average ground height above sea level along the profile (m).
Note: If the profile is not located between the transmitter and the receiver, HTxeff equals HTx.
where,
H Rx is the receiver antenna height above the ground (m).
H 0 Rx is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at receiver (m).
K is the ground slope calculated over a user-defined distance (Distance min). In this case, Distance
min is a distance from receiver.
Notes:
1. If HTxeff < 20m then, ATOLL uses 20m in calculations.
2. If HTxeff > 200m then, ATOLL takes 200m.
Spot Ht
If HoTx > HoRx then, HTxeff = HTx + (H 0Tx − H 0 Rx )
If HoTx ≤ HoRx then, HTxeff = HTx
Abs Spot Ht
HTxeff = HTx + H 0Tx − H 0 Rx
Let x-axis and y-axis respectively represent positions and heights. We assume that x-axis is oriented from
transmitter (origin) to receiver.
st
1 step: ATOLL determines line of sight between transmitter and receiver.
nd
2 step: ATOLL extracts the transmitter-receiver terrain profile.
rd
3 step: Hills and mountains are already taken into account in diffraction calculations. Therefore,
in order for them not to unfavourably influence the regression line calculation, ATOLL filters the
terrain profile.
ATOLL calculates two filtered terrain profiles, one established from transmitter and another from receiver. It
determines filtered height of every profile point. Profile points are evenly spaced on the basis of profile
resolution. To determine filtered terrain height at a point, ATOLL evaluates ground slope between two points
and compares it with a threshold set to 0.05; three cases are possible.
Re s
Then, H filt −Tx (i ) = H filt −Tx (i − 1) + (H orig (i ) − H orig (i − 1))
Re s
Then, H filt −Tx (i ) = H filt −Tx (i − 1)
3 case: If H orig (i ) ≤ H orig (i − 1)
rd
Re s
Then, H filt −Rx (i ) = H filt −Rx (i + 1) + (H orig (i ) − H orig (i + 1))
Re s
Then, H filt − Rx (i ) = H filt − Rx (i + 1)
3 case: If H orig (i ) ≤ H orig (i + 1)
rd
Then, for every point of profile, ATOLL compares the two filtered heights and chooses the greatest one.
H filt (i ) = max (H filt −Tx (i ), H filt −Rx (i ))
th
4 step: ATOLL determines the influence area, R. It corresponds to the distance from receiver at which the
original terrain profile plus 30 metres intersects LOS line for the first time (when beginning from transmitter).
The influence area must satisfy additional conditions:
• R ≥ 3000 m,
• R ≥ 0.01 ⋅ d ,
• R must contain at least three bins.
Notes:
1. When several influence areas are possible, ATOLL chooses the highest one.
2. If d < 3000m, R = d.
th
5 step: ATOLL performs a linear regression on the filtered profile within R in order to determine a regression
line.
The regression line equation is:
y = a⋅x +b
∑ (d (i ) − d ) ⋅ (H (i ) − H )
m filt m
a= i
and b = H m − a ⋅ d m
∑ (d ( i ) − d )
2
m
i
where,
1
Hm = ⋅ ∑ H filt (i )
n i
i is the point index. Only points within R are taken into account.
R
dm = d −
2
d(i) is the distance between i and transmitter (m).
Then, ATOLL extends the regression line to transmitter location. Therefore, its equation is:
regr (i ) = a ⋅ (i ⋅ Re s ) + b
th
6 step: Then, ATOLL calculates effective transmitter antenna height, H Txeff (m).
H 0Tx + HTx − b
HTxeff =
1+ a2
If HTxeff is lower than 20m, ATOLL recalculates it with a new influence area, which begins at transmitter.
Notes:
1. In case H Txeff > 1000 m , 1000m will be used in calculations.
th
2. If HTxeff is still lower than 20m, an additional correction is taken into account (7 step).
th
7 step: If HTxeff is still lower than 20m (even negative), ATOLL evaluates path loss using HTxeff = 20m and
applies a correction factor.
Therefore, if receiver is in transmitter line of sight and the Hilly terrain correction option is active, we have:
Lmod el = K 1,LOS + K 2,LOS log(d ) + K 3 log(HTxeff ) + K 5 log(HTxeff ) log(d ) + K 6 ⋅ H Rx + K clutter f (clutter ) + K hill ,LOS
When transmitter and receiver are not in line of sight, the path loss formula is:
Lmod el = K 1,NLOS + K 2,NLOS log(d ) + K 3 log(H Txeff ) + K 4 Diffraction + K 5 log(H Txeff )log(d ) + K 6 ⋅ H Rx + K clutter f (clutter )
Khill,LOS is determined in three steps. Influence area, R, and regression line are supposed available.
st
1 step: For every profile point within influence area, ATOLL calculates height deviation between
the original terrain profile (with Earth curvature correction) and regression line. Then, it sorts
points according to the deviation and draws two lines (parallel to the regression line), one which
is exceeded by 10% of the profile points and the other one by 90%.
nd
2 step: ATOLL evaluates the terrain roughness, ∆h; it is the distance between the two lines.
rd
3 step: ATOLL calculates Khill,LOS.
If 0 < ∆h ≤ 20m , K h = 0
Else K h = 7.73 log2 (∆h ) − 15.29 log(∆h ) + 6.746
In the Diffraction part, user has to define calculations method for the Diffraction term and K4 factor. These
diffraction calculation methods are based on the General method for one or more obstacles described in ITU
526-5 recommendations. The calculations take earth curvature into account via the effective Earth radius
concept.
Four different methods (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction and Millington) are available.
In order to define precisely the diffraction profile, a clearance per clutter class must be defined. To do so,
enter the appropriate values in the Clutter tab window from the SPM properties box in cells just left to the
clutter classes ones.
V.4.3.g.v.vi Deygout
The Deygout’s construction, limited to a maximum of three edges, is applied to the entire profile from
transmitter to receiver.
This method is used to evaluate path loss induced by multiple knife-edges. Deygout method is based on a
hierarchical knife-edge sorting, so as to distinguish the main edges, which induce the strongest losses, and
secondary edges, which have a lower effect. The edge hierarchy depends on the obstruction parameter (ν)
value.
1 obstacle
A straight line between transmitter and receiver is drawn and the heights of obstacles above the Tx-Rx axis,
hi, are calculated. The obstruction positions, di, are also recorded. From these data, νi are evaluated. The
point with the highest ν value is termed the principal edge, p, and the corresponding loss is J(νp).
Point p
hp
Tx
Rx
Sea level
3 obstacles
Then, the main edge (point p) is considered as a secondary transmitter or receiver. Therefore, the profile is
divided in two parts: one half profile, between the transmitter and the knife-edge section, another half,
constituted by the knife-edge-receiver section.
The same procedure is repeated on each half profile to determine the edge with the higher ν. The two
obstacles found, (points t and r), are called ‘secondary edges’.
Losses induced by the secondary edges, J(νt) and J(νr), are then calculated.
Once the edge hierarchy is determined, the total loss is evaluated by adding all the intermediary losses
obtained.
Point p
Point t
ht Point r
hp
Tx hr
Rx
Sea level
Therefore,
Note: In case of ITU 526-5 and WLL propagation models, Diffraction loss term is
determined as follows:
If ν p > −0.78 , we have Diffraction loss = J (ν p ) + t ⋅ (J (ν t ) + J (ν r ))
J (ν p )
Where, t = min ,1
6
Else Diffraction loss = 0
Therefore,
If ν p > 0 , we have Diffraction loss = J (ν p ) + J (ν t ) + J (ν r ) +C
Else Diffraction loss = J (ν p ) + C
Note: In case of ITU 526-5 propagation model, Diffraction loss term is determined as
follows:
If ν p > −0.78 , we have Diffraction loss = J (ν P ) + t ⋅ (J (ν t ) + J (ν r ) + C )
Where,
J (ν p )
t = min ,1
6
C = 8.0 + 0.04d (d: distance stated in Km between the transmitter and the
receiver).
Else Diffraction loss = 0
V.4.3.g.v.vii Epstein-Peterson
The Epstein-Peterson construction is limited to a maximum of three edges. First of all, the Deygout
construction is applied to determine the three main edges over the whole profile as described above. Then,
the main edge height, hp, is recalculated; according to the Epstein-Peterson construction, hp is the height
above a straight line connecting t and r points. The main edge position dp is recorded and hence, from these
data, νp and J(νp) are evaluated.
Point p
Point t
hp
ht Point r
hr
Tx
Sea level Rx
Epstein-Peterson construction
V.4.3.g.v.viii Millington
The Millington construction, limited to a single edge, is applied over the whole profile. Two horizon lines are
drawn at the transmitter and at the receiver. A straight line between the transmitter and the receiver is
defined and the height of the intersection point between the two horizon lines above the straight line , hh, is
calculated. The position dh is recorded and then, from these values, νh and J(νh) are evaluated using the
Point h
hh
Tx
Rx
Sea level
Millington construction
Since K1 is a constant, its value is strongly dependant on the values given to losses per clutter class (if
needed)
When opened, use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.
In this tab, you may define the average of weighted losses due to clutter, f(clutter) in the case of statistical
clutter maps.
n
f (clutter ) = ∑ Li w i
i =1
where,
The losses due to clutter are evaluated over a maximum distance from receiver, Max distance. Each
clutter class is assigned specific loss, Loss per clutter class. The losses are calculated from ground and
clutter heights. The weighting function enables to give a weight to each point. Four weighting functions are
available:
1
Uniform weighting function: w i =
n
di
Triangular weighting function: w i = n
∑d
j =1
j
d i = D − d i' , where d’i is the distance between the receiver and the i point and D is the maximum distance
user-defined.
d
log i + 1
D
Logarithmic weighting function: w i = n
dj
∑ log
D
+ 1
j =1
di
e D −1
Exponential weighting function: w i = dj
n
∑e D −1
j =1
where
In the case of semi-deterministic clutter maps, you may define a clearance (m) around the receiver for
each clutter class.
In the case of deterministic clutter maps, all information related to the evaluation of losses per clutter class
are given directly by the data contained in the maps Clearance and heights are already know, and there is
no need to define them again in this dialog.
These values have to be entered only when considering statistical clutter maps.
When opened, use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.
In this tab, you may statistically analyse difference between predictions and measurements (Click on the
Statistics.... button) and perform an automatic model calibration (Click on the Calibrate... button) from
measurement survey.
Choose in the list the measurement paths you want to use. In the Filter part, you may select the
measurement points to be taken into account in statistics and for the model calibration by specifying
distance and measurement intervals, los (measurement points in the transmitter line of sight) and nlos
(measurement points which aren’t in the transmitter line of sight) options.
Note : Statistical analysis and calibration can’t be performed without measurement survey.
With this, you may statistically analyse difference between predictions and an existing measurement survey.
To statistically compare measurements with prediction results, left click on the Statistics… button. The
study is carried out on the measurement points which check filter criteria. The report window is
displayed:
All parameters defined in General and Clutter tabs are summarized in the Model parameter part: the
formulas used for calculations depending on visibility and distance from transmitter, the algorithms for
evaluating Diffraction and Heff terms and the losses per clutter classes.
In the Global statistics part, the number of measurement points which check filter criteria (Num points), the
average value (Mean), the standard deviation (Std deviation), minimum (Min) and maximum (Max) values
are evaluated for data like error, error (LOS), error (NLOS), log(d), log(Heff), Diff, log(d)log(Heff) and Hmeff.
The difference between experimental (measurement) and theoretical (prediction) values (named Error), is
calculated on the whole path. On the other hand, Error (LOS) is only calculated from points in transmitter line
of sight path and Error (NLOS) takes into account points which aren’t in transmitter line of sight path. Other
data (log(d), log(Heff), Diff, log(d)log(Heff) and Hmeff) are calculated on the whole path.
In the Statistics per clutter classes part, Num points, Mean and Std deviation on error are detailed per clutter
classes.
To statistically compare measurements with prediction results, left click on the Statistics… button. The
study is carried out on the measurement points which check filter criteria. The report window is displayed:
All parameters defined in General and Clutter tabs are summarized in the Model parameter part: the
formulas used for calculations depending on visibility and distance from transmitter, the algorithms for
evaluating Diffraction and Heff terms and the losses per clutter classes.
In the Global statistics part, the number of measurement points which check filter criteria (Num points), the
average value (Mean), the standard deviation (Std deviation), minimum (Min) and maximum (Max) values
are evaluated for data like error, error (LOS), error (NLOS), log(d), log(Heff), Diff, log(d)log(Heff) and Hmeff.
Error, the difference between experimental (measurement) and theoretical (prediction) values, is calculated
on the whole path. On the other hand, Error (LOS) is only calculated from points in transmitter line of sight
path and Error (NLOS) takes into account points which aren’t in transmitter line of sight path. Other data
(log(d), log(Heff), Diff, log(d)log(Heff) and Hmeff) are calculated on the whole path.
In the Statistics per clutter classes part, Num points, Mean and Std deviation on error are detailed per
clutter classes.
With this, you may perform an automatic model calibration from an existing measurement survey.
Choose in the list the measurement paths you want to use. In the Filter part, you may select the
measurement points to be taken into account in statistics and for the model calibration by specifying distance
and measurement intervals, los (measurement points in the transmitter line of sight) and nlos (measurement
points which aren’t in the transmitter line of sight) options.
Note : Statistical analysis and calibration can’t be performed without measurement survey.
From a selected measurement session, you may either display statistics on comparison with the current
propagation model or choose to calibrate this model in order to stick its results to the measurements.
To calibrate the model, press the Calibrate... button. The Calibration window is open.
The calibration is carried out on the measurement points which check filter criteria using the linear regression
method.
The variables (cste, clutter, log(d), log(Heff), Diff, log(d)log(Heff), Hmeff) to be calibrated, the corresponding
correlation coefficients (except for cste and clutter which are constant) and the corrections to be made on Ki
initial factors to take into account the calibration are listed in a table.
You may compare the average error (Mean) and the error standard deviation (Std deviation) before (initial
statistics) and after (current statistics) calibrating the model.
To achieve the model calibration, right click one or several variables (using shift and/or Ctrl button at the
same time) and then, press Identify button. The calibration will be achieved when the current Mean and Std
deviation values and hence, all correlation coefficients are as close to zero as possible.
When selecting a specific variable, you may see, in the right small window, the correlation between error and
this variable. When the correlation coefficient is close to one, a straight line can be drawn from the points: the
error is strongly dependent on the variable. On the other hand, when the correlation coefficient is close to
zero, the points are scattered around the straight line: there is no correlation between the error and the
variable.
When all the variables are selected, identification is processed for each variable from the most correlated to
the less correlated to error.
Note : K1 and K2 factors are the same for near and far options.
Important comment : Model automatic calibration solution is a mathematical solution. Before committing
results, ensure of their relevance towards a physical and realistic solution. See Typical values for Standard
Propagation Model formula parameters
Choose in the list the measurement paths you want to use. In the Filter part, you may select the
measurement points to be taken into account in statistics and for the model calibration by specifying
distance and measurement intervals, los (measurement points in the transmitter line of sight) and nlos
(measurement points which aren’t in the transmitter line of sight) options.
Note : Statistical analysis and calibration can’t be performed without measurement survey.
From a selected measurement session, you may either display statistics on comparison with the current
propagation model or choose to calibrate this model in order to stick its results to the measurements.
To calibrate the model, press the Calibrate... button. The Calibration window is open.
The calibration is carried out on the measurement points which check filter criteria using the linear
regression method.
The variables (cste, clutter, log(d), log(Heff), Diff, log(d)log(Heff), Hmeff) to be calibrated, the corresponding
correlation coefficients (except for cste and clutter which are constant) and the corrections to be made
on Ki initial factors to take into account the calibration are listed in a table.
You may compare the average error (Mean) and the error standard deviation (Std deviation) before
(initial statistics) and after (current statistics) calibrating the model.
To calibrate the model, right click one or several variables (using shift and/or Ctrl button at the same time)
and then, press Identify button. The calibration will be achieved when the current Mean and Std
deviation values and hence, all correlation coefficients are as close to zero as possible.
When selecting a specific variable, you may see in the right small window the correlation between error
and this variable. When the correlation coefficient is close to one, a straight line can be drawn from the
points: the error is strongly dependent on the variable. On the other hand, when the correlation
coefficient is close to zero, the points are scattered around the straight line: there is no correlation
between the error and the variable.
When all the variables are selected, identification is processed for each variable from the most
correlated to the less correlated to error.
Note : K1 and K2 factors are the same for near and far options.
Important comment : Model automatic calibration solution is a mathematical solution. Before committing
results, ensure of their relevance towards a physical and realistic solution.
Regression line
calculated
values for the
variable
y = ax + b
a=
∑ XY where X = x i − x and Y = y i − y with b = −ax + y
∑X 2
When a variable is calibrated, the new value of the coefficient Ki is equal to a and the constant value is equal
to b. The coefficients are effectively affected to the model by clicking on OK. b is generally not null, that’s
why Cste is often set when identifying a variable.
CAUTION: The Correction column means the difference between the new value and the current value of the
model for each coefficient.
A correlation is considered satisfying when its absolute value is closed to 1. When it is not the case, the
resulting correction may be unstable and so not reliable.
Once the variable has been calibrated (after pushing the Identify button), a correction is suggested and the
correlation is then set to zero because the differences between measurements and predictions are no longer
dependent on the calculated values.
Regression line
calculated values
for the variable
x0
y = [a0 K aN ] × M
x N
∑ X 02 ∑X X 0 1 K ∑X X N a0 ∑ X 0Y
0
∑ X 0 X1 ∑X × a1 = ∑ X 1Y
2
1
M O M M
∑ X 0 X N L K ∑ X N aN ∑ X NY
2
with
X 0 = (x 0 )i − x 0 , X 1 = (x1 )i − x1 …… and (Y ) = (y i ) − (y )
CONCLUSION:
It is important to notice that the matrix may be not inverted (or nearly not) in some cases.
When the correlation is wrong (When ( X N )i is nearly a constant (for example log(Heff) when Heff is
unique) and more generally variables whose correlation is wrong (its absolute value near to zero).
When the variable is actually a constant, the correlation is 0 and no calibration is offered (in this case
the chart is empty).
When two variables depend on each other (2 lines are proportional in the matrix: for example log(d)
and log(d)*log(Heff) when Heff is nearly a constant), the process works wrongly and may diverge.
So, it is advised to process identification for several variables at a time but only for those which are well
correlated and do not depend on another one already involved.
Notes :
By default, the antenna is set to an imaginary omni one with a 0 dB gain,
In GSM/TDMA projects, its is possible to set the adjacent channel protection level. This parameter is
used in interference computations in order to simulate the signal level offset due to an adjacent
channel contribution on the considered channel. For example, if the value is set to 18 dB (default
value), this means that the signal level coming from an adjacent channel will be decreased by 18 dB
on the total noise computation.
For UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000 studies, the point analysis tool is used for a particular scenario. Depending
on the type of mobility, service or terminal (or Radio configuration in CDMA/CDMA 2000) chosen, radio
parameters are not the same for the receiver. Consequently, to manage receiver parameters used in the
point analysis, you must set the characteristics of each used UMTS parameters (type of service, mobility,
terminal) or CDMA/CDMA 2000 (type of service, Radio Configurations) in the corresponding properties
dialog window.
In GSM/TDMA projects, ATOLL has also an option which limits the representation for coverages around
stations, in order to consider synchronisation problems. This feature is a graphic representation for
coverages and is not taken into account in calculations.
To define the maximum range value limiting the coverage display around stations, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
either,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the context menu,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu.
or
Double click on the Predictions folder
Left click on the System tab (if available) from the opened window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the current window,
Set maximum range parameters,
Click OK or Apply to validate.
This fact can be taken into account by considering some model standard deviation per clutter class, clutter
on which is located the receiver on which you want to calculate a signal level. These standard deviations
(corresponding with 84.15% of probability of appropriate results), linked with a certain needed reliability level
on results (point analysis or coverages) lead to additional losses per clutter class called shadowing margins,
i.e. margins from a result (given by propagation model - in dB) for which the probability of error is 50%. Each
time a reliability level is imposed in ATOLL, these margins have different values. Nevertheless, in order to
define the reliability level, a dialog allows you to list these margins per clutter class for any value defined
reliability level.
To compute shadowing margins per clutter class as a function of reliability level, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Shadowing margins... option from the scrolling menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window,
Set the reliability level,
Click the button to start computation,
Click OK to close the dialog.
Notes :
Shadowing margin values are not null only when standard deviations are defined for clutters.
In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects, uplink soft handover gains due to multipath (2 and 3 links)
are also indicated in this window,
If no clutter data is available, shadowing margin will be set to 0dB, and UL soft handover gain will be
set to the default global value (defined in the Transmitter global parameters in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA
2000),
When the reliability level is 50%, even if UL SHO gains (2 and 3 links) are computed in this window,
the value taken into account is the default global value (defined in the Transmitter global parameters)
for coverage studies and point analysis.
In UMTS and CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations, these losses are evaluated by computing random
shadowing errors and are added to the model path loss.
From a user-defined standard deviation corresponding to the clutter class where the receiver is located and a
reliability level, ATOLL evaluates a shadowing margin and adds it to the path loss predicted by the model. In
order for ATOLL to take into account a defined reliability level in calculations, you must define model
standard deviation per clutter class. All coverage studies integrate the possibility to enter a reliability level (in
their property dialog box).
Notes :
If your model is correctly calibrated, you may use the model standard deviations that ATOLL
calculates for each clutter class, in the Measurements folder (Statistics in the Predictions tab of the
Properties window).
In case of a correctly calibrated propagation model, typical standard deviations should be around 6 dB
to 9 dB.
We remind you that model calibration and its result (standard deviation) strongly depend on the
measurement samples you use. A calibrated model must restore the behaviour of measurements
depending on their configuration on a large scale, not totally stick to a few number of measurements.
The calibrated model has to give correct results for every new measurement point performed in the
same geographical zone, without having been calibrated on these measurements.
In Interference computation (GSM/TDMA, UMTS, CDMA/CDMA 2000), Shadowing margins
(depending on the entered reliability level and the standard deviation per clutter class) are applied only
on signal level values. These are not taken into account in noise determinations.
When calculating coverage with a x% reliability level, ATOLL displays the areas where the measured field
exceeds the predicted signal during x% of time. When increasing the reliability level, the predicted signal
deviates from average and hence, the shadowing margin raises.
Notes :
When using the ITU 370 model, take care not to define reliability level, the reliability level being already
included as a parameter.
The possibility to make soft handover in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000 make available the computation
of UL SHO gains for 2 and 3 links in predictions or simulations (UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000).
Furthermore, this tool is very helpful in the analysis of cases related to specific technologies. With this, you
can
evaluate interferences on a selected transmitter at a given point, and determine the interferers and
associated noise levels in GSM/TDMA projects,
make a complete active set analysis at a given point for a probe UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000 user
moving in the network with a particular behaviour. This tool will help you to study also, at a point, the
pilot reception and the connection status.
These specific studies are available in their specific parts.
Of course due to the fact that several powers can be defined on an identical transmitter (at the TRX type
level in GSM/TDMA or at the cell level in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000), point analysis window provides the
possibility to select either the TRX type or the carrier of the study.
Using the Standard Propagation Model, it is possible to obtain further data along a terrain profile with the
point analysis. Handing other tools like export ease, link budget, the possibility to adjust in real time reliability
level, etc...are also available
Note : like for coverage predictions, and because propagation models may be defined either in the
Predictions folder or in the Transmitters folder, you must be very careful to its priority order. The
propagation model defined with transmitters is taken first before the one defined with Predictions
(See Selecting and managing propagation models).
If you click on the map, the receiver is fixed on a particular point. To move it again, just click the icon,
and drag it over the map.
In this profile tab window, ATOLL indicates the propagation model associated with the selected transmitter;
this model is used for analysis. You may choose to display either the signal or several losses at any point.
You can also choose the item level at which the power(s) of each transmitter are defined.
The altitude (expressed in metres) is reported on the vertical scale. Along the profile, if the signal meets an
obstacle, this causes an attenuation with diffraction symbolized by a red vertical line (if the model used takes
into account diffraction mechanisms). The main peak taken into account is the one that intersects the most
the Fresnel ellipsoid. Any attenuation that occurs is then calculated in one hand, between the station and the
main peak, in the other hand, between the main peak and the receiver. With some propagation models using
a 3 knife-edge Deygout diffraction method, the result may then show up two new attenuations peaks in
addition to the main peak. The various peaks are identified by red lines. The attenuation generated by all the
peaks is displayed above the main peak.
Only the first Fresnel ellipsoid and the terrain profile appear for these two models.
The value of the different signal levels coming from different transmitters is reported in the Reception window
in bar form, from top to bottom from the highest predicted signal level to the lowest one. Displayed bars have
the same colours as defined for each transmitter.
Notes :
Displaying the predicted signal level at a point is possible only if path loss matrices have already be
determined. To do this, you must have previously executed any coverage prediction or simulations
(CDMA/CDMA 2000, UMTS) before using the point analysis tool.
You can choose the item level at which the power(s) of each transmitter are defined,
IN GSM/TDMA projects, it is possible to select the HCS layer on which you want to study signal levels.
For UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000 studies, that's the pilot power which is displayed in this window
whereas it is the Ec/Io which is given in the AS analysis window (1,2)
So, ATOLL provides in the Results tab of the Point analysis window:
General information on the receiver: its coordinates (stated in the Display coordinate system) and the
clutter class which it is located on,
The signal level received from each transmitter containing the receiver in its calculation area,
(Transmitters are sorted in a descending signal level order),
C/I levels due to surrounding transmitters, first both in co-channel and adjacent cases, then in adjacent
channel case only (studying always the most interfered TRX) in GSM/TDMA projects.
Notes :
Displaying the predicted signal level at a point is possible only if path loss matrices have already be
determined. To do this, you must have previously executed any coverage prediction or simulations
(CDMA/CDMA 2000, UMTS) before using the point analysis tool.
Interferences are possible only if some channels have been allocated to TRXs.
You can choose the item level at which the power(s) of each transmitter are defined,
IN GSM/TDMA projects, it is possible to select the HCS layer on which you want to study signal levels.
For UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000 studies, that's the pilot power which is displayed in this window
whereas it is the Ec/Io which is given in the AS analysis window (1,2)
To do so, when using the point analysis icon over the map as a moving receiver, click on the map at
the location you want to study different transmitters. Then, the receiver is fixed on the map. In the Point
analysis window (Profile or Interference tab), select the transmitter to study then. Results are
automatically displayed in the Point analysis window.
This feature is available both when working in the Profile, Reception, Interference, Results and AS Analysis
tabs(1, 2). Nevertheless, concerning the last one, the (all) option (for cells) works regarding the carrier
selection mode as defined in the site equipment (UMTS, CDMA/CDMA 2000)
The reliability level can be set at the receiver, in order to calculate shadowing margins (using standard
deviation defined per clutter class) to apply to computed propagation.
In any tab window of the point analysis window, to access the reliability setting box, proceed as follows :
Right click in the current Point analysis window,
Choose the Properties... option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Set the value of the reliability level,
The related shadowing margin (and UL SHO gains in UMTS and CDMA/CDMA 2000
projects) value is automatically displayed,
Click OK to close the dialog.
Notes :
Shadowing margin values are not null only when standard deviations are defined for clutters.
If no clutter data is available, shadowing margin will be set to 0dB, and UL soft handover gain will be
set to the default global value (defined in the Transmitter global parameters in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA
2000),
In UMTS and CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations, these losses are evaluated by computing random
shadowing errors and are added to the model path loss.
Depending on the tab in use (reception profile, predicted signal, interference analysis, Results, and AS
Analysis tabs(1, 2), it is possible to display different pieces of information.
Hence, you can choose to display results at a given point in term of path loss, total losses or signal level in
the Profile tab of the point analysis window. This can also be made as a coverage condition.
In the Profile tab window, to access the result type box, proceed as follows :
Right click in the current Point analysis window,
Choose the Properties... option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Choose to display either the signal level, path loss or total losses in the Result type scrolling
box,
Click OK to close the dialog and validate your choice.
Right click on the profile part of the current window in order to open the associated context
menu,
Choose the Model details command from the displayed menu.
The default text editor for txt files opens. In this report, ATOLL gives the number of points taken into account
along the transmitter-receiver profile and details for every point:
• The distance between the point and the transmitter (Dist) in m,
• The ground height (Alt) in m,
• The ground height with earth curvature consideration (Gr H) in m,
• The total height (Tot H) in m: Tot H = Gr H + clutter height.
Note : At the transmitter (first point in the list) or at the receiver (last point in the list), we respectively have:
Tot H = Gr H + Clutter height + HTx and Tot H = Gr H + Clutter height + HRx, where, HTx and HRx are
respectively transmitter and receiver antenna heights above the ground (m).
Then, it recapitulates effective transmitter antenna height (Tx effective height), K1 and K2 parameters used
in calculations (Far or Near, LOS or NLOS) and detailed propagation results. Correction for low Tx effective
height, are different from zero.
Depending on the type of project considered, some specific studies (treated in their specific parts) are also
available :
- Interference studies in GSM/TDMA projects
- Specific E/GPRS studies dealing with coding schemes or rates colouring,
- Specific UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000 studies based either on simulations or user-defined traffic loads.
Like for many other ATOLL objects, the management of coverage study is both easy and powerful. The
generic ATOLL display dialog (including legend, label et tip management) is used and allows you to display
your study on several attributes related to transmitters. Furthermore, some organization features (filter, sort
and groups) are also available.
Management of results is also provided in ATOLL in a very complete way. Indeed, it is possible to
lock/unlock either complete studies or individual matrices, to display, print or export exhaustive coverage
reports, to export matrices or coverage zones, to check the validity of current results regarding to the current
radio configurations, and other tools always with a view to make handy coverage studies in ATOLL.
The calculation radius limits the scope of the calculations to the radius that has been defined. The calculation
radius prevents the system from calculating over too long distances (e.g. in an urban area). In the case of
very large environments, the calculation radius allows you to improve the calculation time. If no calculation
radius has been defined, ATOLL takes into account the prediction minimum threshold to define the
calculation radius for each transmitter. Calculation radius can be set either from the transmitters properties or
from the station template properties.
Note : when changing a computation zone (for example : reducing) in which some predictions studies have
already been made, it is strongly advised to run again predictions in order to ensure validity of results with
current computation zone.
To store path loss matrices in an external .losses folder of the current .atl ATOLL project, proceed as
follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Properties... option from the scrolling menu,
Check the external calculation storage box,
Use the What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window,
Click OK to validate.
When selecting this option, a folder with .losses extension is automatically created in the directory where the
ATOLL project is saved. This new folder has the same name as the associated ATOLL project. The folder
consists of two files per active transmitter, a binary file with .los extension including the path loss matrices
and a text file with .par extension containing calculation parameters.
Caution : the external files are updated without saving the ATOLL environment as soon as calculations are
performed. To keep consistency with the stored calculations, the corresponding ATOLL environment must
be saved before closing.
Using this option, calculations are no longer stored in the .atl file. Nevertheless, to get a .atl file with smaller
size (where matrices where initially embedded into), save your environment with another name using the
File: Save as… command; a new .losses folder linked to .atl file is created in the same directory. This feature
enables the user to store bigger calculations in external files without storage size limitation (2 Gbytes for a
file).This could be useful for both calculation sharing, optimisation of storage sizes, and, hence, calculation
time.
Note : this feature allows you to create matrices that will sharable between several users.
At this step, no calculation is made. A prediction with the parameters you decided is ready to be calculated
only.
Notes : User interface of each prediction study Properties is standardised. For any common study, the
Properties window consists of three tabs:
The General tab where you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter
criteria,
The Condition tab where you can specify the study parameters,
The Display tab to define coverage display settings.
Notes :
The general tab of the prediction dialog can be also used to filter transmitters in such way,
Coverages per group of transmitters work like when filtering transmitters in coverage studies, i.e., the
filter is made on display only, and note on computations.
Predictions are organised as the other ATOLL objects, i.e. in a folder form. The Predictions folder is the root
for all the performed coverage predictions subfolders. So, it is possible to access to the properties of either
the Predictions folder or of any prediction subfolder.
Practical examples: The network consists of 4 stations (Tx0, Tx1, Tx2 and Tx3).
Coverage by transmitter study: with best server, no margin and filter on Tx0.
ATOLL displays the areas where the signal level from Tx0 is higher than the specified threshold and Tx0 is
the best server.
To make a filter on any study, open its associated properties, and use the standard filter tools by clicking the
button.
Notes :
Filters defined in the Transmitters folder and filters inside a polygon have priority over the prediction
filters. Transmitters, which do not check these filter criteria, are considered as inactive in predictions.
In the General tab, Group and Sort features enable you to organise study result in the Explorer. You
can group or sort a study according to any transmitter attribute. These commands are always available
except when selecting display of best signal level, best server path loss, best server total losses or
number of servers.
So, in this tab, you must specify (using the What's this help to get information about available fields in the
condition tab window):
The study criterion you want ATOLL to calculate: you can choose to evaluate the signal level at the
receiver (Signal level), the path loss (Path loss) or the total losses (Total losses), as in point analysis,
Minimum and maximum thresholds: a bin of the map will be covered only if the calculated criterion
on the bin is between minimum and maximum thresholds.
Servers you want to study. You may choose All or best signal level.
A margin in case of a best signal study.
- In case of all the servers are considered (All), the coverage area of Txi is the zone where:
Minimum threshold < PTxi ( Txi
rec or L tot or Total − Losses )
Txi ≤ Maximum threshold
- In case of best signal (Best signal level) and no margin, the coverage area of Txi is the zone where:
Minimum threshold < PTxi ( Txi
rec or L tot or Total − Losses )
Txi ≤ Maximum threshold
and
Txi is the best server
- In case of best signal level and a margin, the coverage area of Txi is the zone where:
Minimum threshold < PTxi ( Txi
rec or L tot or Total − Losses )
Txi ≤ Maximum threshold
and
Txi
Txi is the best server or otherwise, P rec is within a margin of the best server
Note : In GSM/TDMA projects, you can select Best signal level of the highest priority layer as server. Let us
assume that each transmitter belongs to a HCS layer with a defined priority. In this case, the coverage area
of Txi corresponds to the zone where:
Minimum threshold < PTxi ( Txi
rec or L tot or Total − Losses )
Txi ≤ Maximum threshold
and
Txi is the best server
and
Txi belongs to the HCS layer with the highest priority
The study reliability level. Entering 60% as reliability level means that the measured criterion exceeds
the predicted one, 60% of the time.
The selection of an item defining power in transmitters (TRX types in GSM/TDMA projects, carrier in
UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000)
Note : this tab deals with transmitter selection only. Data to be displayed are managed in the Display tab.
Concerning the coverage itself, ATOLL uses the generic display dialog in order to make easy and complete
its management. So, when creating a prediction study, once the filter on the transmitters to take into account
in computations are coverage (and interference) condition are set (condition tab), the display tab allows you
to coloured the defined zones depending on selected attributes (using the What's this help to get
information about available fields in the display tab window). Attributes can be chosen in order to realize
either common studies (coverage by transmitter, by signal level, overlapping zones), or specific studies (e.g.
interference studies in GSM/TDMA projects, handover status, pilot pollution, etc.., in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA
2000 projects).
On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, ATOLL calculates path loss from the transmitter. A bin of a
coverage area is coloured if path loss exceeds (=) entered minimum thresholds (bin colour depends on path
loss). Coverage consists of several independent layers which you may manage visibility in the workspace.
There are as many layers as coverage areas. Each layer shows the different path loss levels in the
transmitter coverage area.
Number of servers
ATOLL evaluates how many coverage areas cover a bin in order to determine the number of servers. The
bin colour depends on the number of servers. Coverage consists of several independent layers which you
may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer
corresponds to an area where the number of servers exceeds (=) a defined minimum threshold.
Caution: In case of a signal level, path loss or total losses display, the lowest defined threshold must be
equal to the minimum threshold entered in the Condition tab.
Notes :
ATOLL offers default calculation and display parameters when creating common prediction studies
(coverage by signal level, coverage by transmitter and overlapping), but it is possible to cover by signal
level even if choosing a coverage by transmitter study.
The definition of a study (coverage condition and display parameters) can be chosen for a study
template.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to
recalculate prediction study in order to update coverage.
All the study templates saved in this file are available when creating new prediction studies. In the Study
types window, ATOLL lists all the classical studies available for a type of project in the standard studies part
and the study templates you have created in the customised studies part.
Note : the name given to the reference study is kept as template name.
It is possible to remove a study template from the file. In the Study types window, select a customised study
and click on the Delete button.
Note : you can also delete globally all the customized studies by deleting the Studies.xml file in the ATOLL
directory.
Notes : The calculate and calculate all features can be accessed also either :
by using respectively the F7 and Ctrl+F7 keys,
from the Tools menu in the menu bar,
from the Predictions folder context menu.
commit calculations on other studies. So, this feature offers the user the possibility to easily compare
prediction results. This can be made either globally or independently for each existing prediction.
Locked predictions are displayed with the icon, whereas unlocked predictions are given by the icon.
Note : Be careful not to mix up locking predictions with locking path loss results from the Result storage.
Even if some predictions are locked and other unlocked, path loss matrices may stay unchanged if either
they are locked in the Result storage window or if the user does not use the Calculate all button.
Caution : when calculations have to be completed, be sure to have already defined the coordinate system
used in the current project.
The coverage by transmitter study enables the user to predict coverage zones by transmitter as function of
either the signal level, the path loss or total losses defined within a user-defined range.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the coverage by transmitter option
from the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and
Display. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the
windows.
The coverage by transmitter study is a template for which the field 'Transmitter' is selected by default in the
display tab. In that case, coverage zones will be displayed with the same colours than the ones defined for
each transmitter.
Notes :
ATOLL offers default calculation and display parameters when creating common prediction studies but
it is possible to cover by signal level even if choosing a coverage by transmitter study just by setting
display.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to
recalculate prediction study in order to update coverage.
Standard studies are divide into two parts, common studies and studies which are specific to the current
project (GSM/TDMA, UMTS, CDMA/CDMA 2000). Common studies for any projects are : coverage by
transmitter, coverage by signal level and overlapping zones.
The coverage by signal level study enables the user to predict coverage zones by transmitter as function of
either the signal level, the path loss or total losses defined within a user-defined range.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the coverage by signal level option
from the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and
Display. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the
windows.
The coverage by signal level study is a template for which the field 'Best signal level' is selected by default in
the display tab. In that case, each layer corresponds to an area where the signal level from the best server
exceeds a defined minimum threshold. Numerous option related to signal level coverage are available in the
Display tab.
Notes :
ATOLL offers default calculation and display parameters when creating common prediction studies but
it is possible to cover by transmitter even if choosing a coverage by signal level study just by setting
display.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to
recalculate prediction study in order to update coverage.
Choosing a display per best signal level make the coverage folder made of threshold items whereas
choosing a display per signal level let the folder be made of transmitter items.
Overlapping is a coverage whose points correspond, for a defined condition, to the common points of areas
covered by the signal of, at least, two transmitters. Therefore, ATOLL displays the areas where the signal
level from at least two transmitters (signal level option), the path loss of the signal received from at least two
transmitters (path loss option), or total losses along two paths between the considered point and transmitters
(total losses option), is between minimum and maximum user-defined thresholds.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Overlapping option from the
study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and Display.
For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.
The coverage by signal level study is a template for which the field 'Best signal level' is selected by default in
the display tab. In that case, each layer corresponds to an area where the signal level from the best server
exceeds a defined minimum threshold. Numerous option related to signal level coverage are available in the
Display tab.
Notes :
ATOLL offers default calculation and display parameters when creating common prediction studies but
it is possible to cover by transmitter even if choosing an overlapping study just by adjusting display.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to
recalculate prediction study in order to update coverage.
From available results, it is possible to display associated statistical reports on the coverage zones
associated with each prediction study, and to easily export or print them.
For any prediction, coverage results may be exported in ArcView© or MapInfo© format. Exported data
are covered areas associated with the considered study.
Another ATOLL feature allows you a complete management of path loss matrices related to transmitters.
Firstly, it is possible to lock only some path loss matrices (even if invalid), while calculating path loss
matrices from other transmitters of the network. Then, it is possible to check the validity of current matrices
regarding the current radio parameters. Then, these path loss matrices my also be exported in order to be
used by other tools.
Results (path loss matrix for each transmitter) may be either directly embedded to any current project, or
outsourced to an external folder, in order to let them available from other users. Indeed, ATOLL permits to
share propagation results stored in an external folder between several users. Therefore, this special
results storage permits to use in the same project, both external results for some transmitters and
private results for others. This part is treated in the specific multi-users chapter.
Note : even if several cells can be defined per transmitter in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000, only one path
loss matrix is computed per transmitter, powers not being parameters of interest for matrix computation.
When a report table is active, columns can be managed by using the columns to display option from the
Format menu. On first opening, the report will only display the name and coverage areas columns.
Notes :
You may display simultaneously report on all displayed coverages by using the Report option from the
Predictions folder context menu. The obtained report concerns all displayed predictions, and is
featured in the order defined in the Explorer window Data tab.
The several parameters than can be displayed in reports have more or less meaning depending both
on the considered technology and study.
Columns to display are either related to the global coverage or to each transmitter taking part into the
coverage.
You may also export the displayed map (including currently displayed results) and the results from the point
analysis window to any other application program supporting image data format.
Print reports can be centred on the sheet and possibly spread over a number of sheets for large-scale tables.
Cell sizes are then displayed on the screen.
Comment : When printing a report, a footnote is created automatically in order to indicate the date (in
month/day/year format) and the time of printing as well as the page numbering.
Notes :
Be very careful about the accuracy of the coordinate system format to export. Indeed, this function is
particularly useful in the case of the coordinates being different between your ATOLL file and the data
present in ArcView© or MapInfo©. Selecting a different coordinates system results in the exported
coordinates being converted (e.g. a cartographic type system to geographic type system or vice-
versa).
Shp filenames are not limited in number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made of more than 8 characters.
Raster format export is not possible when there is a coverage area per transmitter (coverage studies
with display type per transmitter, per any transmitter attribute, per signal level, per path loss, per total
losses). In this case, only coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in BMP or TIFF raster
format.
Overlapping
Coverage by signal level
Coverage by C/I level
Pilot pollution
Downlink total noise The total coverage
handover status
E/GPRS max rate per timeslot
E/GPRS coding scheme
Coverage by transmitter
Interfered zones
Service area (Eb/Nt) uplink The total coverage
Service area (Eb/Nt) downlink Coverage of each transmitter
Effective service area
Pilot reception analysis Ec/Io
For each exported prediction (total or for a transmitter), the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle
encompassing the coverage
Note : exporting coverage zones by transmitter is possible only if the associated coverage study folder is
displayed is made of transmitter subfolders.
Each line displayed in the table deals with a transmitter. For each of one, by selecting the transmitter(s) of
interest, You may :
lock its results on path loss,
delete its results from the private folder,
exclude useless calculations.
Nevertheless, all existing (even locked) matrices are recalculated if you use the Calculate all button
during calculations.
There are two ways to lock path loss matrices, either from the Predictions global properties in a table form, or
from any transmitter properties.
Click OK to validate.
From this dialog box, it is possible to know how many matrices must be recalculated in order to be
consistent with the current radio configuration before starting calculations. Only matrices dealing with
active transmitters are taken into account in that case. To do so, click on the . The
number is automatically given in the dialog. The number of transmitters available in the current network is
also indicated.
Caution : take care not to confuse with externalising path loss results (each matrix is "made" of a .par and
.los file)
In TDMA technology, users are spread over frequency bands made of physical channels. Each of these
physical channels is divided into a certain number of logical channels called timeslots. The norm in standard
TDMA is 8 timeslots per channel. This means that a channel can carry simultaneously 8 speaking users.
Even if users on a same physical channel do not interferer each other (spread on time), every data carried
on a physical channel can be potentially interfered by other communications occurring on co-channel or on
adjacent channel. The goal of planning such a GSM/TDMA network will be to provide a sufficient coverage to
cover a maximum area, to assign to transmitters enough channels in order to absorb the traffic demand by
limiting interferences in the network.
Geo data are easily manageable as in the other projects. You may either create or import any of these data.
Sites, antennas, station templates, transmitters, measurements, and propagation models work in the same
way for GSM/TDMA projects than for the other technology types. Nevertheless, the complexity of such a
modelling has led to the introduction of several specific radio data for GSM/TDMA in order to optimise the
management of radio resources. As many objects in ATOLL, these data are easy to manage and use
generic dialogs.
Traffic is also a parameter than can be easily generated and managed in ATOLL. This is useful in order to
dimension TRXs (set of logical channels) for each transmitter. Once the number or resources needed to
absorb the traffic is set, you can easily manually assign frequencies to transmitters. Even if all common
studies are available (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level, overlapping) with some specific
conditions due to GSM/TDMA, ATOLL provides also some other specific coverage studies dealing with
interferences : interfered areas and coverage by C/I level. Furthermore, like for the study of the profile and
reception in point analysis (and active set in UMTS and CDMA/CDMA 2000), it is possible to study
interferences in GSM/TDMA using the point analysis.
These results show clearly that most of the time the network has to be optimised in order to stick to the goals
(see above). Hence, ATOLL provides powerful features dealing with the determination (manually or
automatically) and the management of neighbourhoods. These definitions, used with some other constraints
can be used as input constraints for an automatic planning tool. The results have to provide a frequency plan
with enough resources to absorb the defined traffic minimizing interferences on the basis of input constraints.
Once the frequency plan is set, an automatic tool is available in order to check its consistency.
EDGE (Enhanced Data-rates for GSM - or Global - Evolution) and GPRS (Global Packet Radio Service) are
technologies using also TDMA concepts. Contrary to GSM working in circuit switched mode, EDGE and
GPRS use timeslot working on packet switched mode, but can be mixed with GSM timeslots on transmitters.
Hence, it is possible in ATOLL to work on such projects using a unique template, and some transmitters will
be defined as E/GPRS stations or not. Related properties will be adapted. Once the composite network (and
related equipment) is set, ATOLL provides specific computations on E/GPRS such as coverage by coding
schemes or by rate per timeslot. Furthermore, coming from rate studies, it is possible to calculate the
average capacity per timeslot per transmitter.
For all the dialogs used in TDMA projects, the What's this context tool allows the user to understand the
specific fields and available features.
As many other objects in ATOLL, these parameters have been integrated to the tool with a will to make their
management and their use easy. By their use, it is possible to define subcells and TRXs of stations. For all of
these, you can describe and manage several frequency and BSIC domains.
Thanks to this advanced description level, concentric cells are supported. In addition, modelling of several
hopping modes are supported : no hopping, Base Band Hopping and Synthesised Frequency Hopping.
Some parameters such as MAL (Mobile Allocation List), HSN (Hopping Sequence Number), MAIO (Mobile
Allocation Index Offset) are managed.
VI.2.2 FREQUENCIES
A domain is a set of groups; it consists of one or several groups. A frequency domain belongs to a
frequency band; it is a subset of the frequency band.
A group is a set of channels. A frequency group belongs to one or several frequency domains; it is a
subset of frequency domains.
Manual and automatic frequency planning is based on frequency domains assigned to the TRX types in cell
types.
The creation and the management of frequency domains and groups, like for many other objects in ATOLL
always stays easy and clear.
Frequency band properties can be accessed in two ways, either from a frequency band table, either from a
frequency band dialog.
Notes :
The Frequency domains tab lists the domains related to the current frequency band,
Addition, deletion of frequency bands are made using respectively the and
buttons,
The button helps you to manage the content of the frequency band table (See below).
Notes :
The dialog of each frequency band (see above) is reachable by either double clicking the related
record in the table, or by using the button once a record is selected,
The button helps you to manage the content of the frequency band table.
An Other Properties tab is available when some user defined fields have been added to the Frequency
band table.
You can also define the domain-group pairs in the Group of frequencies window.
The defined domains can be now assigned to TRX types of each cell type in order then to be used as
constraints in the automatic allocation of frequencies.
VI.2.3 HSNS
HSN (Hopping Sequence Number) parameter is used to describe frequency hopping sequence; this is one of
4 input parameters for GSM hopping sequence generator algorithm. HSN may take 64 different values; they
are numbered from 0 to 63. Frequency sequences are pseudo-random, except for the special case of HSN =
0, where frequencies are used one after the other (cyclic hopping).
In ATOLL, for a complete exploitation of HSNs, it is possible to define HSN domains and groups.
Manual and automatic HSN planning are based on the HSN domains assigned to TRX types in cell types.
Creation and management of HSN domains and groups, like for many other objects in ATOLL always stays
easy and clear.
You can also define the domain-group pairs in the Group of HSNs window.
The defined domains can be now assigned to TRX types of each cell type in order then to be used as
constraints in the automatic allocation of HSNs.
VI.2.4 BSICS
In versions prior to 2.1, BSIC notation was NCC-BCC. During BSIC allocation, it was necessary to specify
NCC; therefore, ATOLL could choose BSICs to be allocated in a fixed domain containing 8 possible BSICs
(from NCC-0 to NCC-7).
In addition, BSIC management has been enhanced. As available BSICs depend on the country and on the
area; it is sometimes necessary to distinguish borders from other zones. To model this, domain and group
tables have been created.
Manual or automatic BSIC planning is based on the BSIC domain assigned to transmitter.
Creation and management of BSIC domains and groups, like for many other objects in ATOLL always stays
easy and clear.
Note : A default domain called “ALL NCCs” exists; it contains the 64 BSICs.
You can also define the domain-group pairs in the Group of BSICs window.
The defined domains can be now assigned to each transmitter in order then to be used as constraints in the
automatic allocation of BSICs.
Cell types are linked to station templates or transmitters. Indeed, when defining a station template or
transmitter properties, you must specify the cell type which the station or transmitter refers to.
Creation and management of cell types, like for many other objects in ATOLL always stays easy and clear.
Note : you can define additional TRX types directly from the GSM_EGPRS.mdb document template.
The cell type definition must include a TRX type, which is the BCCH carrier (BCCH TRX type), and a TRX
type, which is the default traffic carrier (TCH TRX type). Only one TRX type carrying the broadcast and only
one TRX type carrying the default TCH are supported.
TRX types are the standard elements which compose cell types.
Cell type properties can be accessed in two ways, either from a Cell type table, either from a Cell type dialog.
Notes :
Addition, deletion of cell types are made using respectively the and buttons,
The button helps you to manage the content of the cell type table (See below).
Notes :
The dialog of each cell type (see above) is reachable by either double clicking the related record in the
table, or by using the button once a record is selected,
The button helps you to manage the content of the cell type table.
An Other Properties tab is available when some user defined fields have been added to the Cell type
table.
Allocation mode,
It refers to the allocation strategy used during manual or automatic frequency planning. Two allocation
strategies are offered:
- Free allocation: all the channels of the frequency domain can be assigned to TRXs.
- Grouped allocation: Only channels belonging to a same group of the frequency domain can be chosen.
Min C/I,
This is a quality condition; you can enter specific quality requirements for each TRX type. It can be used as
reference value in interference studies and in AFP.
% max interference,
This is the maximum percentage of interfered area or interfered traffic that ATOLL must not exceed during
automatic frequency planning.
AFP weight,
This is a cost factor used to increase or decrease the importance of a TRX type during automatic frequency
planning. The cost factor must be a positive real. The higher the AFP weight is, the higher the constraint on
the TRX type is.
HSN domain,
Only HSNs belonging to this HSN domain will be allocated to subcells during automatic or manual frequency
planning. Allocation of HSN is performed in case of BBH or SFH.
Freeze HSN,
Selecting this option enables you to keep the current HSN allocation of subcells related to this TRX type
when starting a new AFP session.
Note : These time slots are exclusively dedicated to traffic channels; they are not used for BCCH and CCCH
(Control Common Channels).
In case of BCCH TRX type, at least one time slot is used for BCCH. So, we have:
circuit
NTS + NTS
packet
+ NTS
composite
≤ F multiplexing − 1
circuit
NTS + NTS
packet
+ NTS
composite
= F multiplexing
F multiplexing is the multiplexing factor of the frequency band, which the frequency domain assigned to this TRX
type belongs to.
The number of requested TRXs for voice traffic depends on these values. In case of E/GPRS stations,
ATOLL considers only time slots available for voice traffic ( NTS + NTS
circuit composite
). If the E/GPRS option is not
circuit
selected (GSM station), ATOLL considers all the time slots ( NTS + NTS
packet
+ composite
NTS ).
In addition, these parameters are taken into account in GPRS dimensioning (Timeslot capacity calculation)
Default hysteresis,
This parameter is not used in this ATOLL version.
This is a default value of a subcell specific parameter. It denotes the handover hysteresis margin (when
going below min reception level). It concerns intra-cell handovers only.
Priority,
This parameter is not used in this ATOLL version.
If a probe mobile can be served by more than one subcell of a transmitter, the subcell that has a higher
service priority will serve it.
There are two groups of characteristics, the default ones and the global ones. The default characteristics are
used to initialise subcell properties when creating a transmitter; they can be modified in the transmitter
property dialog without modifying the default values defined for the cell type, which the transmitter refers to.
The global characteristics are only specified in the cell type property dialog and cannot be changed in each
transmitter property dialog; they are unique and applied to all the transmitters based on the cell type.
The table below described parameters to be specified for any selected hopping mode.
The table below described parameters to be specified for any selected hopping mode.
Default hopping mode Default Interference studies Non Hopping Base Band Synthesized
Hopping Hopping
Default reception threshold Default Signal level studies x x x
AFP weight Global Automatic frequency planning x x x
HSN domain Global Automatic frequency planning Not used x x
Freeze HSN Global Automatic frequency planning x x x
DTX support (default) Default Automatic frequency x x x
planning,
Interference studies
Number of composite TS (default) Default Number of requested TRXs, x x x
GPRS-like studies
Number of packet TS (default) Default Number of requested TRXs, x x x
GPRS-like studies
Number of circuit TS (default) Default Number of requested TRXs, x x x
GPRS-like studies
Default hysteresis Default Not used Not used Not used Not used
Priority Global Not used Not used Not used Not used
Hierarchical cells are taken into account (including priority) in any prediction study (e.g. coverage by
transmitter, interfered areas and coverage by C/I levels) based on search for best server for coverage
conditions.
To manage HCS layers that will be available to assign to transmitters, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder,
Choose the Layers... option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened dialog
window,
Click on the Records tab to open the Layers definition table and define layers and related
priority inside,
Click the Close button to validate.
VI.2.7 TRANSMITTERS
Notes :
Layer priority is then automatically assigned to transmitter. This parameter maybe taken into account
in GSM/TDMA coverage conditions in prediction studies,
Assigning HCS layers to transmitters is optional.
Notes :
Cell type associated to the transmitter can be changed afterwards,
ATOLL automatically updates subcell characteristics according to the new selected cell type.
Once selected, cell type property dialog can be open by clicking on the button,
ATOLL indicates the main frequency band of the transmitter. This is the frequency band, which the
frequency domain assigned to BCCH TRX type belongs to. ATOLL takes into account this frequency
band in path loss matrix evaluation.
Notes :
BSIC domain associated to the transmitter can be changed afterwards,
Once selected, BSIC domain dialog can be open by clicking on the button,
The BSIC domain is an input required for manual or automatic BSIC allocation.
Once a BSIC domain has been allocated to a transmitter, it is possible either to manually or automatically
choose a BSIC among available ones for any transmitter.
Notes :
BSIC associated to the transmitter can be changed afterwards.
The selected BSIC must be part of the chosen BSIC domain.
Once chosen in single digit format, the related NCC-BCC format is automatically displayed above the
scrolling box.
It is possible to edit the BSIC scrolling box. Furthermore, you can enter the BSIC value with a NCC-
BCC format in the scrolling box, and click the Apply button. ATOLL will convert it in the single digit
format consistent with the related BSIC domain.
Either,
In Non Hopping or Base Band Hopping, Create a new TRX of type BCCH and enter the
related channel,
Or,
In Synthesised Frequency Hopping, Create a new TRX of type BCCH, fill the related
MAL in the TRX part, and enter the channel on which will be located the timeslot 0
dedicated to the steady diffusion of BCCH information,
Click OK to close the dialog
Note : You can also automatically a TRX of type BCCH by entering the related frequency in the BCCH
columns from the transmitter global table.
Subcells of transmitter and their settings depend on the cell type selected for the transmitter. The cell type
predefines the TRX type of each subcell and some parameters initialised by default values defined for the
cell type. The default values reported for subcells can be modified without changing reference for the cell
type. On the other hand, ATOLL updates subcell characteristics when selecting another cell type.
Except their TRX type (coming from the selected cell type), all subcell properties are editable and can be
modified in the subcell part of any transmitter property.
To access the subcell table from the transmitter properties, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the
appropriate Tx symbol (arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the TRXs tab of the current dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the opened dialog window,
Define the Subcell settings in the subcell part,
Click OK to close the dialog.
The button helps you to manage the content of the subcell table.
Requested TRXs
This is the number of TRXs requested for a subcell. In case of BCCH TRX type, the number of requested
TRXs is 1 by default. In case of TCH or TCH_INNER TRX type, this is a network dimensioning result, which
depends on the traffic density in the subcell and on the blocked call percentage.
Traffic load,
It indicates the usage rate of TRXs; its value is between 0 and 1. This parameter may be, either user-
defined, or automatically reported after calculating the number of requested TRXs. In this case, traffic load
( Ltraffic ) is a dimensioning result; this is a global traffic load for all the subcells of each transmitter. We have:
Traffic
Ltraffic =
NTRX
Traffic is the traffic request (Erlang) on the transmitter coverage area,
NTRX is the total number of TRXs requested by a transmitter.
HSN
This is the hopping sequence number of subcell. All the TRXs of the subcell have the same HSN. HSN can
be manually entered or automatically allocated. Only HSN belonging to the HSN domain assigned to this
TRX type (in the selected cell type property dialog) can be allocated. This parameter is taken into account in
interference calculation in case of SFH or BBH.
Synchronisation
Type the same string of character in order for the TRXs of several subcells are synchronized during
frequency hopping. By default, synchronization is performed at the site level; TRXs of subcells on a same
site are synchronized. You may also define synchronization at the subcell level (different values for each
subcell) or group of transmitters level (unique value for subcells of this group).
Notes :
1. Any string of character can be entered.
2. This field is case sensitive.
This parameter is taken into account in interference calculation in case of frequency hopping (BBH or SFH).
DL power offset
This is a reduction of power relative to the transmitter power. Entering 3 dB means that the subcell power will
be 3 dB lower than the transmitter power defined in the Transmitter tab.
Hopping mode
If frequency hopping is supported, choose either the Base Band Hopping mode (BBH), or the Synthesized
Hopping mode (SFH). Else, select Non Hopping.
Reception threshold
This is the reception condition for the subcell. This value can be used as reference value in signal level
coverage predictions (lowest received signal level in order for receiver to be covered by the subcell).
Hysteresis
This parameter is not used in this ATOLL version.
DTX supported
Select this option if DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) technology is supported for the subcell.
circuit
This is the number of time slots per TRX dedicated to circuit traffic (voice) ( NTS ).
Note : These time slots are exclusively dedicated to traffic channels; they are not used for BCCH and CCCH
(Control Common Channels).
In case of BCCH TRX type, at least one time slot is used for BCCH. So, we have:
NTS + NTS + NTS ≤ F multiplexing − 1
circuit packet composite
F multiplexing is the multiplexing factor of the frequency band, which the frequency domain assigned to this TRX
type belongs to.
The number of requested TRXs for voice traffic depends on these values. In case of E/GPRS stations,
ATOLL considers only time slots available for voice traffic ( NTS + NTS
circuit composite
). If the E/GPRS option is not
circuit
selected (GSM station), ATOLL considers all the time slots ( NTS + NTS
packet
+ composite
NTS ).
In addition, these parameters are taken into account in GPRS dimensioning (Timeslot capacity calculation).
The allocation can be also made by filling the Channels column from the transmitter table. When entering
channel values in the table, TRXs of type TCH are automatically created in the related transmitters.
Automatic frequency allocation can also be made using the optional AFP module.
To access the TRX table from the transmitter properties, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the
appropriate Tx symbol (arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the TRXs tab of the current dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the opened dialog window,
Define the TRX settings in the TRXs part,
Click OK to close the dialog.
The button helps you to manage the content of the TRX table.
Index
This is identification number of TRX. This number (integer) may be user-defined or automatically given by
ATOLL (after closing the dialog).
TRX type
Channels
Specify channel(s) allocated to TRX: 1 channel per TRX if the hopping mode for the TRX type is “Non
Hopping” or “Base Band Hopping”, several channels per TRX if the hopping mode for the TRX type is
“Synthesized Hopping”.
Channel(s) can be either copied, or manually selected one by one in the scrolling menu (select the box and
click on the arrow to open the scrolling menu). The scrolling menu offers you channels of the frequency
domain assigned to this TRX type (Cell type property dialog).
Freeze Channels
Select this option to keep the current channel allocation at the TRX level when starting a new AFP.
Note : the Freeze channels option can be also imposed at the transmitter level only.
This traffic map is similar to clutter raster maps within ATOLL in term of management. Hence, these are
easy to manage.
In ATOLL, it is possible to import easily a traffic map and manage its properties. You can also create or
modify your own traffic maps using the cartography editor. The resulting traffic map can be analysed using
statistic features.
To import a raster file as traffic data in GSM/TDMA projects. To do so, proceed as follows :
Choose the Import command from the File Menu in the menu bar,
Indicate the path and the name of the file to be imported in the opened dialog box,
Choose the traffic density option from the scrolling menu in the File import window to consider
the file as traffic,
Press the button to validate.
To describe the different traffic raster classes available in GSM/TDMA projects, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Either
Right click on the Traffic density folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Traffic density folder,
Click the Description tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Assign colour, name and density (Erlang/km²) to each code.
Press OK or Apply to validate.
To assign a colour to a traffic raster class, click on the colour box and choose a colour in the colour table.
You can then manually enter name and density for all traffic classes if these data haven't been automatically
specified during the import procedure.
Note : The description table can be fully copied and pasted (using Ctrl+V and Ctrl+C) in a new ATOLL
project after importing the traffic raster file.
Comments:
ATOLL considers as transparent colour. Thus, the geographic layer below the traffic will be visible in
the area where the white colour is assigned.
Before importing traffic raster file, it is important to define a reference class corresponding to zero
code, white colour and no data. Thus, the code "0" is allocated to area without any traffic.
The class names cannot exceed a length of 50 characters.
Path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.
To add a traffic raster class to the current geo environment in GSM/TDMA projects, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Either
Right click on the Traffic density folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or
Double click on the Traffic density folder,
Click the Description tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Press the button and describe it.
Press OK or Apply to validate.
Advice: Use this function to keep consistency between the traffic raster classes described in the table and
the map.
Example: ATOLL automatically memorizes the different traffic raster classes of imported file. Even after
deleting the file, traffic raster classes are stored in the description table. Pressing the button will
remove them.
To export a part or the complete traffic raster map in GSM/TDMA projects, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic density folder in order to get the related context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the opened scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported,
Click the Save button when this is made,
In the Export dialog box, select one of the options and define the resolution (in metres) of file :
The whole covered region option allows you to save the whole traffic map in another file.
As soon as the file is saved, the properties (name,...) of the traffic maps listed in the Traffic
map subfolder are updated.
The only pending changes option allows just to save in the file the created traffic polygonal
area. As soon as the modifications are saved, an additional clutter (or traffic) object is
created and listed in the Traffic folder.
The computation zone option allows you to save only traffic map region inside the
computation zone in another file. As soon as the file is saved, an additional traffic object is
created and listed in the Traffic map subfolder. To enable this option, you must have
drawn a computation zone beforehand.
A resolution value is suggested; it is defined for clutter from the following criteria :
If one traffic object is clipped, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution.
If several objects are modified, the suggested resolution will be the smallest
resolution of the altered clutter objects.
If there is no initial clutter object, the resolution will equal the resolution of DTM
object which the modifications are made on or the smallest resolution of the merged
DTM objects if the modifications are performed on several DTM objects.
If you draw your own traffic data without initial DTM, clutter or traffic object, a 100 m
default resolution will be suggested.
The resolution value must be an integer.
The minimum resolution is set to 1 metre.
Click OK to validate.
Comment: When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in
the same folder. The .hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain
geocoding information and resolution.
Si
% of i = × 100
∑ k
k
S
Notes :
If no focus zone is defined, statistics are given over the computation zone.
Current statistics are printable by clicking the button.
Transmitters are based on several TRX types (BCCH, TCH, TCH inner). Each of them is composed of as
many timeslots as defined in reference frequency band. Hence, ATOLL it is useful to calculate the number of
TRXs requested by each subcell.
In order to define the influence areas of subcells to dimension, this study is based on coverages by
transmitter related to each TRX type. Once made, traffic data is integrated on these covered areas in order
to evaluate the amount of traffic to absorb per subcell. Imposing a GOS (Grade of Service) in term of Erlang
B (blocked calls) or Erlang C (delayed calls), ATOLL computes the appropriate number of TRXs needed to
absorb such a traffic.
For transmitters made of several TRX types, including the definition of power offsets, the idea is to define
coverage per TRX types. Nevertheless, for any network based on normal or/and concentric cells,
dimensioning procedure is the same and can be performed in one step. The window is divided into three
parts:
A table which enables you to assign related coverage per transmitter study and percentage of traffic to
be covered to each TRX type (defined in the TRX types table of GSM_EGPRS.mdb document
template),
A part to specify dimensioning parameters,
The Results part.
Once calculations have been completed, results are given in the table. For each transmitter and each TRX
type, ATOLL displays the number of TRXs requested to satisfy the traffic demand on the transmitter
coverage area with a given GOS.
ATOLL also computes a global traffic load ( Ltraffic ) which indicates the average occupancy of TRXs; its value
is between 0 and 1. This is a global traffic load. We have:
Traffic
Ltraffic =
NTRX
Traffic is the traffic demand (Erlang) on the transmitter coverage area,
NTRX is the total number of TRXs requested by a transmitter.
Click the button to report this number to requested TRX number. Values are then
automatically reported in the subcell part of the transmitter property dialog boxes.
Notes :
In order not to consider twice some traffic data, use the best server option with a 0 dB option for the
reference coverage by transmitter,
Coverage by transmitter study on TCH TRX type is mandatory. If no study corresponding to TCH TRX
type exists, ATOLL systematically proposes New study (you will be able to specify study conditions
after clicking on Run). For other TRX types, ATOLL enters No study; in this case, you may create a
study by selecting New study.
The number of requested TRXs for voice traffic depends on the number of timeslots dedicated to voice
in subcells. In case of E/GPRS stations, ATOLL considers only time slots available for voice traffic
( NTS + NTS
circuit composite
). If the E/GPRS option is not selected (GSM station), ATOLL considers all the time
slots ( NTS + NTS + NTS
circuit packet composite
).
Hence, in GSM/TDMA projects, even if coverage study dialogs are composed of the three classical tabs :
The General tab where you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter
criteria,
The Condition tab where you can specify the study parameters,
The Display tab to define coverage display settings,
coverage conditions are managed with some specifics related to GSM/TDMA technology.
1- Indeed, coverage conditions include the possibility to choose between two options for the definition of
reception thresholds. You can either manually enter a lower threshold for the transmitters to be part of a
coverage, or you can choose the lower threshold defined in subcells (taking into account the power offset) for
this. To do this, select the button next to the threshold boxes. In each pixel, ATOLL will then take into
account all subcells respecting its minimum signal level at that point for the coverage. The best server notion
(+ margin) and the reliability level options are then considered.
2 - Concerning the best server option, ATOLL provides the possibility to consider or not HCS layers and
associated priorities. So, you can select Best signal level of the highest priority layer as server. Let us
assume that each transmitter belongs to a HCS layer with a defined priority. In this case, the coverage area
of Txi corresponds to the zone where:
and
P rec (BCCH ) is the highest one
Txi
and
Txi belongs to the HCS layer with the highest priority
Note : choosing the Best signal level per HCS layer makes ATOLL consider the best server of each HSC
layer on the considered pixel. Overlapping best server zones are enable.
3 - Furthermore, it is possible to restrict the reception on certain TRX types using the appropriate scrolling
box. It is possible to select the All option in interference studies.
4 - In interference studies, it is possible also to use the button in order to consider the min C/I threshold
defined per subcell as lower or upper ratio signal to noise for interference definition.
5 - As for the TRX type filter at reception on a pixel (See above 3 - ), you can also restrict the study to
potentially interfered TRX type using the appropriate scrolling box. Selecting the (All) option makes ATOLL
study C/I over each TRX type.
6 - Other specific options are relative to interference studies or E/GPRS studies and are described in the
corresponding context sensitive help.
Note : since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (e.g. : adjacent
channel protection level).
The interfered areas study enables the user to predict areas where transmitters are interfered (taken into
account depending on signal level) by other transmitters sharing either an identical channel or an adjacent
channel as function of signal to noise ratio. ATOLL computes C/I level on each calculation bin where
conditions on signal reception are satisfied. Then, it considers in coverage the bins where the calculated C/I
is lower than an upper threshold and colours the bin depending on an interfered transmitter attribute. The
interference definition is proper to each study.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Interfered area option from the
study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and Display.
For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.
The interfered area study is a template for which the field 'Transmitter' is selected by default in the display
tab. In that case, interfered zones will be displayed with the same colours than the ones defined for each
transmitter.
Note :
Shadowing margins (depending on the entered reliability level and the standard deviation per clutter
class) are applied only on the C values. These are not taken into account in I determinations.
ATOLL offers default calculation and display parameters when creating interference area prediction
studies but it is possible to colour by any other consistent attribute just by adjusting display.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to
The coverage by C/I level study enables the user to predict C/I levels involving transmitters (taken into
account depending on signal level) sharing either an identical channel or an adjacent channel with other
transmitters as function of signal to noise ratio. The interference definition is proper to each study.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Coverage by C/I level option from
the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and
Display. For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the
windows.
The coverage by C/I level study is a template for which the field 'C/I level' is selected by default in the display
tab. In that case, each layer corresponds to an area where the C/I level exceeds a defined minimum
threshold. Numerous option related to signal level coverage are available in the Display tab.
Note :
Shadowing margins (depending on the entered reliability level and the standard deviation per clutter
class) are applied only to the C values. These are not taken into account in I determinations.
ATOLL offers default calculation and display parameters when creating coverage by interference level
but it is possible to colour by any other consistent attribute just by adjusting display.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to
recalculate prediction study in order to update coverage.
When selecting a "highest signal level" option with a margin or the "All" option, you may have areas
where several transmitters are interfered. On these bins, several C/I values are calculated. Therefore,
you may choose to display either the lowest one of these values (Min C/I option) or the highest one
(Max C/I option) in the Field scrolling box of the display tab.
The study depends on the hopping mode, and the study will be made on :
The most interfered channel (this one with the lowest C/I) of TRXs belonging to the selected
TRX type (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered channel of all the TRX types (All),
in case of a non hopping mode,
The MAL of the selected subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered MAL of all
the subcells (All), in case of base band hopping,
The most interfered MAL-MAIO of the selected subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or all the
subcells (All), in case of synthesised frequency hopping.
on each pixel
Since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (e.g. : adjacent
channel protection level).
You can study a TRX type or all the TRX types. ATOLL displays the signal level and interference received
on:
The most interfered channel of the selected transmitter subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the
most interfered of all the transmitter subcells (All), in case of a non hopping mode.
The MAL of the selected transmitter subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered MAL of
all the transmitter subcells (All), in case of base band hopping.
The most interfered MAL-MAIO of the selected transmitter subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the
most interfered MAL-MAIO of all the transmitter subcells (All), in case of synthesised frequency
hopping.
ATOLL informs you when reduction factors of signal level and interference level are taken into account;
reception bars consist of two parts, a full part, which shows the received signal or interference level, and an
empty part corresponding to signal or interference level reduction. In case of the interfered subcell reception
bar, signal level reduction can be due to the subcell power offset. For each interferer transmitter reception
bar, interference level reduction can be due to power offsets of subcells, adjacent channel protection and
fractional load.
TRX type TCH (power offset 3dB). The channel 519 is assigned to TRX BCCH
No channel is assigned to any TRX TCH for these transmitters.
The Non hopping mode is assigned to TRX of types BCCH for these transmitter.
The studied transmitter is Site1_0, we observe potential interferences on all its TRX types, i.e. we study the
worst case. The asked reliability level is 75 % (some standard deviations per clutter class have been
defined). Like for interfered areas and coverage by C/I levels, the study is made on the most interfered
channel per subcell in case of non hopping mode.
You can see that interferences on Site1_0 are due to the fact that overall interferences are greater that the
Site1_0 signal level itself. Overall interferences are made of the signal level contributions of several
transmitters. Nevertheless, we can observe partly or fully filled bars for each them coming from different
reasons :
The partly filled purple bar comes from the power offset on the TRX BCCH (3 dB) of the transmitter
Site3_2.
The fully filled blue bar is due that no power offset is defined on the TRX BCCH of the transmitter
Site3_1.
The partly filled green bar is due to the fact that the TRX BCCH of the transmitter Site1_1 is made of
the channel 519. Since the adjacent channel protection level is set to 18 dB, its contribution is -119.44
dB, instead of -111.44 dB initially. If a supplementary power offset would have been defined for this
subcell, the related bar would have been cleared from 3dB more.
If the bar representing interference of the station is full, this means that this station interference on the
interfered station is not attenuated by one of the factors described above.
Notes :
Only signal level (C) is downgraded by the shadowing margin (depending on the entered reliability
level and the standard deviation per clutter class). The interference level (I) is not altered by the
shadowing margin.
Neither DTX, nor traffic load of TRXs are taken into account to evaluate the interference levels
(ATOLL calculates interference level by considering 100% as voice activity factor and traffic load).
Determining interferers at a point is possible only if an interference coverage study has already been
performed,
If a MAL is defined on the most interfered subcell, you can obtain, for example, the following result :
Interference on : TCH M.A.L. 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525
Once the neighbours are defined, it is possible to improve the current frequency allocation by using an
automatic allocation tool. This helps you in imposing separation constraints on :
- Neighbours
- Within transmitters,
- On transmitters located on unique sites
- Defined exceptional pairs of transmitters.
This automatic tool will try to reach a best solution respecting also the number of requested TRXs per
transmitter. Furthermore, this tool can help you for the determination of HSNs, MAIOs, BSICs, SFHs.
ATOLL provides also an automatic tool in order to check the consistency on the reached frequency plan,
obtained either manually or by the use of the automatic allocation tool.
Note : neighbours are not a filter for transmitters being part of interferers. All transmitters in a network take
part in interferences on each transmitter. Neighbours of any linked project in co-planning can also be listed
and chosen manually.
Manual allocation of GSM/TDMA neighbours must be performed for each transmitter, one at a time. To do
this, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Either,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either,
Right click on the transmitter from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Choose the properties option from the context menu,
Or
Double click on the transmitter from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Click the Neighbours tab from the current window,
Use the What's this help to get information about fields available in the current window,
In the displayed window, in the top table, click on cell to choose from the scrolling box the
desired cell as a transmitter for the current one. In the scrolling box are displayed all the
transmitters located within a radius of 30 km around the reference transmitter,
Click either another table cell, or the button to validate and add a new line to
the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
or
Choose the [Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the opened menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the opened window,
In the displayed table, click on a table cell to determine either base transmitters or
associated neighbours in the network,
Click another table cell to validate and add a new line to the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
Notes :
Neighbours manual allocation tools are also ways to check currently allocated neighbourhoods,
Due to the organisation of neighbourhoods in tables, the copy-paste feature can be used in order to
generate the neighbour table of a global network (or per transmitter).
This feature only deals with GSM/TDMA, CDMA/CDMA 2000 and UMTS technologies.
Note : neighbours are not a filter for transmitters being part of interferers. All transmitters in a network take
part in interferences on each transmitter.
Allocating automatically permits to allocate neighbours globally in the current network by imposing
constraints on active transmitters that must be satisfied. Force neighbours reciprocity and within co-site is
possible.
When clicking on the Commit button, ATOLL assigns neighbours to transmitters. Neighbours are listed in the
Neighbours tab of each transmitter properties window.
In the Results part, ATOLL provides the neighbour list of each transmitter. If transmitters have a current
allocation, they are noted existing.
When selecting the Reset option, ATOLL deletes all the current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour
allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept. Therefore, if you add a new transmitter i and start
a new allocation without selecting the Reset option:
ATOLL determines the neighbour list of the transmitter i,
It examines the neighbour list of other transmitters. If there is space in neighbour list of another
transmitter j:
- The transmitter i enters the transmitter j neighbour list if allocation criteria are satisfied. The
transmitter i will be the first one in the neighbour list.
- The transmitter i does not enter the transmitter j neighbour list if allocation criteria are not satisfied.
If the transmitter j belongs to the transmitter i neighbour list and the force symmetry option is selected:
- The transmitter i will enter the transmitter j neighbour list if there is space in the transmitter j
neighbour list.
- If the transmitter j neighbour list is full, ATOLL removes the transmitter j from the transmitter i
neighbour list in order to preserve the link symmetry
Notes :
This feature only deals with GSM/TDMA, CDMA/CDMA 2000 and UMTS technologies.
No prediction study is needed to perform the automatic neighbour allocation. When starting an
automatic neighbour allocation, ATOLL automatically calculates path loss matrices if it does not find
them.
Note : this can also be made for external neighbours from a linked project in co-planning.
Note : This feature only deals with GSM/TDMA, CDMA/CDMA 2000 and UMTS technologies.
Furthermore, ATOLL is able to compute automatically the requested number of TRXs (at the subcell level)
for all transmitters of the network. When computed, values are automatically reported in the subcell part of
the transmitter property dialog boxes.
TRX part :
In the transmitter property dialog (TRXs tab), you can choose manually the frequencies related to each TRX.
The MAIO can also be manually specified. Concerning the AFP itself, it is possible to freeze channels of
each TRX at this level. This way, existing channels will not be overwritten by any new automatic allocation.
Exceptional pairs of transmitters can be defined either individually (one transmitter at a time) or globally (from
a global table).
For any transmitter, to define channel separations with any other transmitter, proceed as follows :
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the transmitter you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by left clicking on the
appropriate Tx symbol (arrow),
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the AFP tab of the current dialog,
Use the What's this help to get description about the opened dialog window,
In the displayed table window, click on a cell to choose from the scrolling box the target
transmitter with which to force exceptional channel separation,
Click either another table cell, or the button to validate and add a new line to the
table.
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
The button helps you to manage the content of the Exceptional separation table.
Other constraints are imposed in transmitter properties.
Exceptional pairs can be also defined from the AFP dialog.
A certain number of inputs are defined in the transmitter properties. Others are imposed at the global level.
Finally, others are imposed when starting the AFP session.
Automatic frequency planning can be performed in two steps. The first step consists in computing
interference histograms. Then, during the second step, the tool performs frequency plan optimisation. The
AFP dialog consists of two parts relating to different process steps.
For each pair (interfered subcell, interferer subcell), ATOLL calculates a C/I value on each bin of the
interfered subcell service area; all the subcells are supposed to share the same channel. Then, ATOLL
integrates C/I values calculated over the service area of the interfered subcell and determines an
interference histogram. Histogram shows the different interference probabilities. Interference probability is
the probability that users of the interfered subcell receive a C/I higher than a C/I value; interference
probability is stated either in percentage of interfered area or in percentage of interfered traffic.
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Frequency plan : Automatic allocation…] command from the opened menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the opened dialog window,
After calculating or importing interference histograms, the calculation status for AFP becomes "Ready".
Caution: Changing some transmitter or subcell properties such as power offset, reception threshold and
transmitter power or EIRP makes invalid interference histograms. In this case, you must recalculate them.
It is possible to import and export interference histograms (respectively by clicking on the Import and Export
buttons). When exporting interference histograms, ATOLL creates two ASCII text files in the specified
directory: xxx.dct and xxx.clc (xxx is the user specified name). The .dct file contains the name of transmitters
taken into account in AFP and their associated identification numbers; the .clc file details interference
histogram of each pair (interfered subcell, interferer subcell). Thanks to this feature, you may validate the
AFP inputs and exploit external sources of information as AFP inputs. In addition, the exported interference
histograms can be used as input for external optimisation tools.
Notes :
When importing interference histograms, you must specify the .clc file to be imported; ATOLL looks for
the associated .dct file in the same directory and uses it to decode transmitter identifiers. When this file
is unavailable, ATOLL assumes that the transmitter identifiers are the transmitter names.
No validity control is performed when importing an interference histogram file.
ATOLL only imports interference histograms relating to active transmitters with a calculation area.
Once interference histograms are available, optimisation can be started. AFP respects quality requirements
such as the minimum C/I threshold and the % maximum of interference defined for each TRX type in the cell
type property dialog. Each subcell should have an interference probability (% of interfered traffic or interfered
area) lower than the % maximum of interference that its C/I is lower than the minimum C/I threshold.
To run the automatic algorithm, in the opened AFP dialog, use the What's this help to get description about
the fields and adjust the AFP parameters :
- Choose the AFP model,
- Choose the resources to be allocated in the current session,
- Define channel separations within transmitters, within sites, between defined neighbours, and check the
separations within exceptional pairs,
- Choose to consider or not discontinuous transmission mode on subcells supporting DTX (in that case,
enter an activity factor),
- Propose a duration on which the current session can base the optimisation; the automatic tool deal with
one domain at a time.
Once these parameters are set, click the button. Every time the AFP stops, choose either to
commit reached channels or to continue (Resume button) optimisation.
Furthermore, you can parameter some additional checking on Frequencies, HSN and/or BSIC elements :
- First, you can check the compliance of the current frequency plan with the allocation strategy (Free or
Group constrained) at the TRX type level (subcells in transmitters),
- Then, you can check the respect of domains for allocated resources of type frequency, HSN or BSIC.
These domains are tested in order to check that they are not empty. Concerning frequencies, the tool is able
to check compliance of frequency domains within related frequency bands,
- Finally, you can also check channel separation constraints within transmitters, in co-site transmitters,
between neighbours and between exceptional pairs.
Results about consistency are displayed in the tasks tab of the event viewer. This can be also stored in an
external log file.
GSM and E/GPRS projects share the same template. A station will be able to allow both GSM and GPRS
services depending on its properties. This will be set at the subcell level with timeslot either dedicated to
circuit, packet or composite services.
Each transmitter dealing with E/GPRS must have a piece of E/GPRS equipment. ATOLL allows the user to
either create or modify easily these equipment. These are linked with so-called coding schemes functions of
C or C/I thresholds. GPRS technology provides 4 coding schemes whereas EDGE can offer 9. With ATOLL,
you can set these coding schemes and display their effects in graphs.
Since E/GPRS technology is based on GSM norm, it is possible to define or not, in the same network,
transmitters as E/GPRS stations.
Compared to GSM norm, E/GPRS provides the support of larger amounts of data services. Moreover, this
technology permits to carry more data per timeslot. Depending on the radio data and the number of timeslots
dedicated to packet service transmissions for the transmitters part of the current network, ATOLL can
determine the average capacity per timeslot per transmitter.
Finally, ATOLL provides specific E/GPRS coverage studies depending either on only C or both C and C/I
and E/GPRS equipment as defined with each transmitter :
E/GPRS coding schemes analysis,
E/GPRS max rate per timeslot analysis.
The What's this context tool allows the user to understand the specific E/GPRS fields and features available
in the several dialog boxes.
Notes :
The button helps you to manage content of the E/GPRS Equipment table.
An Other Properties tab is available if some user defined fields have been added to the E/GPRS
Equipment table.
Notes :
The dialog of each E/GPRS Equipment is reachable either by double clicking the related record in the
table, or by using the button once a record is selected,
The button helps you to manage content of the E/GPRS Equipment table.
An Other Properties tab is available if some user defined fields have been added to the E/GPRS
Equipment table.
To adjust the parameters associated with coding schemes from any equipment, proceed as follow :
Access the property dialog of the equipment you want to adjust the associated coding
schemes,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Click on the General tab to check or modify the name and/or the maximum number of coding
schemes available for the current equipment,
Click on the Thresholds tab to define, for each coding scheme :
Power threshold and Signal noise ratio threshold : They are respectively the minimum
power (C) and the minimum signal noise ratio (C/I) required at the receiver in order for the
coding scheme to be used,
Max rate (kbps): It is the maximum rate (kbps) obtained when there is no data
transmission error,
Rates depending on C (kbps) and rates depending on C/I (kbps): These columns
contain values used to represent Rate=f(C ) and Rate=f(C/I) graphs,
Click OK or Apply to validate.
The and buttons allows to display graphs associated with the currently selected
coding scheme.
To display the rate graph as function of C or C/I values for a given coding scheme, proceed as follows :
Access properties dialog box of the equipment you want to adjust the associated coding
schemes,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Click on the Thresholds tab,
Either,
Click on the C or C/I cell you want to display the associated rate graph,
Or,
Select the line of the coding scheme you want to display a rate graph,
Click either the or button to open the graph (as function
respectively of C or C/I) dialog window,
The Rate graph window opens. It consists of a table where you can define C (or C/I) and rate
values (copying and pasting a set of values, adding and deleting values is possible) and a part
where the graph is displayed,
Click OK or close the window.
Note : these graphs show the rate evolution depending on radio conditions (C and C/I) by considering block
error rates. Therefore, from these graphs, you can choose a coding scheme suitable to radio conditions.
Notes :
When choosing the equipment, all pieces of equipment previously described in the E/GPRS equipment
folder are available in the E/GPRS equipment scrolling menu. If none is chosen, ATOLL does not
consider the associated transmitter in the E/GPRS specific studies,
The average rate per timeslot is an uneditable field coming from output calculation.
As this study can be based on C/I, some parameters are similar to the ones found in interference predictions.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the E/GPRS option from the study
types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and Display. For all of
these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.
In the condition tab, specific coverage GSM/TDMA conditions are available. Moreover, if you tick the
'Calculations based on C/I option, both conditions on signal (C ) and signal noise ratio (C/I) must be satisfied
to be able to use a given coding scheme.
The coverage by coding scheme is a template for which the field 'Coding Schemes' is selected by default in
the display tab. In that case, each layer shows the coding schemes to be used in the transmitter coverage
area. You can also choose to display your coverage in term of Best coding schemes. The resulting coverage
shows the best coding scheme that can be used on each pixel. Other options related to E/GPRS coverage
Note :
ATOLL offers default calculation and display parameters when creating E/GPRS prediction studies.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to
recalculate prediction study in order to update coverage.
Since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (e.g. : adjacent
channel protection level).
As this study can be based on C/I, some parameters are similar to the ones found in interference predictions.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the E/GPRS option from the study
types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Condition, and Display. For all of
these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.
In the condition tab, specific coverage GSM/TDMA conditions are available. Moreover, if you check the
'Calculations based on C/I option, both conditions on signal (C ) and signal noise ratio (C/I) must be satisfied
to be able to use a given coding scheme.
To calculate the coverage per rate/timeslot, two coverage display options are available. Firstly, you can
choose the Rate/timeslot. In that case, each layer shows the rates that a transmitter can carry one timeslot.
You can also choose to display your coverage in term of Best rate/timeslot. The resulting coverage gives the
best rate/timeslot per pixel from the previous display. Other options related to E/GPRS coverage are
available in the Display tab.
Note :
ATOLL offers default calculation and display parameters when creating E/GPRS prediction studies.
Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to
recalculate prediction study in order to update coverage.
Since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (e.g. : adjacent
channel protection level).
To calculate the average capacity per timeslot for all the transmitters in an E/GPRS network, proceed
as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder in order to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Dimensioning : Timeslot capacity calculation...] option from the opened menu,
A dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Choose the rate per timeslot reference study to base on the current calculation,
Click on the Run button to start calculations,
When finished, results are displayed for each transmitter in the current table,
Click on the Commit results button to assign to each transmitter its associated rate,
The committed rate is reported in the properties dialog box of each transmitter.
Note : if no prediction is available to base the average rate per timeslot study on, it is proposed to the user to
create a new one in order to use its parameters for the calculation.
In UMTS, everybody works at the same frequency, signals are spread over a band of 3.84 MHz (on each
carrier) and distinguished by the use of OVSF codes on them. Nevertheless, this induces potentially high
levels of noise which can be defeated by sophisticated power controls on uplink (from terminals) and on
downlink (from transmitters) traffic channels.
Because of power control, there is not a single solution to model a UMTS network, and results depend totally
on network parameters such as traffic and user behaviours. Hence, these parameters have to be modelled
before starting calculations via user distributions. Simulation results provide a snapshot of the UMTS network
at a certain time.
In order to simulate user distributions and associated behaviours, some parameters have to be set. These
are services, mobility types, terminal, user profiles and environment types. Each of these is easy to manage
like any other folder-like object within ATOLL. All these parameters go together with traffic maps, based on
environments, on user profiles (with no required definition for environment parameters) or on Transmitters
and Services (in term of rates or number of users - with no required definition for environment and user
profile parameters).
UMTS power control simulations and UMTS specific coverage predictions need the definition of the previous
parameters. Classical coverage predictions are also available to study cell pilots. The point analysis tool
allows a specific analysis of any active set at any given point on the map, for a particular scenario (service,
terminal, and speed of a probe mobile which current status is provided by network simulation results).
Geo data are easily manageable like for other projects. You may either create or import geographic objects.
Sites, antennas, station templates, transmitters, measurements, and propagation models work in the same
way for UMTS and the other technology projects. Nevertheless, due to an enhanced resource management
to consider at site level, site equipment and resource management per service have been introduced.
Furthermore, since UMTS support several carrier networks, a new item characterising each carrier per
transmitter has been introduced : UMTS cells. Hence, many properties are defined at the cell level (e.g.
powers).
Like for the other types of technologies, neighbours may be manually defined by the user or with the help of
the neighbour automatic allocation tool, but at the cell level. UMTS Downlink primary scrambling codes
enable the user to distinctly identify cells (transmitters and carriers). They can also be defined manually or
automatically imposing a large number of constraints.
The What's this context tool allows the user to understand the specific UMTS fields and features available in
dialog boxes.
To achieve power control simulation and coverage calculation, UMTS planning requires traffic snapshots
unlike GSM planning, which only needs traffic data when dimensioning a network for a certain grade of
service.
UMTS coverage directly depends on offered traffic : the more the traffic is, the smaller the coverage zones
are. This phenomenon is called cell breathing. As Traffic is dynamic, coverage calculation is necessarily
statistical.
ATOLL enables W-CDMA/UMTS network planning, 3G network based on Wideband Code Division Multiple
Access technique (W-CDMA) and multi-service management. These major concepts and new technologies
require new network and data modelling, with appropriate needs for traffic modelling. A wide range of
different UMTS services (speech, web, video-conferencing,...), available to consumers, generates a more
complex traffic than standard voice transmissions. Appropriate traffic data model and relevant localisation on
a map, i.e. traffic cartography represents a major input for UMTS planning. Specific UMTS objects are
available when creating a new project with ATOLL. The UMTS project is designed to provide specific UMTS
radio and traffic data structures, UMTS simulations and predictions folders.
Traffic input
Traffic description : activity probabilities
Traffic map design : number of subscribers or users (depending on the type of map)
Network optimisation
Neighbour allocation
Primary scrambling code allocation
Firstly, due to the fact that the number of channel elements is limited by site, these are set from the Site
folder. Hence, in ATOLL, you can model several pieces of equipment with different radio resource
management parameters and describe channel element consumption for each equipment type/service
couple. Then, you can assign a piece of equipment to each site.
Some features have been introduced in order to adjust the global specific parameters of UMTS networks.
UMTS supports multi-carrier networks, i.e. a transmitter can work on several carriers on the same time, each
carrier being set with different properties. Hence, to take it into account, a new level has been introduced in
order to simulate the carrier level on each transmitters : UMTS cells. Like many other objects in ATOLL,
these are easily manageable and provide several tools in order to make their use easy.
MUD factor
Multi-User Detection is a technology used to decrease intra-cellular interference on uplink. MUD is modelled
by a coefficient between 0 and 1; this factor is considered in the UL interference calculation. In case MUD is
not supported by equipment, enter 0 as value.
Carrier selection
It refers to carrier selection mode used during the transmitter admission control in mobile active set. Three
methods are available:
- UL min noise: The least loaded carrier (carrier with the lowest UL load factor) is selected,
- DL min power: The carrier with lowest used total DL power is selected,
- Random: The carrier is randomly chosen.
Overhead CEs uplink and downlink: number of channel elements that a cell uses for common
channels on uplink and downlink.
AS restricted to neighbours
This option is used to manage mobile active set. If you select this option, the other transmitters in active set
must belong to the neighbour list of the best server.
Note : Rake efficiency factor for computation of recombination in downlink has to be set in terminals.
Notes :
Standard features for managing table content (Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, Delete, Display columns,
Filter, Sort, Fields…) are available in context menu (when right clicking on column(s) or record(s)) and
in the Format, Edit and Records menus.
Rake efficiency factor for computation of recombination in downlink has to be set in terminals.
Note :
In case you have defined neither equipment nor channel element consumption, ATOLL considers the
following default values, Rake efficiency factor = 1, MUD factor = 0, Carrier selection = UL minimum
noise, Overhead CEs downlink and uplink = 0, AS restricted to neighbours option not selected, and
uses one channel element per link (up or down) for any service, during power control simulation.
Equipment can be also assigned by accessing site table.
Some of them are used as global values, other as default values. All of these are essential in UMTS power
control simulations.
The number of cells per transmitter is limited by the number of carriers available for a network as defined in
the global parameter dialog. Cells can be listed either by transmitter, in a specific dialog, or in a table form,
as other radio data (sites and transmitters). So, here again, the management of cells stays easy and
comfortable.
The Cells table contains all the identifiers of a cell, its name, transmitter and carrier which the cell refers
to, cell primary scrambling code, scrambling code domain to which the allocated scrambling code
belongs, all the values defining transmitted signal level, pilot power, synchronisation power, other
common channels power, maximum power, total power used, information about the cell uplink load and
an active set management parameter, AS threshold.
Notes :
Cells are automatically created and described in the table when you drag and drop a station. On the
other hand, you must define them manually after adding a new transmitter (New… command when
right clicking on the Transmitters folder) or copying a list of transmitters in the Transmitters table.
Cell default name is: Transmitter name(carrier). If you change transmitter name or carrier, ATOLL
does not update the cell name.
You cannot create two cells related to the same transmitter-carrier couple.
It is also possible to open a single dialog for each cell. To do so, proceed as follows :
Open the cell table (see above)
Either
Double click the record which property dialog you want to open,
Or
Right click on the record which property dialog you want to open to get its associated
context menu,
Select the Record Properties command from the opened scrolling menu (or the Record
Properties command from the Records menu),
Use the What's this help to get description about the opened dialog window.
Notes :
Cell Properties dialog consists of three tabs: cell characteristics entered in the cells table are grouped
in the General and Transmission/Reception tabs, Internal and external neighbours may be allocated to
the cell in the Neighbours tab.
It is possible to define additional fields in the cell table by using the Fields command in its related
context menu (or from the Records menu). If it is the case, this new field will then be available in the
Other properties tab of any cell property dialog.
To define the different powers related to UMTS technology, access the cell properties (either from the
table or from dialogs) and fill the following fields (Transmission/Reception tab) :
Max power
Pilot power
SCH power
Other CCH power
The total power used and UL load used in specific UMTS coverages are also defined in the cell properties.
The active set threshold (default value : 5dB) used for active set determination has also to be set there.
To define the active set threshold of any cell, access the cell properties (either from the table or from
dialogs) and fill the field AS threshold (Transmission/Reception tab).
To achieve power control simulation, ATOLL use the other classical geo data (clutter maps, DTM or DEM
maps), the radio configuration (sites, antennas, transmitters, cells) and the specific UMTS parameters.
These topics are organised in folders and are easily manageable. They deal with :
services,
mobility types,
terminals,
user profiles,
environment classes.
UMTS traffic data structure describes multi-service traffic on the network. The central data is the user profile,
which describes a type of subscriber by listing his communication behaviours:
which terminal(s) does he use ?
for which service(s)?
with which usage characteristics (frequency, duration, volume,…)?
The mobility concept has been added to take into account strong Ec/Io and Eb/Nt dependence on mobile
speed. When defining a mobility type, you have to give Ec/Io requirements, which will determine mobile
terminal active set. When creating a new circuit or packet switched service, in addition to basic
characteristics (nominal rate,…) you have to provide Eb/Nt targets in uplink and downlink for each mobility
type previously defined. You may define different receiver types, called terminals and containing power
characteristics and mobile active set size.
Environments just associate a list of user profiles with a specific mobility to a subscriber density.
Environment classes or user profiles can be used to geographically define multi-traffic areas.
As with any Data table in ATOLL, these tables are automatically stored in a database if the user works with a
connected document.
ATOLL powerful data management features are available on traffic tables. For example, you may group
terminals by their active set size.
ATOLL manages multi-carrier networks. It allows the user to choose the way carriers are selected by
transmitters. Moreover, any specific CDMA study may deal with several carriers depending on the user or on
the radio parameters of the network.
In UMTS, Services are divided into two categories: circuit switched and packet switched. Usually, circuit
switched services support soft handover unlike packet switched services.
ATOLL provides a function to enable or disable soft handover for a given service.
Note : In the Eb/Nt tab window, (Eb/Nt)DL and (Eb/Nt)UL targets are the thresholds (in dB) that must be
achieved to provide users with the service. These parameters depend on user speed and must be defined
for all mobility types.
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Click the available tabs to adjust the parameters of the current service,
Validate by clicking on OK.
Notes :
When the Services table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of
any service by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at
left.
The coding factors, which penalize UL and DL service rates, may be supplied in two ways. For each service,
you may :
Either enter high UL and DL coding factors and then, set a low enough UL and DL Eb/Nt threshold so
that the advantage of high coding can be simulated (higher error correction rate means smaller bit
error rate and thus a smaller required Eb/Nt),
Or enter low UL and DL coding factors value and take into account the coding to define the required
UL and DL Eb/Nt values, i.e. a high enough Eb/Nt threshold to simulate the disadvantage of little
coding.
The services table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and
copy/paste functions are available.
Notes :
The advanced grouping/filtering/sorting feature may be used on the services from the context menu
associated with the Services folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the
contents of the services table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in
the different windows.
When the Services table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of
any service by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at
left.
Mobility parameters are pilot quality (Ec/Io) thresholds (in dB). For a given mobility type :
Ec/Io threshold is the minimum Ec/Io required from a transmitter to enter the active set. In ATOLL, this
value is verified for the best server.
Note : When the Mobility type table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window
of any mobility by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.
The mobility types table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools,
and copy/paste functions are available.
Notes :
The advanced grouping/filtering/sorting feature may be used on the services from the context menu
associated with the mobility types folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the
contents of the mobility types table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields
available in the different windows.
When the Mobility type table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window
of any mobility by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow
at left.
Note : Rake efficiency factor for computation of recombination in uplink has to be set in site equipment.
Notes :
When the Terminal table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of
any terminal by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at
left.
The terminals table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and
copy/paste functions are available.
Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu
associated with the Terminals folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the
contents of the terminals table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available
in the different windows.
When the Terminal table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of
any terminal by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at
left.
Example: For a web-browsing service, a session starts when the user opens his browsing application and
ends when he quits the browsing application. Between these two events, sometimes the user may be
downloading web pages and other times he may not be using the application, or be browsing local files. A
session is described by the volume transferred both on the downlink and the uplink.
Those parameters are used in simulation to determine the probability (activity status) that a user is
transmitting or receiving communication for the given service and terminal when the snapshot is taken.
Notes :
For circuit switched services, entering a one-hour call during 1000s corresponds to define 2 calls per
hour during 500s…the activity probability is the same in both cases.
For all the services defined for a user profile, in order to be taken into account during traffic scenario
elaboration, the sum of activity probabilities must be lower than 1
You can model temporal variations of user behaviour by creating different profiles for different hours
(busy hour, ...).
Notes :
When the User profiles table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window
of any user type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow
at left.
The user profiles table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools,
and copy/paste functions are available.
Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu
associated with the User profiles folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the
contents of the user profiles table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields
available in the different windows.
When the User profiles table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window
of any user type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow
at left.
To get an appropriate user distribution, you may assign weights per clutter classes, for each environment
class.
Particular case: When no multi-service geo-marketing data are available, you may supply ATOLL with usual
traffic data like user densities per service (for example, values coming from adapted GSM Erlang maps). In
this case, user profile definition and calculation of deduced activity probability are not necessary to create
traffic scenario ; traffic distribution will only depend on densities per service.
In UMTS, for instance, if you know user densities per service, just avoid handling user profile step by defining
one-hour full communication profile per service :
1. for circuit services:
• in service properties: set UL and DL activity factors to 1
• in user profile properties, define 1 call/hour with 3600s duration. Therefore, each user will be
connected.
2. for packet services:
• in service properties: set efficiency factor to 1 in UL and DL.
• in user profile properties : define 1 session/hour and set volume to transmit during 3600s.
Therefore, each user will be connected.
Therefore, the activity probabilities calculated during simulation will be equal to 1 and density values defined
in Environments will be user densities (no more subscriber densities). Elaborated traffic scenario will fully
respect the user profile proportion (i.e service) given in environments. You will fully master the number of
users in simulation as well as the service proportion which will drive random trials. Moreover, each user will
be connected.
This method is not the usual nominal working mode for ATOLL.
Note :
To get an appropriate user distribution, you may assign weights per clutter classes, for each
environment class in the Clutter weighting tab.
When the Environments table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window
of any environment type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the
associated arrow at left.
display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profile, environment) in a table window.
The environment types table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering
tools, and copy/paste functions are available.
Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu
associated with the Environments folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the
contents of the environment types table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields
available in the different windows.
When the Environments table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window
of any environment type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the
associated arrow at left.
These statistics provide the number of mobiles to be created in the traffic scenario for the given environment
(based on a raster traffic map, respecting the layer order). This number is given displayed per clutter class.
Note : The statistic study is limited to the focus zone, only the clutter and environment areas inside the focus
zone are taken into account in calculations.
This weighting method is used when displaying statistics per UMTS environment type.
Once created, these maps are stored in a general UMTS traffic folder available in the Geo tab of your current
environment.
Notes :
Like other raster maps, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map.
You can only choose among existing environment classes in the cartography editor. To make available
additional classes, do it in the UMTS parameters.
Note : if you import a raster map to be an environment traffic map, do not forget to assign clutter classes to
existing environment classes.
Note :
In order to manage traffic on the entire map, this operation has to be carried out for all classes.
The description table can be fully copied and pasted (using Ctrl+V and Ctrl+C) in a new ATOLL project
after importing the raster file. To select globally the environment class table, just left click on the top left
angle of the environment table.
Advice: Use this function to keep consistency between the environment classes described in the table and in
the imported file.
Example: ATOLL automatically memorizes the different environment classes of imported file. Even after
deleting the file, the environment classes are stored in the description table. Pressing the button
will remove them.
Note :
When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in the
same folder. The .hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain
geocoding information and resolution.
Environment traffic file path (and related description) is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg
files.
Note : Path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.
Si
% of i = × 100
∑ Sk
k
Notes :
The statistic study is limited to the computation zone (or focus zone if existing), just the environment
areas inside the computation zone are taken into account,
Current statistical results are printable by clicking the button,
Data contained in the statistics window can be copied by selecting them (Ctrl+A) then copying them to
the clipboard (Ctrl+C).
user/km for lines). You can decide the type of information that you want to use to define the
traffic characteristics, either a field described in the file (by field option in the Defined column) or
a value directly user-definable in ATOLL (by value option in the Defined column).
The first method can be used only if the file you’re importing contains attributes providing
information about the user profile, mobility or density. In this case, select in the Choice
column a suitable field for each data (user profile, mobility and density); ATOLL lists all the
attributes described in the file. The attributes of the source file cannot be modified. Using
this method, each traffic polygon or linear is assigned specific characteristics (user profile,
mobility or density).
Note : Take care to define in ATOLL user profiles and mobilities described in traffic file with
exact spelling.
The second way is useful when traffic files contain no attribute. Therefore, you may assign
manually user profiles, mobilities and densities created in ATOLL. Select in the Choice
column user profile and mobility listed in UMTS Parameters folder and specify manually a
global density for all the polygons. Beforehand, just make sure to define in UMTS
Parameters the internal data like user profile and mobility you want to allocate. Here, all
the polygons are described by global characteristics (user profile, mobility or density).
In the Clutter weighting part, assign a weight to each clutter class. Thus, ATOLL allows you to
spread traffic inside the polygons according to the clutter weighting defined for the whole
subfolder. The spreading operation (using a raster step) will be carried out during the simulation
process.
Then, press OK to validate the properties setting.
Notes :
You may set the display parameters of the current map in the Display tab. Embedding data is available
from the General tab.
During the import procedure, if the imported user profiles or mobilities are not currently part of the
existing user profiles or mobilities, ATOLL warns you about the fact that these may not be correctly
taken into account as traffic data.
Path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.
Niceregion.mif
Highway.mif
Before creating a traffic map per transmitter and per service, the user must define a coverage study by
transmitter (with best server option and no margin) and calculate it. ATOLL expects rate values (kbits/s)
number of active users for each service and each transmitter. Thus, it is possible to define either one map
per service or one map with all services.
Then, ATOLL expects rate values (kbits/s) for each service and each transmitter. The traffic cartography is
built without connection with the initial coverage prediction, the map just consists of polygons (one polygon
per transmitter) characterised by UL and DL rates or number of users for each service. These polygons have
the same features as the vector traffic polygons.
% of T i = NTi
∑N
i
Ti
where,
Ti is one terminal (or mobility) type,
NT is a value user-defined for each terminal (or mobility) type,
i is the number of terminal (or mobility) types.
To create a traffic map per transmitter and per service, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic density folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on transmitter and service (Throughput or Number of users) option
in the Create a traffic map opened window,
Press the button to validate,
The coverage area traffic window opens,
Select the prediction study to be considered for traffic distribution. Only coverage per
transmitter studies can be used. A table where you can define specific rates per service and per
transmitter is available. It consists of a column dedicated to transmitters and several columns for
the different services previously defined in the UMTS Parameters folder. In the TX_ID column,
select each line, click on the arrow and choose a transmitter in the list. You may also use the
copy and paste commands (respectively Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V) from an Excel file already containing
the expected columns,
Enter rate values (kbits/s) on uplink and on downlink relating to different services for each
transmitter,
Press OK to validate the map creation.
The created traffic maps per transmitter and per service are listed in the UMTS Traffic folder.
The rate values or the number of users per sector and per service can be modified by accessing the
associated traffic map table (double click on the map or Open command in the context menu). These data
are directly considered to calculate the activity probability in the simulation process.
To export a CDMA/CDMA 2000 traffic map based on service and transmitter, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA 2000 traffic folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the cell traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the opened scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Only .agd
format (ATOLL internal format) can be taken to export such traffic maps,
Click the Save button to complete the export procedure.
ATOLL provides a random user distribution generation, based on a Monte-Carlo algorithm complying with
traffic description and cartography.
Once realistic user distributions are available, power control simulation is automatically achieved to
determine network parameters (such as cells and terminal powers) and estimate interference level.
ATOLL provides either actual network audit (taking into account your network constraints) or new
dimensioning information about how to handle available traffic. On the same traffic snapshot, you can check
how your network works and can be improved.
ATOLL offers a wide range of tuneable parameters involved in UMTS simulations. Even from existing
simulations, it is possible to modify these parameters with the replay simulations features offered by ATOLL.
You may also add simulations to a group of existing simulations. Averaging a group of simulations is also
possible. Once achieved, simulations are available for specific UMTS coverage predictions.
Indeed, for UMTS projects, ATOLL provides four different groups of studies, listed in a natural planning
order, from the indispensable pilot study to the study of downlink total noise, with respect to the
propagation model as defined :
Pilot-oriented studies to determine pilot coverage by transmitter, the pilot coverage by signal level,
overlapping area (like standard coverage studies), pilot quality (Ec/Io) and pilot pollution,
Service-oriented studies to determine service availability in uplink and downlink and effective
service areas,
handover status study to analyse macro-diversity performance,
Downlink total noise study.
With the point analysis tool, it is also possible to build a UMTS scenario defining a probe mobile with a type
of terminal, mobility and service) and predict, on each point of the current map, its results. Except pilot
coverage, coverage by signal level and overlapping studies, which are similar to classical coverage
studies, all other studies are specific to UMTS network planning and closely related to a particular
simulation.
ATOLL provides powerful simulation outputs. Firstly, you can display requirements, results, initial conditions,
and data relative to clutter data dealing with shadowing margins and gains due to multipath on any of these.
Then, you may choose to display the simulation results either per site, per transmitter, or per mobile for the
currently studied simulation. The results can also be displayed on the map as function of any topics dealt
with the UMTS simulations (service, terminal, user, mobility, activity, factors, connection and HO status, best
server, active set parameters, geographic coordinates, rates, carriers, powers, noise rise, path loss).
ATOLL simulates this network regulation mechanism with an iterative algorithm and calculates, for each user
distribution, network parameters such as base station power, mobile terminal power, active set and handover
status for each terminal.
Notes :
If you tick the execute later box, computations will be started when using the Calculate command (F7
shortcut or button),
When starting computations, a group of simulations (with the input number of simulations) is
automatically created under the UMTS simulation folder.
Once achieved, simulations are available for specific UMTS coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with
the point analysis tool.
Note : to manage the display of simulation results, the ATOLL generic dialog window is used. So, it is
possible to display simulation results related to, for example, their connection status, handover status, any
UMTS parameter, pilot quality, etc... Furthermore, all simulation folders are then organised in threshold items
that you can display or not in the workspace.
Notes :
If computations have not been started (using the execute later command), you can access to the group
properties in order to modify them for coming computations.
You can access to the Properties of any single simulation. The opened dialog is related to simulations
requirements and results, specific results per site, per mobile, per cell and simulation initial conditions.
Power control simulation needs propagation path loss for cells and mobiles. If these results are not available,
ATOLL achieves propagation calculation using the propagation model as defined from either the transmitter
or the prediction folders.
In ATOLL, the dialog allowing you to create simulations is made of three tabs : General, Traffic and
Advanced described below.
General tab
In this tab, you can enter a name to the group of simulations that ATOLL is going to compute. Then, you
may decide the number of scenarios on which you want to simulate power control. It is possible to create
several simulations at the same time or just one by one if you prefer. Selecting the Detailed results option
enables you to get additional simulation outputs relating to mobiles (results available in the Mobiles and
Mobiles (Shadowing values) tabs of the simulation Properties window). Finally, the Execute later option can
be used if you want to predefine simulation calculation settings and start the computation subsequently. In
case the option is selected, simulation calculation is not carried out when closing the dialog; simulation will
be worked out when clicking on the Calculate command (F7 shortcut or button).
Note : The Execute later feature enables you to automatically calculate UMTS coverage studies after
simulations without intermediary step.
In the Cell load constraint part, you must select constraints you want ATOLL to respect during power control
simulation. If you wish to check your network, just select the constraints about maximum cell power,
maximum number of channel elements, maximum uplink cell load (the default value is set to 75%) and OVSF
codes availability. The simulation proceeds without exceeding these limits. Mobiles with the lowest service
priority (user-defined in each service properties dialog window) are first rejected. In order for the simulation to
proceed freely, uncheck all the calculation options.
Traffic tab
The global scaling factor for traffic option enables you to increase subscriber density without changing traffic
parameters or cartography. For example, setting the global scaling factor for traffic to 2 means doubling the
initial number of subscribers (for traffic raster or vector traffic maps) or the rates/users (for traffic maps per
transmitter and per service).
Then, you can perform simulations using several traffic cartographies. To do this, select them in the Traffic
part. In this case, ATOLL takes into account the traffic information provided in all the selected maps. This
feature must be carefully used to avoid inconsistencies. Thus, make sure you do not mix several kinds of
traffic maps (for example, raster traffic map and transmitter coverage area traffic map) in a simulation study;
rather, make several simulation studies, each one based on a same sort of traffic map. On the other hand,
you can fully carry out a simulation study using several traffic maps belonging to the same kind.
Advanced tab
Generator initialisation enables you to obtain the same random distribution in two simulations just by giving
the same non-zero integer in this field. For example, you create a simulation with generator initialisation
value of 1 (or whichever integer different from 0). When you create another simulation, giving 1 as generator
initialisation, you obtain the same random distribution. To avoid getting similar distributions, just enter zero
value in this field. A group of several distributions created at the same time may be repeated with the same
principle. This can be useful when one wants to compare two simulations with just one parameter value
difference; so to make a just comparison, it is better to have the same user locations (same path loss values
for users).
You can then specify the maximum number of iterations allowed during a simulation, UL and DL
convergence thresholds.
The power control simulation is based on an iterative algorithm. In the Convergence part, you can define how
many iterations you want the simulation to run (maximum number of iterations) and specify your own uplink
and downlink convergence criteria (percentage power difference for downlink and percentage noise
difference for uplink between two successive iterations).
When clicking OK, simulation starts running and stops when the convergence criteria are met in two
successive iterations (when there is no network parameter evolution). Therefore, the simulation can finish
before reaching the maximum number of defined iterations.
When calculation is finished, ATOLL has created the required number of simulations in the newly created
group of simulations.
ATOLL makes easy the consistency management between radio data, simulations and predictions.
Average simulations and replays are reachable from each of these subfolders. Display properties are
reachable form the Simulations folder.
Once achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with
the point analysis tool.
Note : giving several times the same integer number (different from 0) as initialisation number in the
simulation creation dialog box leads to replay simulations with identical user random distribution.
Comment: as the generator initialisation function, this feature enables you to obtain the same user
distribution in two simulations. Nevertheless, the generator initialisation option is more powerful since it can
be used to create several simulations with the same distribution at the same time and several sets of
different simulations with the same set of distributions.
Replay: ATOLL reuses the same user distribution (user with a service, a mobility and an activity
status) and traffic parameters (such as maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt
targets...) as in the initial simulation. Just radio data (new transmitter, azimuth...) modifications are
taken into account during power control simulation.
Generator initialisation: If generator initialisation entered when creating both simulations is an integer
different from 0, ATOLL finds the same user distribution (user with a service, a mobility and an activity
status) in both simulations. On the other hand, in this case, both traffic parameter (such as maximum
and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt targets...) and radio data (new transmitter,
azimuth...) modifications are taken into account during power control simulation.
To display average results per cell over a group of UMTS simulations, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the UMTS simulation group subfolder you want to average the simulations to
open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Average simulations...,
The average simulation dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Click on the available tabs to display either the Statistics, Means or Standard deviation
window,
Click OK to close the window.
Average simulations may be used in specific UMTS coverage predictions or in an AS analysis with the point
analysis tool.
A new simulation is being computed using the parameters of the current group,
After calculation, a new simulation is added to the group.
Note : The added simulation is then considered if you calculate an average simulation.
To get user distribution, you need to have traffic cartography at your disposal.
Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type and an activity status by random trial, according to a
probability law that complies with the traffic database (and packet switched services as well as circuit
switched services).
User activity status is an important output of random distribution, which will have direct consequences on
simulation and network noise level.
A packet switched service user can be either inactive or active on the downlink or active on the uplink:
Inactive means: the user is currently not transmitting or receiving packets, so he does not use any
radio resource and does not create interference: he is neither taken into account in simulation, nor
represented on map.
Active on the downlink: the user is receiving data, he has been assigned a radio resource and he
creates interference on the downlink.
Active on the uplink: the user is transmitting data, he has been assigned a radio resource and he
creates interference on the uplink
A second random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone.
Power control simulation needs propagation path loss for cells and mobiles. If these results are not available,
ATOLL achieves propagation calculation using the propagation model as defined from either the transmitter
or the prediction folders.
Based on CDMA air interface, network automatically regulates itself by using traffic driven uplink and
downlink power control in order to minimize interference and maximize capacity. ATOLL simulates this
network regulation mechanism with an iterative algorithm and calculates, for each user distribution, network
parameters such as base station power, mobile terminal power, active set and handover status for each
terminal.
The power control simulation is based on an iterative algorithm. Each iteration, all the mobiles selected
st
during the user distribution generation (1 step) try to be connected one by one to network transmitters. The
process is repeated from iteration to iteration until convergence. The algorithm steps are detailed below.
Initialisation
Convergence study
During simulation, mobiles penalizing too much the others are ejected. Different causes of ejection can be
distinguished:
When the network is saturated; mobile ejection may be due to different reasons described above:
multiple causes.
Where:
∆UL is the UL convergence threshold,
∆DL is the DL convergence threshold,
Ptx (ic ) is the cell total transmitted power on the carrier ic,
I (ic ) is the total interference received by cell on the carrier ic,
UL
tot
N
UL
user (ic ) is the number of users connected on UL on the carrier ic,
N user (ic ) is the number of users connected on DL on the carrier ic,
DL
1st case: Between two successive iterations, ∆UL and ∆DL are lower ( ≤ ) than their respective
thresholds (defined when creating a simulation).
Example: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL and DL convergence thresholds
are 5. If ∆UL ≤ 5 and ∆DL ≤ 5 between the 4th and the 5th iteration, ATOLL stops the algorithm after the 5th
iteration. Convergence is reached.
2nd case: After 30 iterations, ∆UL or/and ∆DL are still higher than their respective thresholds and from
the 30th iteration, ∆UL or/and ∆DL do not decrease during 15 successive iterations.
The simulation has not reached convergence (specific divergence symbol).
Examples: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL and DL convergence thresholds
are 5.
- 1. After the 30th iteration, ∆ UL or/and ∆ DL equal 100 and do not decrease during 15 successive iterations:
ATOLL stops the algorithm at the 46th iteration. Convergence is not reached.
- 2. After the 30th iteration, ∆ UL or/and ∆ DL equal 80, they start decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration
(without going under the thresholds) and then, do not change during 15 successive iterations: ATOLL stops
the algorithm at the 56th iteration without reaching convergence.
A bit more information concerning the admission control is provided. During admission control, ATOLL
calculates the uplink load factor of a considered cell assuming the handled mobile is connected to it. Here,
activity status assigned to users is not taken into account. So even if the mobile is not active on UL, it can be
rejected due to cell load saturation. To calculate the cell UL load factor, either ATOLL takes into account
mobile power determined during power control if mobile was connected in previous iteration, or it estimates a
load rise due to mobile and adds it to the current load. The load rise ( ∆X UL ) is calculated as follows:
1
∆X UL =
W
1 + UL
Qreq × RUL
b
Where
W is the chip rate (bit/s),
UL
Q req is the Eb/Nt target on uplink (defined in service properties for a given mobility),
UL
R b is the service uplink effective bit rate (bit/s).
OVSF codes form a binary tree; codes with a longer length are generated from codes with a shorter length.
Indeed, length-k OVSF codes are generated from length-k/2 OVSF codes. Therefore, if one channel needs 1
length-k/2 OVSF code; it is equivalent to use 2 length-k OVSF codes, or 4 length-2k OVSF codes,….
During the resource control, ATOLL determines, for each cell, the number of codes, which will be consumed.
It allocates:
A code with the longest length per common channel, for each cell. The number of common channels
corresponds to the number of overhead DL channel elements per cell defined for the site equipment.
A code per cell-receiver link, for traffic channels. The length of code to be allocated, Code-Length, is
determined as follows:
Code − Length × R DL
b = W
Where,
DL
- Rb is the downlink service effective bit rate (bit/s),
When the calculated code length does not correspond to the code lengths available into the tree, ATOLL
takes the code with the shorter length. For instance, ATOLL will use a 128 bit OVSF code in case the
calculated code length is 240.
The OVSF code allocation follows the “Buddy” algorithm, which guarantees that:
If a k-length OVSF code is used, all of its children with lengths 2k, 4k… cannot be used because they
are no longer orthogonal.
If a k-length OVSF code is used, all of its ancestors with lengths k/2, k/4… cannot be used because
they are no longer orthogonal.
Example: Let a 16 kbit/s service user active on DL be connected to a cell. We assume that site equipment
requires four overhead downlink channel elements per cell. Therefore, ATOLL will consume four 512 bit-
length OVSF codes for common channels and a 128 bit-length OVSF code for traffic channels, that is to say
four additional 512 bit-length OVSF codes.
Notes :
1. The OVSF code allocation follows the mobile connection order (mobile order in the Mobiles tab).
2. The OVSF code and channel element management is differently dealt with in case of “softer” handover.
ATOLL allocates OVSF codes for each cell-receiver link while it globally assigns channel elements to a site.
Constraint on the OVSF codes is available when creating simulation. Therefore, when selecting it, ATOLL
checks the OVSF code availability and then:
Ejects the mobile if there is no OVSF code available (without considering the service priority).
When this constraint respect is not required, ATOLL just checks the OVSF code availability without rejecting
mobiles in case of OVSF code unavailability.
From a user-defined model standard deviation associated to the receiver position, a random shadowing error
is computed and added to the model path loss ( L path ). This random vale is drawn during Monte-Carlo
simulation; each user is assigned a service, a mobility type, an activity status, a geographic position and a
random shadowing value.
ξ is a zero mean gaussian random variable G (0,σ dB ) representing variation due to shadowing. It can be
expressed as the sum of two uncorrelated zero mean gaussian random variables, ξ L and ξ P . ξ L models
error related to the receiver local environment; it is the same whichever the link. ξ P models error related to
Knowing ξ i , the model standard deviation (σ ) and the correlation coefficient (ρ) between ξ 1 and ξ 2 , we can
calculate standard deviations of ξ L (σ L ) and ξ Pi (σ P ) (assuming all ξ Pi have the same standard deviations).
We have:
σ 2 = σ L2 + σ P2
σ L2
ρ=
σ2
Therefore,
σ P2 = σ 2 × (1 − ρ )
σ L2 = σ 2 × ρ
There is currently no agreed model for predicting correlation coefficient (ρ) between ξ 1 and ξ 2 . Two key
variables influence correlation:
The angle between the two paths. If this angle is small, correlation is high.
The relative values of the two path lengths. If angle is 0 and path lengths are the same, correlation
is zero. Correlation is different from zero when path lengths differ.
φT is a function of the mean size of obstacles near the receiver and γ is also linked to the receiver
environment.
In a normal handover status, assuming a hexagonal design for sites, φ is close to π (+/- π/3) and D1/D2 is
close to 1.
π
We found in documentations that ρ = 0.5 when γ = 0.3 and φT = .
10
σ
σL =
2
and
σ
σP =
2
Therefore, to model shadowing error common with all signals arriving at mobile ( E Re Shadowing ), values are
ceiver
randomly drawn for each mobile; they follow a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a standard deviation
σ where (σ ) is the standard deviation associated to the mobile clutter class. Then, for each mobile-
2
transmitter pair, ATOLL draws another value representing the shadowing part uncorrelated with the position
Shadowing ); this value follows a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a standard deviation
of the mobile ( E Path
σ .
2
So, we have:
E Shadowing = E Re
Shadowing + E Shadowing
ceiver Path
Random shadowing error means are centred on zero. Hence, this shadowing modelling method has no
impact on the simulated network load. On the other hand, as shadowing errors on the receiver-transmitter
links are uncorrelated, the method will influence the evaluated SHO gain in case mobile is in SHO.
Random shadowing values used for each mobile and mobile-transmitter pair are detailed in simulation
results.
If a focus zone has been defined in your project, only sites, transmitters and mobiles located inside the focus
zone are considered when accessing simulation results. The global output statistics are based on these
mobiles.
Traffic request:
ATOLL calculates the total number of users who try to be connected. It is a result of the first random
trial, the power control has not yet been achieved. This result depends on the traffic description and
cartography.
During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service. Therefore, UL and DL rates that all the
users could theoretically generate are provided.
Breakdown (number of users, UL and DL rates) per service is given.
Results:
The number and the percentage of rejected users are calculated and detailed per rejection cause.
These results are determined after the power control and depend on network design.
ATOLL supplies the total number and the percentage of connected users, UL and DL total rates that
they generate. These data are also detailed per service.
Note : The traffic rates are calculated at the user level without taking into account handover. Once achieved,
simulations are available for specific UMTS coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis
tool.
Then, if available, are displayed the values of orthogonality factor and standard deviation as defined per
clutter type.
Note : When the simulation does not converge (UL and DL convergence criteria not reached at the end of
the simulation), ATOLL displays a special warning icon in front of Simulation object.
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Click OK to close the window.
In this window, ATOLL displays the maximum number of channel elements previously defined for each site,
the number of required channel elements in uplink and downlink at the end of simulation, the number of extra
channel elements due to soft handover, the properties related to each site equipment (MUD factor, Rake
receiver efficiency factor, carrier selection mode, AS restricted to neighbours option and overhead channel
elements on uplink and downlink), the uplink and downlink throughputs (kbits/s) per service supported by
site. The UL and DL throughputs are the number of kbits per second supported by the site on uplink and
downlink to supply (mobiles connected with the transmitters located on the site) one kind of services. The
throughput calculation takes into account the handover connections.
If the maximum channel element number is exceeded, sites are displayed with red colour.
Note : The allows the user to choose the data to be displayed in the current table. Once
achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the
point analysis tool.
In this window, ATOLL provides the simulation input data like the maximum power, the pilot power, the SCH
power, the other CCH power, the AS threshold (which is a cell parameter since version 2.1), the gain, the
reception and transmission losses, the noise figure, and simulation output data regarding cells such as the
total DL power used, the UL total noise, the UL and DL load factors, the UL and DL noise rises, the
percentage of used power, the UL reuse factor, the number of UL and DL links, the number of used OVSF
codes, the percentage of handover types, the UL and DL throughputs, the minimum, maximum and average
traffic channel powers, the number of users rejected for each cause, for each cell.
Note : The allows the user to choose the data to be displayed in the current table. The
"Commit loads" button permits to copy UL loads and total powers DL (or their average in the case of several
carriers) in the cell table in order to be taken potentially as reference for specific CDMA predictions (by
selecting the None option from the simulation scrolling box).
Average simulations are ordered by cells. Once achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA
coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis tool.
To assign any simulated UL load factor and total DL power to cells from a network, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to use the
simulated results by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the UMTS simulation you want to use the simulated results to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the UMTS simulation you want to use the simulated results,
Click on the Cells tab from the opened window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
When assigned to cells, these values can be used for coverages based on no simulation.
Note : this feature is also available from the mean tab window of any average simulation.
Reminder : the Commit load button is inactive as long as both fields, UL load and total power, do not exist.
In this window, ATOLL gives information about calculated terminal parameters. First, ATOLL mentions
simulation input data: X, Y, service, terminal, user profile, user mobility and activity obtained from random
trial. ATOLL displays simulation output data for these users: carrier, DL and UL requested and obtained
rates, mobile power, best server, connection status, handover status, transmitters in active set and Ec/Io
from cells in active set.
ATOLL displays which carrier is used for connection and calculates the power transmitted by the terminal.
ATOLL identifies the best server among the cells taking part in mobile active set.
Connection status refers to mobile ejection causes previously defined. It gives the reasons why the mobile,
even active, is not connected to any transmitter at the end of the simulation.
ATOLL allows to analyse what type of handover is possible for a mobile; providing the HO status
information. HO status represents the real number of sites compared to the number of cells in active set.
For example, when a mobile is in connection with three cells and among them two co-site cells (soft - softer
handover), its HO status is 2/3. When the mobile is connected with only one transmitter (no handover) its HO
status is 1/1. When the mobile is connected with three co-site transmitters (softer - softer handover), its HO
status is 1/3.
Active set is the list of transmitters (or cells since on unique carrier) in connection with the mobile. The
maximum number of transmitters in active set is defined by the user in Terminal Properties and besides
limited to 4 in ATOLL. Soft handover can be enabled/disabled for every service. For each transmitter in
active set, Ec/Io values are calculated and may be compared to Ec/Io thresholds previously defined in
Mobility Type Properties. Transmitters, which provide an Ec/Io pilot quality that is lower than [ Best server
Ec/Io - AS-threshold ], are rejected from the active set.
Note : The allows the user to choose the data to be displayed in the current table. Once
achieved, simulations are available for specific UMTS coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the
point analysis tool.
Ticking the Detailed results box during the simulation creation enables you to get additional simulation
outputs relating to mobiles and shadowing values computed along paths between transmitters and mobiles.
To display shadowing values for each mobile in any simulation, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display by left
clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the clutter data to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the UMTS simulation you want to display the clutter data,
Click on the Mobile (Shadowing values) tab from the opened window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Notes
Re ceiver
The values EShadowing computed for all the mobiles follow a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a
σ
2
standard deviation .
Path
The values EShadowing computed for a given mobile follow a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a
σ
2
standard deviation .
To make available the display dialog window on all the simulations of the current project, proceed as
follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the UMTS simulations folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties...,
Or,
Double click on the UMTS simulations folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Set the display parameters for all the simulations of the current project,
Click OK to close the window.
Like for most of the other display dialog windows in ATOLL, you can choose the display type associated with
the values (unique, discrete, values interval) and some corresponding fields. Due to the complexity of UMTS
technology simulations, these fields are numerous and can be obtained as indicated in the following table.
Value intervals X
Y
DL requested rate (kbits/s)
UL requested rate (kbits/s)
DL obtained rate (kbits/s)
Note : Existing simulations, in the explorer window contain subitems which depend on results are displayed
on the map. The simulation display is managed with the standard display dialog in use under ATOLL. Once
achieved, simulations are available for specific UMTS coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the
point analysis tool.
Reminder: the maximum power is an input data user-definable for each cell in the Properties window. On the
other hand, the power is a simulation output data calculated for each transmitter, carrier by carrier.
The number of radio links corresponds to the number of users-transmitters links on the same carrier.
This data is calculated on uplink and on downlink. A single user can use several radio links (handover).
ATOLL estimates the percentages of handover types in which the transmitter takes part. ATOLL only
details the results for the following handover status, no handover (1/1), softer (1/2), soft (2/2), softer-
soft (2/3) and soft-soft (3/3) handovers; the other handover status (other HO) are globally analysed.
The uplink and downlink throughputs represent respectively the numbers of kbits per second delivered
by the transmitter on uplink and on downlink.
Minimum traffic channel power is the lowest of the powers allocated to traffic channels for supplying
services to mobiles connected to the transmitter.
Maximum traffic channel power is the greatest of the powers allocated to traffic channels for supplying
services to mobiles connected to the transmitter.
Average traffic channel power is the average of the powers allocated to traffic channels for supplying
services to mobiles connected to the transmitter.
If the detailed results box has been checked for the current simulation, results are also given, for each
(mobile - transmitters in active set) link, on the Cell power used on the TCH (Traffic Channel), the
downlink total noise, the downlink load factor, the downlink noise rise, the downlink reuse factor, the
total noise received at the terminal from the transmitter area (Iintra (DL) and the total noise received at
the terminal from other transmitter areas (Iextra (DL), the total path loss on the link(s) and the number of
uplink and downlink channel elements. Moreover, ATOLL provides the name of the clutter class where
the probe receiver is located, the orthogonality factor, the UL and DL macro diversity gains associated
with the clutter class.
X and Y are the coordinates of users who try to be connected (geographic position determined by the
nd
2 random trial). The power control is based on this order.
Note : Ejected users at the end of the power control are included in this list.
st
Service, user mobility and status activity are the 1 random trial results (user distribution generation).
Terminal and user profile are based on traffic description. According to the service and activity status
assigned to a user, ATOLL determines his terminal and the corresponding user profile.
The carrier used for the mobile-transmitter connection.
DL and UL requested rates: they respectively correspond to the DL and UL effective bit rates of
service.
DL and UL obtained rates: after power control simulation, the obtained rate equals the requested rate if
the mobile is connected. Else, the obtained rate is zero.
The total power transmitted by the terminal.
The best server among the transmitters entering mobile active set.
The Connection status refers to mobile ejection causes previously defined. It gives the reasons why
the mobile, even active, is not connected to any transmitter at the end of the simulation.
The HO status is represented by the number of sites compared to the number of transmitters in active
set.
For example, when a mobile is in connection with three transmitters and among them two co-site transmitters
(soft - softer handover), its HO status is 2/3 (two sites and three transmitters). When the mobile is connected
with only one transmitter (no handover) its HO status is 1/1. When the mobile is connected with three co-site
transmitters (softer - softer handover), its HO status is 1/3.
The list of transmitters in connection with the mobile (Active set). The maximum number of transmitters
in active set is defined by the user in Terminal Properties and limited to 4 in ATOLL. Soft handover
can be enabled/disabled for every service.
Ec/Io values are calculated for each transmitter in active set and may be compared to Ec/Io thresholds
defined in Mobility Type Properties.
Note : Transmitters, which Ec/Io value is AS-threshold (handover margin) lower than the best one (Active
Set link 1), are rejected from the active set.
The cell power transmitted on traffic channel. This parameter is determined for each (mobile –
transmitters in active set) link.
The DL total noise is calculated for each (mobile – transmitters in active set) link. This parameter is
calculated from the transmitter thermal noise and the DL total interference at the terminal.
The DL load factor (determined for each (mobile – transmitters in active set) link) corresponds to the
downlink total interference – total noise at the terminal ratio.
4
The DL noise rise (evaluated for each (mobile – transmitters in active set) link) is deduced from the
DL load factor.
4
The downlink noise rise Nr is calculated from the downlink total noise Ntot : Nr = -10log (Nterm/Ntot), Nterm being the thermal noise
The DL reuse factor (calculated for each (mobile – transmitters in active set) link) is evaluated from the
interference received at the terminal from the intra transmitter area and the total interference received
at the terminal from all the transmitters (intra and extra areas).
DL intra-cellular interference for each cell (i) of the mobile active set:
I int ra = P DL
DL
tot
(ic ) − Fortho × P DL
tot
(ic ) − PSCH
i i LT
DL extra-cellular interference for each cell (i) of the mobile active set
I extra =
DL
∑ P DL
tot
(ic ) − Fortho × P DL
tot
(ic ) − PSCH
Tx ,i∉Tx LT
The total path loss (determined for each (mobile – transmitters in active set) link) is calculated from
transmitter and terminal losses, path loss (propagation result), transmitter and terminal gains.
The number of uplink and downlink channel elements respectively refer to the number of channel
elements consumed by the user on UL and DL,
The orthogonality factor is user-defined in the clutter Properties window.
The UL macro diversity gain is determined for mobile receivers connected either on UL or on UL and
DL.
UL − Macrodiver sity − Gain = ( ) ( )
Eb
Nt
UL
−
Eb
Nt
UL
tch − BS
The DL macro diversity gain is evaluated in case mobile receivers are connected either on DL or on
UL and DL.
DL − Macrodiver sity − Gain = ( ) ( )
Eb
Nt
DL
−
Eb
Nt
DL
tch − BS
Coverage studies where each map bin is considered as a probe user with associated terminal,
mobility and service. These are ordered in four different groups of studies, listed in a natural
planning order, from the indispensable pilot study to the study of downlink total noise, with respect
to the propagation model as defined :
− Pilot-oriented studies to determine pilot coverage by transmitter, the pilot coverage by signal
level, overlapping area, pilot quality (Ec/Io) and pilot pollution,
− Service-oriented studies to determine service availability in uplink and downlink and effective
service areas,
− handover status study to analyse macro-diversity performance,
− Downlink total noise study.
Except pilot coverage, coverage by signal level and overlapping studies, which are similar to
classical coverage studies, all other studies are specific to UMTS network planning and closely
related to a particular UMTS simulation.
Power control is achieved once only during simulation but never during prediction studies. Simulation
outputs such as uplink and downlink noise levels generated by the users may be used to evaluate the
radio reception. Therefore, prediction studies may be based on:
UL load and DL total power modelled during power control simulation for point analysis,
UL load and DL total power modelled during power control simulation for coverage studies,
User-definable UL load and DL total power for coverage studies :
Specific predictions can be based on either user defined load estimations (when filling manually the
UL_load and Total power cells from the cell table) or by using the "Commit loads" button (assigning to
these columns the calculated uplink loads and total powers from the current simulation) in the Cells tab
window of a simulation result window. To use these reported values, just select the None option from
the Simulation scrolling box.
Specific UMTS coverage studies may be performed with three different purposes:
Analyse in detail one particular simulation,
Globally analyse all simulations and evaluate network stability with regard to traffic fluctuations,
Analyse an average simulation,
Analyse user-definable parameters such as UL load and DL total power without simulation.
For these coverage studies, since study GUI is generic, the general rule is to choose :
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of
simulations and average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a terminal, a mobility (or All), a service (or All),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.
and to display the results as function of the attribute you want.
In this studies, each bin may be seen as a probe mobile, which does not create any interference
Caution : If you modify radio parameters, before recalculating predictions, do not forget to replay UMTS
simulations first in order to base predictions on up-to-date simulations. Ensure consistency between
predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis. To help on that, ATOLL
provides a feature to automatically calculate CDMA predictions after simulations without any intermediary
step.
Important : Any of these specific UMTS studies requires propagation path loss on each bin.
Note : when choosing a carrier, only cells using this carrier are taken into account in calculations. ATOLL
will display a coverage by carrier. To get a coverage based on all the carriers, select the All option. In this
case, ATOLL displays a multi-carrier coverage. It selects on each bin the best carrier according to the
selection mode specified in the properties of the transmitters from the current network.
You can enter a reliability level (x%) when defining prediction properties (point analysis: Profile, Reception
and AS analysis tab and coverage studies). Therefore, the evaluated pilot quality, uplink and downlink traffic
channel qualities are reliable x% of time.
Formulas used to compute shadowing margin in case of no handover and SHO (2 and 3 links) and SHO
gains are detailed in the Technical reference guide.
ATOLL performs the simulations and lists them in the UMTS simulation folder. Then, ATOLL carries out the
prediction calculations based on the created simulations.
You can analyse different mobility and several services in a same study. For any UMTS study, in the
Simulation tab, you can choose All in the Service or/and Mobility scrolling menus. In this case, ATOLL works
out the coverage criterion for each service or/and mobility type; a bin of the map will be covered if the studied
coverage criterion is met for any service or/and mobility. In addition, receiver definition and coverage display
are not linked. Parameters set in the Simulation tab are used in order to predetermine the coverage area
(area where ATOLL will display coverage) while graphical settings (available in the Display tab) enable you
to choose how to represent the coverage area. For example, it is possible to perform multi-service or/and
multi-mobility pilot reception analysis and to choose a coverage display per transmitter or depending on any
transmitter attribute.
The available display types (depending on the study to be carried out) are listed below :
Single colour : Coverage is mono colour; it displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied,
Colour per transmitter : Coverage displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied. Moreover, the
bin colour corresponds to the colour of the first transmitter in active set (best server)
Colour per service : The receiver is not totally defined. Its service can take all existing service types.
There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined services. For each service, coverage
layer displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied
Colour per mobility : The receiver is not totally defined. Its mobility can take all existing mobility
types. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined mobilities. For each mobility,
coverage layer displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied
Colour per probability : Coverage displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied with different
levels of probability. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined probability
thresholds (by default 0.5 and 0.9)
Colour per quality margin : Each coverage layer displays area where the quality margin is greater
than the user-defined threshold value. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined
quality margins. The quality margin is the difference between the quality level and the target quality
level. There is intersection between layers
Colour per quality level : Each coverage layer displays area where signal quality exceeds the user-
defined quality level. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined quality margins.
There is intersection between layers
Colour per handover status : Coverage displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied for at
least one transmitter pilot quality. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined
handover status. Each layer represents a handover status. There is no intersection between layers
Colour per potential active transmitter number : Each coverage layer displays area where the
number of potential active transmitters is greater than the user-defined threshold value. There are as
many graphical coverage layers as user-defined potential active transmitters. The potential active
transmitter number corresponds to transmitters checking all conditions to enter the active set. There is
intersection between layers
Colour per required power level : Each coverage layer displays area where the required terminal
power (in order for transmitter to get a service) is greater than the user-defined required power
thresholds. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined required power level. There
is intersection between layers.
Colour per required power margin : Each coverage layer displays area where the required power
margin exceeds the user-defined threshold value. There are as many graphical coverage layers as
user-defined power margin. The required power margin corresponds to the difference between the
required terminal power and the maximum terminal power. There is intersection between layers
Colour per minimum noise level: The displayed noise level is the lowest of the values calculated on
all carriers.
Colour per average noise level: The displayed noise level is the average of calculated values on all
carriers.
Colour per maximum noise level: The displayed noise level is the greatest of the values calculated
on all carriers.
Colour per minimum noise rise : The displayed noise rise is the lowest of the values calculated from
the downlink total noise, on all carriers.
Colour per average noise rise : The displayed noise rise is the average of the values calculated from
the downlink total noise, on all carriers.
Colour per maximum noise rise : The displayed noise rise is the greatest of the values calculated
from the downlink total noise, on all carriers.
Colour per polluter number : The coverage displays areas where user is interfered by pilot signal
from polluter transmitters. A polluter transmitter is a transmitter that meets all the criteria to enter the
active set but which is not admitted due to the active set limit size..
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Pilot reception analysis (Ec/Io)
option from the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General,
Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers default
values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must
Comment : Actually, for a circuit switched service, when there are several transmitters in active set, Eb/Nt
from different transmitters are combined in terminal and improve reception with a macro-diversity gain.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Service area (Eb/Nt) downlink
option from the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General,
Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers default
values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
When choosing Max Eb/Nt, ATOLL calculates the maximum downlink traffic channel quality you can get at
terminal or transmitter; it displays the areas where the downlink traffic channel quality calculated by
considering the maximum allowed traffic channel power of each transmitter in receiver active set, is higher
than the user-defined thresholds.
The “Effective Eb/Nt” display is also offered. Here, ATOLL considers required traffic channel quality instead
of maximum traffic channel quality; it colours bins of the map where the required DL traffic channel quality is
higher than the user-defined thresholds.
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must
have been replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation.
Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply
because simulated network may be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before
further analysis.
Comment : The macro diversity concept is also dealt with on the uplink. Its value depends on the handover
status.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Service area (Eb/Nt) uplink option
from the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation,
Display. An additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help
to get description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers default
values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
When choosing Max Eb/Nt, ATOLL calculates the maximum uplink traffic channel quality you can get at
terminal or transmitter; it displays the areas where the uplink traffic channel quality calculated by considering
the maximum terminal power, is higher than the user-defined thresholds.
The “Effective Eb/Nt” display is also offered. Here, ATOLL considers required traffic channel quality instead
of maximum traffic channel quality; it colours bins of the map where the required UL traffic channel quality is
higher than the user-defined thresholds.
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must
have been replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation.
Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply
because simulated network may be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before
further analysis.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Effective service area option from
the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display.
An additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get
description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers default
values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must
have been replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation.
Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply
because simulated network may be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before
further analysis.
Comment : In parenthesis is given equivalence between usual handover name and HO status notation
sometimes used in ATOLL, referring to number of sites/number of transmitters in the active set (See UMTS
Simulations : Overview).
Caution : Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network.
In this study, handover is allowed on areas where the service chosen by the user is available.
For each study, a simulation tab enables to connect to one or all simulations. Furthermore, you can choose
different ways of displaying the same coverage to get a better analysis and dimensioning information on the
network.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the handover status option from the
study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An
additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get
description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers default
values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must
have been replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation.
Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply
because simulated network may be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before
further analysis.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Downlink total noise option from
the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display.
An additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get
description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers default
values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
Note : In case of given service and carrier, the calculated and displayed coverage is the same for any
selected display per noise level (average, minimum or maximum) or any display per noise rise (average,
minimum or maximum).
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must
have been replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation.
Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply
because simulated network may be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before
further analysis.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Pilot pollution option from the
study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An
additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get
description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Note : When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers default
values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
Representation on map may are given regarding to the number of polluters. Each layer may be displayed
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Concerning pilot quality given by (Ec/Io) (which is the main parameter to enter an active set) and connection
status, with the point analysis tool, ATOLL is able to get information about the active set analysis of a UMTS
scenario (for given mobile, mobility and service) at the by using the propagation model as defined before
(with priority order respect).
Note : The Point analysis window is automatically displayed when clicking on the button from the
toolbar,
Pilot quality and connection status (Pilot, Uplink, Downlink) are displayed for previous conditions and without
taking into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the
receiver conditions can check the point analysis diagnosis, simply because simulated network may be
saturated.
Choose from the scrolling Vertical bar representing the lower boundary
Choose from the scrolling list lists the parameters of a to enter the active set (defined as the signal
the single simulation you probe user to be studied value of the best server at the current point
want this point analysis to among the selected minus the AS_Threshold - defined in the Global
be based on simulation properties from the transmitters folder)
Displays the pilot reception of Displays the pilot reception in term of Vertical bar representing Displays the connection
transmitters out of the active set for active set components for this the Ec/Io threshold to status (pilot, uplink and
this scenario. Filled bars indicate the scenario. Active set is represented in enter the active set downlink traffic) for the
transmitters which respect the grey. Filled bars indicate the (defined in the mobility current scenario.
active set constraints. Even if more transmitters which respect the type properties page)
: successful connection,
transmitters respect the constraints, active set constraints. Even if more
the active set size is limited to the transmitters respect the constraints, : failed connection
number defined in the terminal the active set size is limited to the
properties and is function of the number defined in the terminal
current service. Transmitters with properties and is function of the
empty bars do not respect the active current service
set constraints
Bar graph shows pilot reception from all transmitters on the same carrier (with same colours as defined for
each transmitter), displaying limit values required to be in active set (Ec/Io threshold, (Ec/Io)best server-A-S
threshold). Grey background displays transmitters in active set.
You may modify receiver characteristics, ATOLL will automatically check pilot quality and channel
availability:
If you change terminal, it will modify maximum available transmitting power in uplink and the active set
size.
If you change mobility, it will modify pilot quality thresholds and Eb/Nt target per service in downlink.
If you change service, it will modify the active set size and Eb/Nt target in downlink.
Like in GSM/TDMA or CDMA/CDMA 2000, it is possible to easily allocate neighbours within ATOLL. This
can be made either manually, or automatically, imposing several constraints on the potential cells that could
be part of a neighbourhood. Then, once allocated, neighbours can be easily managed (modification or
deletion). Finally, ATOLL makes easy the visualisation of neighbourhoods on the active map.
Downlink scrambling codes permit to separate cells from others. It is strongly recommended to assign
different codes to a given cell and to cells belonging to its neighbour list. Some additional separation
constraints can be also defined. In ATOLL, you can either allocate it manually for each cell or automatically
for all cells or a group of cells in the network. Depending on the allocation strategy, several constraints can
be imposed on scrambling code groups and domains, exceptional pairs, distance and neighbours. At any
moment, it is possible to check the consistency of the current scrambling code allocation in the studied
network.
Note : Neighbours have no impact on interference calculations : all cells in a network interfer with the others.
Neighbours of any linked project in co-planning can also be displayed and chosen manually.
Manual allocation of UMTS neighbours must be performed for each cell, one at a time. To do this, proceed
as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Either,
Choose the [Cells:Open] command from the opened menu
Once the cells table is opened,
Either
Right click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Choose the record properties option from the context menu (or from the Records
menu from the menu bar),
Or
Double click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Click the Neighbours tab from the current window,
Use the What's this help to get information about fields available in the current window,
In the displayed window, in the top table, click on cell to choose from the scrolling box the
desired cell as a neighbour for the current one. In the scrolling box are displayed all the
transmitters located within a radius of 30 km around the reference transmitter (cell),
Click either another table cell, or the button to validate and add a new line to
the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
Or
Choose the [Cells:Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the opened menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the opened window,
In the displayed table, click on a table cell to determine either base cells or associated
neighbours in the network,
Click another table cell to validate and add a new line to the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
Notes :
You can also use manual allocation tools to check currently allocated neighbourhoods,
This feature only deals with GSM/TDMA, CDMA/CDMA 2000 and UMTS technologies.
Allocating automatically permits to allocate neighbours globally in the current network by imposing
constraints on cells of active transmitters that must be satisfied. Force neighbours reciprocity and within co-
site is possible.
When clicking on the Commit button, ATOLL assigns neighbours to cells. Neighbours are listed in the
Neighbours tab of each cell Properties window.
In the Results part, ATOLL provides the neighbour list for each cell. If cells have a current allocation, they
are flagged existing.
When selecting the Reset option, ATOLL deletes all the current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour
allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept. Therefore, if you add a new cell i and start a new
allocation without selecting the Reset option:
ATOLL determines the neighbour list of the cell i,
It examines the neighbour list of other cells. If there is space in neighbour list of another cell j:
- The cell i enters the cell j neighbour list if allocation criteria are satisfied. The cell i will be the first
one in the neighbour list.
- The cell i does not enter the cell j neighbour list if allocation criteria are not satisfied.
If the cell j belongs to the cell i neighbour list and the force symmetry option is selected:
- The cell i will enter the cell j neighbour list if there is space in the cell j neighbour list.
- If the cell j neighbour list is full, ATOLL removes the cell j from the cell i neighbour list in order to
preserve the link symmetry
Notes :
This feature only deals with GSM/TDMA, CDMA/CDMA 2000 and UMTS technologies.
No prediction study is needed to perform the automatic neighbour allocation. When starting an
automatic neighbour allocation, ATOLL automatically calculates the path loss matrices if it does not
find them.
Either,
Choose the [Cells:Open] command from the opened menu
Once the cells table is opened,
Either
Right click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Choose the record properties option from the context menu (or from the Records
menu from the menu bar),
Or
Double click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Click the Neighbours tab from the current window,
or
Choose the [Cells:Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the opened menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the opened window,
In the displayed table, select the desired neighbour line,
Press the keyboard Del (or Suppr.) key
Click on OK to validate and close the dialog box.
Note : this can also be made for external neighbours from a linked project in co-planning.
To display the neighbours of any transmitter (whatever the carrier is), proceed as follows :
Click on the visible neighbourhood icon from the toolbar,
Left click on the desired transmitter to select it on the map,
The neighbours are displayed (colour of the reference transmitter) on the map such as :
Note : This feature only deals with GSM/TDMA, CDMA/CDMA 2000 and UMTS technologies.
Available scrambling codes depend on the country and on the area; it is necessary to distinguish borders
from other zones. To model this, domain and group tables have been created.
A domain corresponds to a border or a zone of the country.
A group is a set of clusters.
Each group must be associated to one or several domains. Therefore, a domain consists of several
groups.
Firstly, scrambling codes can be manually assigned to any cell of a UMTS network. Then, using the definition
of groups and domains, and imposing some constraints on them and on neighbours, minimum distance and
exceptional pairs, we can choose a strategy (clustered or distributed) in order to start the automatic tool.
To give a primary scrambling code to a cell, you must access cell properties. This can be made either from :
The transmitter property dialog (Cells tab),
The cell property dialog,
The cell table.
After allocation is completed (manually or automatically), constraints can be also checked also by an
automatic tool.
Available scrambling codes depend on the country and on the area; it is necessary to distinguish borders
from other zones. To model this, domain and group tables have been created.
A domain corresponds to a border or a zone of the country.
A group is a set of clusters.
Each group must be associated to one or several domains. Therefore, a domain consists of several
groups.
You can also define the domain-group pairs in the Group of primary scrambling codes window.
The defined domains can be now assigned to cells in order then to be used as constraints in the automatic
allocation of scrambling codes.
To assign a domain to cells, you must access cell properties and fill the appropriate field. This can be made
either from :
The transmitter property dialog (Cells tab),
The cell property dialog,
The cell table.
The domain association will then be used by the automatic allocation tool.
Standard features for managing table content (Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, Delete, Display columns, Filter,
Sort, Fields…) are available in context menu (when right clicking on column(s) or record(s)) and in the
Format, Edit and Records menus.
Scrambling code automatic allocation can also be made on a specific carrier or on all. ATOLL assigns
scrambling codes to transmitters using the selected carrier.
To automatically allocate primary scrambling codes to all the cells, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Choose the [Cells:Primary scrambling codes: Automatic allocation…] command from the
opened menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
In the Primary scrambling code window, enter a reuse distance (minimum distance in m) and
choose an allocation strategy.
Select the Reset all codes option to delete the existing codes and carry out a new scrambling
code allocation. If not selected, existing codes are kept.
Click on Run to start the automatic allocation; ATOLL displays the automatic allocation results
in the Results part,
Then, click on Commit to assign primary scrambling codes to cells.
Note : ATOLL will take into account both real distance and the azimuths of antennas to calculate the inter-
transmitter distance to be compared with the reuse distance.
ATOLL allocates scrambling codes starting with the most constrained cell and ending with the lowest
constrained one. The cell constraint level depends on its number of neighbours and whether the cell is
neighbour of other cells. Here, the neighbour term includes both manually specified or automatically
allocated neighbours and cells, which are within the reuse distance of a studied cell. When cells have the
same constraint level, cell processing is based on order of transmitters in the Transmitters folder.
Note : In order to calculate the effective inter-transmitter distance (which will be compared to the reuse
distance), ATOLL takes into account both real distance and azimuths of antennas. For further information,
please, refer to Technical reference guide.
The scrambling code choice depends on domains associated to cells and on the selected allocation strategy.
When no domain is assigned to cells, ATOLL uses the 512 primary scrambling codes. Several scenarios are
detailed hereafter:
If selected the Clustered option, ATOLL will choose eight codes in the cluster 0 and two codes in the cluster
1. Therefore, the allocated scrambling codes will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.
If you tick the Distributed option, ATOLL will take the first code of clusters 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. So, it will
assign the codes 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64 and 72.
nd
2 case: We assume that the domain 1 is associated to cells. Domain 1 contains two groups, the
group 1 consisted of cluster 0 (available codes: 0 to 7) and the group 2 including clusters 2 and 3
(available codes: 16 to 31).
If selected the Clustered option, ATOLL will choose eight codes in the group 1 and two other ones in the
group 2 (the first two codes of the cluster 2). So, allocation result will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 16, 17.
If you tick the Distributed option, ATOLL will select the first code of the group 1 (cluster 0), the first code of
the cluster 2 (group 2), the first code of the cluster 3 (group 2), the second code of the group 1 (cluster 0),
the second code of the cluster 2 (group 2), the second code of the cluster 3 (group 2) and so on…. Result of
allocation will be 0, 16, 24, 1, 17, 25, 2, 18, 26, 3.
rd
3 case: We assume that the domain 1 is associated to cells. Domain 1 contains one group, the group
1 consisted of cluster 1 (available codes: 8 to 15). As there are not enough scrambling codes available
in the group 1, ATOLL does not allocate any scrambling code and displays an error message “Primary
scrambling code allocation failed”.
- Domains: ATOLL checks if the allocated scrambling codes belong to the domain assigned
to the cells.
Click on OK to start the checking algorithm.
ATOLL details the checking results in a report. This report is a text file called ScramblingCodeCheck.txt; it is
stored in the temporary folder on your workstation. For each selected criterion, ATOLL gives the number of
detected inconsistencies and details each of them.
For criteria 1, 2 and 3, it displays the name of cells and the common scrambling code. In case of criterion 4, it
lists the name of cells, which do not satisfy the criterion, the associated domains and the allocated
scrambling codes.
In CDMA/CDMA 2000, everybody works at the same frequency, signals are spread over a band of 1.2288
MHz (on each carrier) and distinguished by the use of OVSF codes. Nevertheless, this induces potentially
high levels of noise which can be defeated by sophisticated power controls on uplink (from terminals) and on
downlink (from transmitters) traffic channels.
Because of power control, there is not a single solution to model a CDMA network, and results totally depend
totally on network parameters such as traffic and user behaviours. Hence, these parameters have to be
modelled before starting calculations via user distributions. Simulation results provide a snapshot of the
CDMA network at a certain time.
In order to simulate user distributions and associated behaviours, some parameters have to be tuned. These
are services, radio configurations, user profiles and environment types. Each of these is easy to manage like
any other folder-like objects within ATOLL. All these parameters go together with traffic maps, based on
environments, on user profiles (with no required definition for environment parameters) or on Transmitters
and Services (in term of rates or number of users - with required of definition for environment and user profile
parameters).
CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations power control and specific CDMA coverage predictions need the definition of
the previous parameters. Classical coverage predictions are also available to study cell pilots. The point
analysis tool allows a specific analysis of any active set at a given point on the map, for a particular scenario
(service and radio configuration of a probe user which the current status is provided by network simulation
results).
Geo data are easily manageable like for other projects. You may either create or import geographic objects.
Sites, antennas, station templates, transmitters, measurements, and propagation models work in the same
way for CDMA/CDMA 2000 and the other technology projects. Nevertheless, due to an enhanced resource
management to consider at site level, site equipment and resource management per service have been
introduced. Furthermore, since CDMA support several carrier networks, a new item characterising each
carrier per transmitter has been introduced : CDMA cells. Hence, many properties are defined at the cell
level (e.g. powers).
Like for the other types of technology, neighbours may be manually defined by the user or with the help of
the neighbour automatic allocation tool, but at the cell level.
The What's this context tool allows the user to understand the specific CDMA fields and features available
in dialog boxes.
To achieve power control simulation and coverage calculation, CDMA planning requires traffic snapshots
unlike GSM planning, which only needs traffic data when dimensioning a network for a certain grade of
service.
CDMA coverage directly depends on offered traffic : the more the traffic is, the smaller the coverage zones
are. This phenomenon is called cell breathing. As Traffic is dynamic, coverage calculation is necessarily
statistical.
ATOLL enables or CDMA/CDMA 2000 network planning, 2 (2,5G) network based on Narrowband Code
Division Multiple Access technique (N-CDMA) and multi-service management. These major CDMA concepts
and new technologies require new network and data modelling, with appropriate needs for traffic modelling.
A wide range of different CDMA/CDMA 2000 services available to consumers, generates a more complex
traffic than standard voice transmissions. Appropriate traffic data model and relevant localisation on a map,
i.e. traffic cartography represents a major input for CDMA/CDMA 2000 planning. Specific CDMA objects are
available when creating a new project with ATOLL. The CDMA projects are designed to provide specific
CDMA radio and traffic data structures, CDMA simulations and predictions folders.
CDMA and CDMA 2000 technologies are available in ATOLL only if the optional UMTS module is installed.
Traffic input
Traffic description : activity probabilities
Traffic map design : number of subscribers or users (depending on the type of map)
Network optimisation
Neighbour allocation
Firstly, due to the fact that the number of channel elements is limited by site, these are set from the Site
folder. Hence, in ATOLL, you can model several pieces of equipment with different radio resource
management parameters and describe channel element consumption for each equipment type/service
couple. Then, you can assign a piece of equipment to each site.
Some features have been introduced in order to adjust the global specific parameters of CDMA/CDMA 2000
networks.
CDMA supports multi-carrier networks, i.e. a transmitter can work on several carriers on the same time, each
carrier being set with different properties. Hence, to take it into account, a new level has been introduced in
order to simulate the carrier level on each transmitters : CDMA cells. Like many other objects in ATOLL,
these are easily manageable and provide several tools in order to make their use easy.
MUD factor
Multi-User Detection is a technology used to decrease intra-cellular interference on uplink. MUD is modelled
by a coefficient between 0 and 1; this factor is considered in the UL interference calculation. In case MUD is
not supported by equipment, enter 0 as value.
Carrier selection
It refers to carrier selection mode used during the transmitter admission control in mobile active set. Three
methods are available:
- UL min noise: The least loaded carrier (carrier with the lowest UL load factor) is selected,
- DL min power: The carrier with lowest used total DL power is selected,
- Random: The carrier is randomly chosen.
Overhead CEs uplink and downlink: number of channel elements that a cell uses for common
channels on uplink and downlink.
AS restricted to neighbours
This option is used to manage mobile active set. If you select this option, the other transmitters in active set
must belong to the neighbour list of the best server.
Notes :
Rake efficiency factor for computation of recombination in downlink has to be set in terminal radio
configurations.
Notes :
Standard features for managing table content (Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, Delete, Display columns,
Filter, Sort, Fields…) are available in context menu (when right clicking on column(s) or record(s)) and
in the Format, Edit and Records menus.
Rake efficiency factor for computation of recombination in downlink has to be set in terminal radio
configurations.
VIII.4.2.c MANAGING CHANNEL ELEMENT CONSUMPTION PER CDMA/CDMA 2000 SITE EQUIPMENT
UL and DL channel elements are independently dealt with in power control simulation. Furthermore, the
number of channel element required by a site depends on site equipment, user service and link direction (up
or down).
To describe channel element consumption during CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulation, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Sites folder to open the context menu,
Left click the [Equipment : Channel Element consumption] command from the opened
scrolling menu,
In the CE consumption window, enter for each equipment-terminal(RC) pair the number of
UL and DL channel elements that ATOLL will consume during power control simulation,
Click on to close the table.
Note :
In case you have defined neither equipment nor channel element consumption, ATOLL considers the
following default values, Rake efficiency factor = 1, MUD factor = 0, Carrier selection = UL minimum
noise, Overhead CEs downlink and uplink = 0, AS restricted to neighbours option not selected, and
uses one channel element per link (up or down) for any service, during power control simulation.
Equipment can be also assigned by accessing site table.
Some of them are used as global values, other as default values. All of these are essential in CDMA/CDMA
2000 power control simulations.
The number of cells per transmitter is limited by the number of carriers available for a network as defined in
the global parameter dialog. Cells can be listed either by transmitter, in a specific dialog, or in a table, as
other radio data (sites and transmitters). So, here again, the management of cells remains easy and
comfortable.
The Cells table contains all the identifiers of a cell, its name, transmitter and carrier which the cell refers
to, all the values defining transmitted signal level, pilot power, synchronisation power, paging power,
maximum power, total power used, information about the cell uplink load and an active set management
parameter, AS threshold.
Notes :
Cells are automatically created and described in the table when you drag and drop a station. On the
other hand, you must define them manually after adding a new transmitter (New… command when
right clicking on the Transmitters folder) or copying a list of transmitters in the Transmitters table.
Cell default name is: Transmitter name(carrier). If you change transmitter name or carrier, ATOLL
does not update the cell name.
You cannot create two cells related to the same transmitter-carrier couple.
It is also possible to open a single dialog for each cell. To do so, proceed as follows :
Open the cell table (see above)
Either
Double click the record which property dialog you want to open,
Or
Right click on the record which property dialog you want to open to get its associated
context menu,
Select the Record Properties command from the opened scrolling menu (or the Record
Properties command from the Records menu),
Use the What's this help to get description about the opened dialog window.
Notes :
Cell Properties dialog consists of three tabs: cell characteristics entered in the cells table are grouped
in the General and Transmission/Reception tabs, Internal and external neighbours may be allocated to
the cell in the Neighbours tab.
It is possible to define additional fields in the cell table by using the Fields command in its related
context menu (or from the Records menu). If it is the case, this new field will then be available in the
Other properties tab of any cell property dialog.
To define the different powers related to CDMA/CDMA 2000 technologies, access the cell properties
(either from the table or from dialogs) and fill the following fields (Transmission/Reception tab) :
Max power
Pilot power
Synchronisation power
Paging power
The total power used and UL load used in specific CDMA coverages are also defined in the cell properties.
The active set threshold (default value : 5dB) used for active set determination has also to be set there.
To define the active set threshold of any cell, access the cell properties (either from the table or from
dialogs) and fill the field AS threshold (Transmission/Reception tab).
To achieve power control simulation, ATOLL use the other classical geo data (clutter maps, DTM or DEM
maps), the radio configuration (sites, antennas, transmitters, cells) and the specific CDMA/CDMA 2000
parameters. These topics are organised in folders and are easily manageable. They deal with :
services,
Radio Configurations (RC) made of mobility type and terminal folders,
user profiles,
environment classes.
In CDMA/CDMA 2000 , Radio Configuration (RC) is an important concept; different radio configurations can
be described in the Terminals folder. The mobility concept is not considered in CDMA/CDMA 2000
technology. Nevertheless, the Mobility type folder used for UMTS traffic management will be kept in the short
term. The mobility will be considered as a radio configuration; it will allow you to enter specific quality targets
for each couple (service, RC).
The main data is the user profile, which describes a type of subscriber by listing his communication
behaviours:
which radio configuration(s) does he use ?
for which service(s)?
with which usage characteristics (frequency, duration)?
The services are similar to circuit-switched UMTS services because the FCH channel is always on-air. The
quality levels on pilot and traffic channels, respectively Ec/I0 and Eb/Nt, strongly depend on the radio
configuration and not on the mobility type as in ATOLL UMTS project. Therefore, when creating new
services, in addition to standard characteristics (nominal rate,…), you have to provide Eb/Nt in uplink and
downlink for each radio configuration previously defined. The Ec/I0 requirements for each radio configuration
must be entered in the Mobility type folder.
Environments just associate a list of user profiles with a specific “mobility type (RC)” to a subscriber density.
Environment classes or user profiles can be used to geographically define multi-traffic areas.
Practical advice: to keep consistency with the UMTS traffic structure, respect the following rules:
Define as many “mobility types” as radio configurations with their respective names.
Assign each user profile to a one or several services, using the same radio configuration.
When describing each environment, specify the mobility type corresponding to the radio configuration
defined for the user profile, otherwise, simulations could use inconsistent data.
As with any Data table in ATOLL, these tables are automatically stored in a database if the user works with a
connected document.
ATOLL powerful data management features are available on traffic tables. For example, you may group
terminals by their active set size.
ATOLL manages multi-carrier networks. It allows the user to choose the way carriers are selected by
transmitters. Moreover, any specific CDMA study may deal with several carriers depending on the user or on
the radio configuration of the network.
ATOLL provides a function to enable or disable soft handover for a given service.
Notes :
In the Eb/Nt tab window, (Eb/Nt)DL and (Eb/Nt)UL targets are the thresholds (in dB) that must be
achieved to provide users with the service. These parameters are linked with radio configurations, and
must be defined with some potentially different multiples of nominal rate (defined in the terminal
properties in RC) for the SCH rate
Service nominal rates are defined within the services for UMTS. In CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects,
nominal rates for FCH are defined within the terminal (RC) properties and the SCH rates are given as
multiple of this in the Eb/Nt tab.
Maximum and minimum allowed powers allowable for any type of service are defined in General tab in
UMTS whereas they are defined on FCH and SCH in the Eb/Nt tab in CDMA/CDMA 2000 , for each
type of radio configuration linked with the considered service (See Data service creation for
CDMA/CDMA 2000)
The user should enter 9.6kbps or 14.4kbps (according to the RC) in the nominal rate of the service. Plus,
the user needs to define the probability that an SCH will be required or requested with a multiple of the
nominal rate. The user will enter probabilities for each possible multiple (2, 4, 8 and 16). In a real system,
the sum of probabilities should be less than 1 since the SCH is needed for only a fraction of the total
connection time (the probability reflects the percentage of time that the service will need an SCH with the
given multiple of nominal rate).
Notes :
When the Services table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of
any service by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at
left.
The coding factors, which penalize UL and DL service rates, may be supplied in two ways. For each service,
you may :
Either enter high UL and DL coding factors and then, set a low enough UL and DL Eb/Nt threshold so
that the advantage of high coding can be simulated (higher error correction rate means smaller bit
error rate and thus a smaller required Eb/Nt),
Or enter low UL and DL coding factors value and take into account the coding to define the required
UL and DL Eb/Nt values, i.e. a high enough Eb/Nt threshold to simulate the disadvantage of little
coding.
The services table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and
copy/paste functions are available.
Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu
associated with the Services folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the
contents of the services table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in
the different windows.
When the Services table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of
any service by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at
left.
Parameters which are located into the mobility type folder are pilot quality (Ec/Io) thresholds (in dB). For a
given mobility type :
Ec/Io (TAdd in CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects) threshold is the minimum Ec/Io required from a transmitter
to enter the active set. In ATOLL, this value is verified for the best server.
T-Drop is the minimum Ec/Io required from a transmitter not to be ejected from the active set. This
data is important for CDMA/CDMA 2000 . In ATOLL, this value is verified for transmitters other than
the best server.
Terminals summarise the different radio configurations that can be used in the network. Each radio
configuration is described by a minimum and maximum transmission power (dynamic range for downlink
power control), its antenna gain and reception losses, and an internal thermal noise (calculated from the
noise figure). Active set size is the maximum allowable number of transmitters in connection with the terminal
(macro-diversity). This parameter is settable for FCH as well as for SCH. The maximum active set size can
reach 6. The number of fingers represents the maximum number of active set links the terminal (rake) can
combine. This criterion is considered in simulations, point analysis and coverage prediction. The number of
fingers is the same for FCH and SCH. You can also define UL and DL nominal rates i.e. the fundamental
channel (FCH) rate. Finally, you may enter a percentage of the mobile total power dedicated to the UL pilot
channel.
The UL pilot power is than taken into account to calculate the total UL interference
To manage the Radio Configuration parameters dealing with Ec/I0 requirements, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA 2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Mobility type folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the mobility of which you want to manage the properties to open the
associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the mobility of which you want to manage the properties,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Set the parameters of the current mobility,
Validate by clicking on OK.
To manage the Radio Configuration parameters dealing with terminals, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA 2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Terminals folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the terminal of which you want to manage the properties to open the
associated context menu,
Because Radio Configurations are made of mobility type and terminal folders, Radio Configuration
parameters are spread within the two related tables
To open the Radio Configuration table dealing with Ec/I0 requirements, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA 2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Mobility types folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the Mobility types folder,
The mobility types table opens.
To open the Radio Configuration table dealing with terminals, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA 2000 Parameters folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the Terminals folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Open,
Or,
Double click on the Terminals folder,
The terminals table opens.
The mobility types and terminal tables work exactly like the other tables. Their cells are editable, sorting
and filtering tools, and copy/paste functions are available.
Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu
associated with the mobility types or terminals folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also
manage the contents of the mobility types or terminals table. Use the What's this help to get
description about the fields available in the different windows.
When the Mobility type or terminals table are displayed and active, it is possible to open the property
dialog window of any mobility or terminal by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or
on the associated arrow at left.
Those parameters are used in simulation to determine the probability (activity status) that a user is
transmitting or receiving communication for the given service and terminal when the snapshot is taken.
Notes :
For speech services, entering a one-hour call during 1000s corresponds to define 2 calls per hour
during 500s…the activity probabilities will be the same in both cases.
In order for all the services defined for a user profile to be taken into account during traffic scenario
elaboration, the sum of activity probabilities must be lower than 1
You can model temporal variations of user behaviour by creating different profiles for different hours
(busy hour, ...).
The user profiles table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools,
and copy/paste functions are available.
Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu
associated with the User profiles folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the
contents of the user profiles table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields
available in the different windows.
When the User profiles table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window
of any user type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow
at left.
To get an appropriate user distribution, you may assign weights per clutter classes, for each environment
class.
Particular case: When no multi-service geo-marketing data are available, you may supply ATOLL with usual
traffic data like user densities per service (for example, values coming from adapted GSM Erlang maps). In
this case, user profile definition and calculation of deduced activity probability are not necessary to create
traffic scenario ; traffic distribution will only depend on densities per service.
Therefore, the activity probabilities calculated during simulation will be equal to 1 and density values defined
in Environments will be user densities (no more subscriber densities). Elaborated traffic scenario will fully
respect the user profile proportion (i.e service) given in environments. You will fully master the number of
users in simulation as well as the service proportion which will drive random trials. Moreover, each user will
be connected.
This method is not the usual nominal working mode for ATOLL.
Note : to get an appropriate user distribution, you may assign weights to clutter classes, for each
environment class in the Clutter weighting tab.
The environment types table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering
tools, and copy/paste functions are available.
Notes :
The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the context menu
associated with the Environments folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the
contents of the environment types table. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields
available in the different windows.
When the Environments table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window
of any environment type by simply double clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the
associated arrow at left.
These statistics provide the number of mobiles to be created in the traffic scenario for the given environment
(based on a raster traffic map, respecting the layer order). This number is given displayed per clutter class.
Note : The statistic study is limited to the focus zone, only the clutter and environment areas inside the focus
zone are taken into account in calculations.
Enter a weight for each clutter class in order to get an appropriate user distribution
The following formula is used for calculations:
w k × Sk
Nk = Nclass ×
∑w j × Sj
j
where :
Nk Number of users in the k clutter
Nclass Number of users in an environment class
This weighting method is used when displaying statistics per CDMA/CDMA 2000 environment type.
Once created, these maps are stored in a general CDMA/CDMA 2000 traffic folder available in the Geo tab
Notes :
Like other raster maps, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map.
You can only choose among existing environment classes in the cartography editor. To make available
additional classes, do it in the CDMA/CDMA 2000 parameters.
To import a raster map as a CDMA/CDMA 2000 environment traffic map, proceed as follows :
Select the Import command in the File menu from the menu bar,
Specify the directory where the file to be imported is located, the file name and the file type in
the opened dialog box,
Press OK to validate,
Select the Traffic density option in the scrolling data type box
The map is located within the lastly created environment map folder.
Note : if you import a raster map to be an environment traffic map, do not forget to assign clutter classes to
existing environment classes.
Note :
In order to manage traffic on the entire map, this operation has to be carried out for all classes.
The description table can be fully copied and pasted (using Ctrl+V and Ctrl+C) in a new ATOLL project
after importing the raster file. To select globally the environment class table, just left click on the top left
angle of the environment table.
Advice: Use this function to keep consistency between the environment classes described in the table and in
the imported file.
Example: ATOLL automatically memorizes the different environment classes of imported file. Even after
deleting the file, the environment classes are stored in the description table. Pressing the button
will remove them.
resolution.
If several objects are extracted, the displayed resolution will be the smallest
resolution of the objects.
The resolution value must be an integer
The minimum resolution is set to 1 metre.
Click OK to validate.
Note :
When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in the
same folder. The .hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain
geocoding information and resolution.
Environment traffic file path (and related description) is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg
files.
Si
% of i = × 100
∑ Sk
k
Notes :
The statistic study is limited to the computation zone (or focus zone if existing), just the environment
areas inside the computation zone are taken into account,
Current statistical results are printable by clicking the button,
Data contained in the statistics window can be copied by selecting them (Ctrl+A) then copying them to
the clipboard (Ctrl+C).
The second way is useful when traffic files contain no attribute. Therefore, you may assign
manually user profiles, mobilities and densities created in ATOLL. Select in the Choice
column user profile and mobility listed in CDMA/CDMA 2000 Parameters folder and
specify manually a global density for all the polygons. Beforehand, just make sure to
define in CDMA/CDMA 2000 Parameters the internal data like user profile and mobility
you want to allocate. Here, all the polygons are described by global characteristics (user
profile, mobility or density).
In the Clutter weighting part, assign a weight to each clutter class. Thus, ATOLL allows you to
spread traffic inside the polygons according to the clutter weighting defined for the whole
subfolder. The spreading operation (using a raster step) will be carried out during the simulation
process.
Then, press OK to validate the properties setting.
Notes :
You may set the display parameters of the current map in the Display tab. Embedding data is available
from the General tab.
During the import procedure, if the imported user profiles or mobilities are not currently part of the
existing CDMA/CDMA 2000 user profiles or mobilities, ATOLL warns you about the fact that these
may not be correctly taken into account as traffic data.
Niceregion.mif
Highway.mif
Before creating a traffic map per transmitter and per service, the user must define a coverage study by
transmitter (with best server option and no margin) and calculate it. ATOLL expects rate values (kbits/s)
number of active users for each service and each transmitter. Thus, it is possible to define either one map
per service or one map with all services.
Then, ATOLL expects rate values (kbits/s) for each service and each transmitter. The traffic cartography is
built without connection with the initial coverage prediction, the map just consists of polygons (one polygon
per transmitter) characterised by UL and DL rates or number of users for each service. These polygons have
the same features as the vector traffic polygons.
% of T i = NTi
∑N
i
Ti
where,
Ti is one terminal (or mobility) type,
NT is a value user-defined for each terminal (or mobility) type,
i is the number of terminal (or mobility) types.
To create a traffic map per transmitter and per service, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the Traffic density folder to open the associated context menu,
Select the New map command from the scrolling menu,
Choose the map based on transmitter and service (Throughput or Number of users) option
in the Create a traffic map opened window,
Press the button to validate,
The coverage area traffic window opens,
Select the prediction study to be considered for traffic distribution. Only coverage per
transmitter studies can be used. A table where you can define specific rates per service and per
transmitter is available. It consists of a column dedicated to transmitters and several columns for
the different services previously defined in the CDMA/CDMA 2000 Parameters folder. In the
TX_ID column, select each line, click on the arrow and choose a transmitter in the list. You may
also use the copy and paste commands (respectively Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V) from an Excel file
already containing the expected columns,
Enter rate values (kbits/s) on uplink and on downlink relating to different services for each
transmitter,
Press OK to validate the map creation.
The created traffic maps per transmitter and per service are listed in the CDMA/CDMA 2000 Traffic folder.
The rate values or the number of users per sector and per service can be modified by accessing the
associated traffic map table (double click on the map or Open command in the context menu). These data
are directly considered to calculate the activity probability in the simulation process.
Note : In CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects, it is necessary to define one map per radio configuration. Thus, enter
a percentage value different from 0 for a given radio configuration (choose the same radio configuration, for
terminal and mobility), and 0 for the other ones.
To export a UMTS traffic map based on service and transmitter, proceed as follows :
Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the UMTS traffic folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the cell traffic map folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click on the Save as... option from the opened scrolling menu,
Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Only .agd
format (ATOLL internal format) can be taken to export such traffic maps,
Click the Save button to complete the export procedure.
ATOLL provides a random user distribution generation, based on a Monte-Carlo algorithm complying with
traffic description and cartography.
Once realistic user distributions are available, power control simulation is automatically achieved to
determine network parameters (such as cells and terminal - radio configuration - powers) and estimate
interference level.
ATOLL provides either actual network audit (taking into account your network constraints) or new
dimensioning information about how to handle available traffic. On the same traffic snapshot, you can check
how your network works and can be improved.
ATOLL offers a wide range of tuneable parameters involved in CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations. Even from
existing simulations, it is possible to modify these parameters with the replay simulations features offered by
ATOLL. You may also add simulations to a group of existing simulations. Averaging a group of simulations is
also possible. Once achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA/CDMA 2000 coverage
predictions.
Indeed, for CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects, ATOLL provides four different groups of studies, listed in a
natural planning order, from the indispensable pilot study to the study of downlink total noise, with
respect to the propagation model as defined :
Pilot-oriented studies to determine pilot coverage by transmitter, the pilot coverage by signal level,
overlapping area (like standard coverage studies), pilot quality (Ec/Io) and pilot pollution,
Service-oriented studies to determine service availability in uplink and downlink and effective
service areas,
handover status study to analyse macro-diversity performance,
Downlink total noise study.
A specific 1xEV-DO coverage is also available for CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects, but this is not relative to any
simulation.
With the point analysis tool, it is also possible to build a CDMA scenario defining a probe mobile with a type
of terminal, SCH multiple rate and service and predict, on each point of the current map, its results.
Except pilot coverage, coverage by signal level and overlapping studies, which are similar to classical
coverage studies, all other studies are specific to CDMA/CDMA 2000 network planning and closely related
to a particular simulation.
ATOLL provides powerful simulation outputs. Firstly, you can display requirements, results, initial conditions,
and data relative to clutter data dealing with shadowing margins and gains due to multipath on any of these.
Then, you may choose to display the simulation results either per site, per transmitter, or per mobile for the
currently studied simulation. The results can also be displayed on the map as function of any topics dealt
with the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations (service, terminal, user, mobility, activity, factors, connection and
HO status, best server, active set parameters, geographic coordinates, rates, carriers, powers, noise rise,
path loss).
ATOLL simulates this network regulation mechanism with an iterative algorithm and calculates, for each user
distribution, network parameters such as base station power, mobile terminal (RC) power, active set and
handover status for each terminal.
To create a (group of) CDMA/CDMA 2000 power control simulation(s), proceed as follows :
Notes :
If you check the execute later box, computations will be started when using the Calculate command
(F7 shortcut or button),
When starting computations, a group of simulations (with the input number of simulations) is
automatically created under the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulation folder.
Once achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA/CDMA 2000 coverage predictions or for an AS
analysis with the point analysis tool.
Note : to manage the display of simulation results, the ATOLL generic dialog window is used. So, it is
possible to display simulation results related to, for example, their connection status, handover status, any
CDMA/CDMA 2000 parameter, pilot quality, etc... Furthermore, all simulation folders are then organised in
threshold items that you can display or not in the workspace.
Notes :
If computations have not been started (using the execute later command), you can access to the group
properties in order to modify them for coming computations.
You can access to the Properties of any single simulation. The opened dialog is related to simulations
requirements and results, specific results per site, per mobile, per cell and simulation initial conditions.
Power control simulation needs propagation path loss for cells and mobiles. If these results are not available,
ATOLL achieves propagation calculation using the propagation model as defined from either the transmitter
or the prediction folders.
In ATOLL, the dialog allowing you to create simulations is made of three tabs : General, Traffic and
Advanced described below.
General tab
In this tab, you can enter a name to the group of simulations that ATOLL is going to compute. Then, you
may decide the number of scenarios on which you want to simulate power control. It is possible to create
several simulations at the same time or just one by one if you prefer. Selecting the Detailed results option
enables you to get additional simulation outputs relating to mobiles (results available in the Mobiles and
Mobiles (Shadowing values) tabs of the simulation Properties window). Finally, the Execute later option can
be used if you want to predefine simulation calculation settings and start the computation subsequently. In
case the option is selected, simulation calculation is not carried out when closing the dialog; simulation will
be worked out when clicking on the Calculate command (F7 shortcut or button),
Note : The Execute later feature enables you to automatically calculate CDMA/CDMA 2000 coverage
studies after simulations without intermediary step.
In the Cell load constraint part, you must select constraints you want ATOLL to respect during power control
simulation. If you wish to check your network, just select the constraints about maximum cell power,
maximum number of channel elements, maximum uplink cell load (the default value is set to 75%) and
Walsh codes availability. The simulation proceeds without exceeding these limits. Mobiles with the lowest
service priority (user-defined in each service properties dialog window) are first rejected. In order for the
simulation to proceed freely, uncheck all the calculation options.
Traffic tab
The global scaling factor for traffic option enables you to increase subscriber density without changing traffic
parameters or cartography. For example, setting the global scaling factor for traffic to 2 means doubling the
initial number of subscribers (for traffic raster or vector traffic maps) or the rates/users (for traffic maps per
transmitter and per service).
Then, you can perform simulations using several traffic cartographies. To do this, select them in the Traffic
part. In this case, ATOLL takes into account the traffic information provided in all the selected maps. This
feature must be carefully used to avoid inconsistencies. Thus, make sure you do not mix several kinds of
traffic maps (for example, raster traffic map and transmitter coverage area traffic map) in a simulation study;
rather, make several simulation studies, each one based on a same sort of traffic map. On the other hand,
you can fully carry out a simulation study using several traffic maps belonging to the same kind.
Advanced tab
Generator initialisation enables you to obtain the same random distribution in two simulations just by giving
the same non-zero integer in this field. For example, you create a simulation with generator initialisation
value of 1 (or whichever integer different from 0). When you create another simulation, giving 1 as generator
initialisation, you obtain the same random distribution. To avoid getting similar distributions, just enter zero
value in this field. A group of several distributions created at the same time may be repeated with the same
principle. This can be useful when one wants to compare two simulations with just one parameter value
difference; so to make a just comparison, it is better to have the same user locations (same path loss values
for users).
You can then specify the maximum number of iterations allowed during a simulation, UL and DL
convergence thresholds.
The power control simulation is based on an iterative algorithm. In the Convergence part, you can define how
many iterations you want the simulation to run (maximum number of iterations) and specify your own uplink
and downlink convergence criteria (percentage power difference for downlink and percentage noise
difference for uplink between two successive iterations).
When clicking OK, simulation starts running and stops when the convergence criteria are met in two
successive iterations (when there is no network parameter evolution). Therefore, the simulation can finish
before reaching the maximum number of defined iterations.
When calculation is finished, ATOLL has created the required number of simulations in the newly created
group of simulations.
ATOLL makes easy the consistency management between radio data, simulations and predictions.
Average simulations and replays are reachable from each of these subfolders. Display properties are
reachable form the Simulations folder.
To replay a group of CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations (one of several ones), proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulation group subfolder you want to replay the
simulations to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Replay...,
The replay simulation(s) dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Set the parameters on the convergence parameters and the constraints on the cell loads for the
current group of simulations to replay,
Validate by clicking on OK.
Once achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with
the point analysis tool.
Note : giving several times the same integer number (different from 0) as initialisation number in the
simulation creation dialog box leads to replay simulations with identical user random distribution.
Comment: as the generator initialisation function, this feature enables you to obtain the same user
distribution in two simulations. Nevertheless, the generator initialisation option is more powerful since it can
be used to create several simulations with the same distribution at the same time and several sets of
different simulations with the same set of distributions.
Replay: ATOLL reuses the same user distribution (user with a service, a mobility and an activity
status) and traffic parameters (such as maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt
targets...) as in the initial simulation. Just radio data (new transmitter, azimuth...) modifications are
taken into account during power control simulation.
Generator initialisation: If generator initialisation entered when creating both simulations is an integer
different from 0, ATOLL finds the same user distribution (user with a service, a mobility and an activity
status) in both simulations. On the other hand, in this case, both traffic parameter (such as maximum
and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt targets...) and radio data (new transmitter,
azimuth...) modifications are taken into account during power control simulation.
To display average results per cell over a group of CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulation group subfolder you want to average the
simulations to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Average simulations...,
The average simulation dialog window opens,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Click on the available tabs to display either the Statistics, Means or Standard deviation
window,
Click OK to close the window.
Average simulations may be used in specific CDMA coverage predictions or in an AS analysis with the point
analysis tool.
Note : The added simulation is then considered if you calculate an average simulation.
To get user distribution, you need to have traffic cartography at your disposal.
Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type (RC) and an activity status by random trial, according to a
probability law that complies with the traffic database.
User activity status is an important output of random distribution, which will have direct consequences on
simulation and network noise level.
A second random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone.
Power control simulation needs propagation path loss for transmitters and mobiles. If these results are not
available, ATOLL achieves propagation calculation using the propagation model as defined from either the
transmitter or the prediction folders.
Based on CDMA air interface, network automatically regulates itself by using traffic driven uplink and
downlink power control in order to minimize interference and maximize capacity. ATOLL simulates this
network regulation mechanism with an iterative algorithm and calculates, for each user distribution, network
parameters such as base station power, mobile terminal power, active set and handover status for each
terminal.
The power control simulation is based on an iterative algorithm. Each iteration, all the mobiles selected
st
during the user distribution generation (1 step) try to be connected one by one to network transmitters. The
process is repeated from iteration to iteration until convergence. The algorithm steps are detailed below.
Initialisation
Convergence study
In CDMA/CDMA 2000 , downlink power control simulation is independently carried out on fundamental
channel and on supplemental channel. Point analysis (Downlink availability) and prediction study (Service
area Downlink) are based on the same principle.
During power control simulation, the DL rate on SCH is downgraded until the DL quality level on SCH is
reached. SCH is not used when the downgraded rate is twice lower than the rate on FCH. Practically, the DL
rate on SCH is multiplied by a downgrading factor which is 2(-k) multiple. Therefore, the number of rejections
due to an insufficient reception on traffic channel (Ptch > PtchMax) should decrease.
Moreover, during power control simulation, the UL rate on SCH is downgraded until the required power on
UL is lower than the mobile maximum power. SCH is not used when the downgraded rate is lower than twice
the FCH rate. Practically, the UL rate on SCH is multiplied by a downgrading factor, which is a multiple of 2(-
k) (every downgrading step is halving). Therefore, the number of rejections due to an insufficient power to
transmit (Pmob > PmobMax) should decrease.
SCH downgrading is also modelled during power control simulation when there is not enough channel
elements on UL and DL to enable the link. Therefore, mobile will be rejected only if site lacks of channel
elements to support FCH. As in case of DL downgrading due to an insufficient reception on traffic channel,
the downgrading is driven by the best server of active set. Therefore, no downgrading occurs if there is not
enough channel elements on sites where other transmitters of active set are located; mobile is directly
rejected.
Notes : Power control on SCH will be carried out just for data service users.
During simulation, mobiles penalizing too much the others are ejected. Different causes of ejection can be
distinguished:
- On the downlink, not enough pilot signal quality: Ec/I0 pilot < Ec/I0 min pilot
- On the downlink, not enough reception on traffic channel: Ptch > Ptch max (FCH or SCH)
- On the uplink, not enough power to transmit: Pmob > Pmob max
When the network is saturated; mobile ejection may be due to different reasons described above:
multiple causes.
I (ic )k − I tot (ic )k −1
UL UL max N user
UL
( ic )k − N UL
user (ic )k −1
∆ UL = max int max tot × 100 , int Stations × 100
Stations
UL
I tot (ic )k
N
UL
user ( ic )
k
Where:
∆UL is the UL convergence threshold,
∆DL is the DL convergence threshold,
Ptx (ic ) is the cell total transmitted power on the carrier ic,
I tot (ic ) is the total interference received by cell on the carrier ic,
UL
N
UL
user (ic ) is the number of users connected on UL on the carrier ic,
N
DL
user (ic ) is the number of users connected on DL on the carrier ic,
1st case: Between two successive iterations, ∆UL and ∆DL are lower ( ≤ ) than their respective
thresholds (defined when creating a simulation).
Example: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL and DL convergence thresholds
are 5. If ∆UL ≤ 5 and ∆DL ≤ 5 between the 4th and the 5th iteration, ATOLL stops the algorithm after the 5th
iteration. Convergence is reached.
2nd case: After 30 iterations, ∆UL or/and ∆DL are still higher than their respective thresholds and from
the 30th iteration, ∆UL or/and ∆DL do not decrease during 15 successive iterations.
The simulation has not reached convergence (specific divergence symbol).
Examples: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL and DL convergence thresholds
are 5.
- 1. After the 30th iteration, ∆ UL or/and ∆ DL equal 100 and do not decrease during 15 successive iterations:
ATOLL stops the algorithm at the 46th iteration. Convergence is not reached.
- 2. After the 30th iteration, ∆ UL or/and ∆ DL equal 80, they start decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration
(without going under the thresholds) and then, do not change during 15 successive iterations: ATOLL stops
the algorithm at the 56th iteration without reaching convergence.
A bit more information concerning the admission control is provided. During admission control, ATOLL
calculates the uplink load factor of a considered cell assuming the handled mobile is connected to it. Here,
activity status assigned to users is not taken into account. So even if the mobile is not active on UL, it can be
rejected due to cell load saturation. To calculate the cell UL load factor, either ATOLL takes into account
mobile power determined during power control if mobile was connected in previous iteration, or it estimates a
load rise due to mobile and adds it to the current load. The load rise ( ∆X UL ) is calculated as follows:
1
∆X UL =
W
1 + UL
Qreq × RUL
b
Where
W is the chip rate (bit/s),
UL
Q req is the Eb/Nt target on uplink (defined in service properties for a given mobility),
UL
R b is the service uplink effective bit rate (bit/s).
Walsh codes form a binary tree; codes with a longer length are generated from codes with a shorter length.
Indeed, length-k Walsh codes are generated from length-k/2 Walsh codes. Therefore, if one channel needs 1
length-k/2 Walsh code; it is equivalent to use 2 length-k Walsh codes, or 4 length-2k Walsh codes,….
128 Walsh codes per transmitter and per carrier are available in CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects while 512
codes are available in UMTS projects.
During the resource control, ATOLL determines, for each transmitter and each carrier, the number of codes,
which will be consumed. Therefore, it allocates:
A code with the longest length per common channel, for each transmitter end each carrier,
A code per transmitter-receiver link, for FCH. The length of code to be allocated, Code-Length, is
determined as follows:
Code − Length × R DL
b
− FCH
=W
A code per transmitter-receiver link, for SCH, in case SCH is supported by the user radio configuration. The
length of code to be allocated, Code-Length, is determined as follows:
Code − Length × R DL
b
− SCH
=W
where,
DL − FCH
Rb is the service downlink bit rate on FCH,
DL − SCH
R b is the service downlink bit rate on SCH,
W is the spreading bandwidth.
The Walsh code allocation follows the “Buddy” algorithm, which guarantees that:
If a k-length Walsh code is used, all of its children with lengths 2k, 4k… cannot be used because they are no
longer orthogonal.
If a k-length Walsh code is used, all of its ancestors with lengths k/2, k/4… cannot be used because they are
no longer orthogonal.
Notes :
1. The Walsh code allocation follows the mobile connection order (mobile order in the Mobiles tab).
2. The Walsh code and channel element management is differently dealt with in case of “softer” handover.
ATOLL allocates Walsh codes for each transmitter-receiver link while it globally assigns channel elements to
a site.
Example: In CDMA/CDMA 2000 , let a voice user with a RC1 be in softer handover. Therefore, ATOLL will
allocate two Walsh codes (one for each transmitter-receiver link) and only one channel element to the site.
Therefore, a mobile will be rejected for code saturation cause only if there is no Walsh code to support FCH
rate. The unavailability of Walsh code to support SCH rate leads to a DL SCH rate downgrading.
Note : When the Number of codes option is not selected, ATOLL just checks the Walsh code availability. No
DL SCH rate downgrading is performed in case of Walsh code unavailability.
From a user-defined model standard deviation associated to the receiver position, a random shadowing error
is computed and added to the model path loss ( L path ). This random vale is drawn during Monte-Carlo
simulation; each user is assigned a service, a mobility type (RC), an activity status, a geographic position
and a random shadowing value.
ξ is a zero mean gaussian random variable G (0,σ dB ) representing variation due to shadowing. It can be
expressed as the sum of two uncorrelated zero mean gaussian random variables, ξ L and ξ P . ξ L models
error related to the receiver local environment; it is the same whichever the link. ξ P models error related to
the path between transmitter and receiver.
Knowing ξ i , the model standard deviation (σ ) and the correlation coefficient (ρ) between ξ 1 and ξ 2 , we can
calculate standard deviations of ξ L (σ L ) and ξ Pi (σ P ) (assuming all ξ Pi have the same standard deviations).
We have:
σ 2 = σ L2 + σ P2
σ L2
ρ=
σ2
Therefore,
σ P2 = σ 2 × (1 − ρ )
σ L2 = σ 2 × ρ
There is currently no agreed model for predicting correlation coefficient (ρ) between ξ 1 and ξ 2 . Two key
variables influence correlation:
The angle between the two paths. If this angle is small, correlation is high.
The relative values of the two path lengths. If angle is 0 and path lengths are the same, correlation
φT is a function of the mean size of obstacles near the receiver and γ is also linked to the receiver
environment.
In a normal handover status, assuming a hexagonal design for sites, φ is close to π (+/- π/3) and D1/D2 is
close to 1.
π
We found in documentations that ρ = 0.5 when γ = 0.3 and φT = .
10
σ
σL =
2
and
σ
σP =
2
Therefore, to model shadowing error common with all signals arriving at mobile ( E Re Shadowing ), values are
ceiver
randomly drawn for each mobile; they follow a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a standard deviation
σ where (σ ) is the standard deviation associated to the mobile clutter class. Then, for each mobile-
2
transmitter pair, ATOLL draws another value representing the shadowing part uncorrelated with the position
Shadowing ); this value follows a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a standard deviation
of the mobile ( E Path
σ .
2
So, we have:
E Shadowing = E Re
Shadowing + E Shadowing
ceiver Path
Random shadowing error means are centred on zero. Hence, this shadowing modelling method has no
impact on the simulated network load. On the other hand, as shadowing errors on the receiver-transmitter
links are uncorrelated, the method will influence the evaluated SHO gain in case mobile is in SHO.
Random shadowing values used for each mobile and mobile-transmitter pair are detailed in simulation
results.
If a focus zone has been defined in your project, only sites, transmitters and mobiles located inside the focus
zone are considered when accessing simulation results. The global output statistics are based on these
mobiles.
Traffic request:
ATOLL calculates the total number of users who try to be connected. It is a result of the first random
trial, the power control has not yet been achieved. This result depends on the traffic description and
cartography.
During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service. Therefore, UL and DL rates that all the
users could theoretically generate are provided.
Breakdown (number of users, UL and DL rates) per service is given.
Results:
The number and the percentage of rejected users are calculated and detailed per rejection cause.
These results are determined after the power control and depend on network design.
ATOLL supplies the total number and the percentage of connected users, UL and DL total rates that
they generate. These data are also detailed per service.
Note : The traffic rates are calculated at the user level without taking into account handover. Once achieved,
simulations are available for specific CDMA/CDMA 2000 coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the
point analysis tool.
Then, if available, are displayed the values of orthogonality factor and standard deviation as defined per
clutter type.
Note : When the simulation does not converge (UL and DL convergence criteria not reached at the end of
the simulation), ATOLL displays a special warning icon in front of Simulation object.
In this window, ATOLL displays the maximum number of channel elements previously defined for each site,
the number of required channel elements in uplink and downlink at the end of simulation, the number of extra
channel elements due to soft handover, the properties related to each site equipment (MUD factor, Rake
receiver efficiency factor, carrier selection mode, AS restricted to neighbours option and overhead channel
elements on uplink and downlink), the uplink and downlink throughputs (kbits/s) per service supported by
site. The UL and DL throughputs are the number of kbits per second supported by the site on uplink and
downlink to supply (mobiles connected with the transmitters located on the site) one kind of services. The
throughput calculation takes into account the handover connections.
If the maximum channel element number is exceeded, sites are displayed with red colour.
Note : The allows the user to choose the data to be displayed in the current table. Once
achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the
point analysis tool.
In this window, ATOLL provides the simulation input data like the maximum power, the pilot power, the
synchro power, the paging power, the AS threshold (which is a cell parameter since version 2.1), the gain,
the reception and transmission losses, the noise figure, and simulation output data regarding cells such as
the total DL power used (on the fundamental and on the supplemental channel), the UL total noise, the UL
and DL load factors, the UL and DL noise rises, the percentage of used power, the UL reuse factor, the
number of UL and DL links, the number of used Walsh codes, the percentage of handover types (on FCH
and SCH), the UL and DL throughputs (on FCH and SCH), the minimum, maximum and average traffic
channel powers, the number of users rejected for each cause for each cell.
Note : The allows the user to choose the data to be displayed in the current table. The
"Commit loads" button permits to copy UL loads and total powers DL (or their average in the case of several
carriers) in the cell table in order to be taken potentially as reference for specific CDMA predictions (by
selecting the None option from the simulation scrolling box).
Average simulations are ordered by cells. Once achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA
coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the point analysis tool.
To assign any simulated UL load factor and total DL power to cells from a network, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to use the
simulated results by left clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulation you want to use the simulated results
to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulation you want to use the simulated
results,
Click on the Cells tab from the opened window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
When assigned to cells, these values can be used for coverages based on no simulation.
Note : this feature is also available from the mean tab window of any average simulation.
Reminder : the Commit load button is inactive as long as both fields, UL load and total power, do not exist.
In this window, ATOLL gives information about calculated terminal parameters. First, ATOLL mentions
simulation input data: X, Y, service, terminal, user profile, user mobility and activity obtained from random
trial. ATOLL displays simulation output data for these users: carrier, DL and UL requested and obtained
rates, mobile power (on the fundamental channel and on the supplemental channel), best server, connection
status, handover status, transmitters in active set and Ec/Io from cells in active set.
ATOLL displays which carrier is used for connection and calculates the power transmitted by the terminal
(on FCH and SCH) . ATOLL identifies the best server among the cells taking part in mobile active set.
Connection status refers to mobile ejection causes previously defined. It gives the reasons why the mobile,
even active, is not connected to any transmitter at the end of the simulation.
ATOLL allows to analyse what type of handover is possible for a mobile; providing the HO status
information. HO status represents the real number of sites compared to the number of cells in active set.
For example, when a mobile is in connection with three cells and among them two co-site cells (soft - softer
handover), its HO status is 2/3. When the mobile is connected with only one transmitter (no handover) its HO
status is 1/1. When the mobile is connected with three co-site transmitters (softer - softer handover), its HO
status is 1/3.
Active set is the list of transmitters (or cells since on unique carrier) in connection with the mobile. The
maximum number of transmitters in active set is defined by the user in Terminal Properties and besides
limited to 4 in ATOLL. Soft handover can be enabled/disabled for every service. For each transmitter in
active set, Ec/Io values are calculated and may be compared to Ec/Io thresholds and T-Drop previously
defined in Mobility Type Properties. Transmitters, which provide an Ec/Io pilot quality that is lower than [ Best
server Ec/Io - AS-threshold ], are rejected from the active set.
Note : The allows the user to choose the data to be displayed in the current table. Once
achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the
point analysis tool.
Ticking the Detailed results box during the simulation creation enables you to get additional simulation
outputs relating to mobiles and shadowing values computed along paths between transmitters and mobiles.
To display shadowing values for each mobile in any simulation, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the simulation group subfolder containing the simulation you want to display by left
clicking on the button,
Either
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulation you want to display the clutter data to
open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties,
Or,
Double click on the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulation you want to display the clutter data,
Click on the Mobile (Shadowing values) tab from the opened window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Click OK to close the window.
Notes
Re ceiver
The values EShadowing computed for all the mobiles follow a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a
σ
2
standard deviation .
Path
The values EShadowing computed for a given mobile follow a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a
σ
2
standard deviation .
To make available the display dialog window on all the simulations of the current project, proceed as
follows :
Click the Data tab from the Explorer window,
Expand the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations folder by left clicking on the button,
Either,
Right click on the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations folder to open the associated context
menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Properties...,
Or,
Double click on the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulations folder,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Set the display parameters for all the simulations of the current project,
Click OK to close the window.
Like for most of the other display dialog windows in ATOLL, you can choose the display type associated with
the values (unique, discrete, values interval) and some corresponding fields. Due to the complexity of
CDMA/CDMA 2000 technology simulations, these fields are numerous and can be obtained as indicated in
the following table.
Value intervals X
Y
DL requested rate (kbits/s)
UL requested rate (kbits/s)
DL obtained rate (kbits/s)
UL obtained rate (kbits/s)
Mobile FCH power
Mobile SCH power
Ec/Io Asi
Cell power FCH Asi (DL)
Cell power SCH Asi (DL)
Ntot DL ASi
Load factor Asi
Noise rise Asi
Reuse factor Asi
Iintra Asi
Iextra Asi
Total path loss Asi
Nb UL CEs
Nb DL CEs
Name
Orthogonality factor
Macro-diversity gain UL
Macro-diversity gain DL
Note : Existing simulations, in the explorer window contain subitems which depend on results are displayed
on the map. The simulation display is managed with the standard display dialog in use under ATOLL. Once
achieved, simulations are available for specific CDMA coverage predictions or for an AS analysis with the
point analysis tool.
Reminder: the maximum power is an input data user-definable for each cell in the Properties window. On the
other hand, the power is a simulation output data calculated for each transmitter, carrier by carrier.
ATOLL estimates the percentages of handover status which the transmitter takes part in. HO status
represents the number of sites compared to the number of transmitters in active set size. Active set is the list
of transmitters in connection with mobiles. The maximum number of transmitters in the active set is defined
by the user in Terminal Properties and limited to 6 for CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects. For example, when a
mobile is in connection with three transmitters and among them two co-site transmitters (soft - softer
handover), its HO status is 2/3. When the mobile is connected with only one transmitter (no handover), its
HO status is 1/1. When the mobile is connected with three co-site transmitters (softer-softer handover), its
HO status is 1/3.
Note : ATOLL details only the results for the following handover status, no handover (1/1), softer (1/2), soft
(2/2), softer-soft (2/3) and soft-soft (3/3) handovers; the other handover status (other HO) are globally
analysed.
The number of radio links corresponds to the number of users-transmitters links on the same carrier.
This data is calculated on uplink and on downlink. A single user can use several radio links (handover).
The number of channel elements required by FCH and SCH to provide connected mobiles with the
service is estimated on UL and DL. These data are given without taking into account handover status.
Therefore, the sum of channel elements requested by transmitters on the same site may exceed the
number of channel element required by the site (result provided in the Sites tab).
The uplink and downlink throughputs represent respectively the numbers of Kbits per second delivered
by the transmitter on FCH and on SCH. These data are calculated on uplink and on downlink.
Minimum traffic channel power is the lowest one of the powers allocated to traffic channels for
supplying services to mobiles connected to the transmitter.
Maximum traffic channel power is the greatest of the powers allocated to traffic channels for supplying
services to mobiles connected to the transmitter.
Average traffic channel power is the average of the powers allocated to traffic channels for supplying
services to mobiles connected to the transmitter.
If the detailed results box has been checked for the current simulation, results are also given, for each
(mobile - transmitters in active set) link, on the UL and DL downgrading factors applied on the SCH, the
downlink total noise, Cell powers transmitted on the FCH and the SCH, the downlink load factor, the
downlink noise rise, the downlink reuse factor, the total noise received at the terminal from the
transmitter area (Iintra (DL) and the total noise received at the terminal from other transmitter areas
(Iextra (DL), and the total loss on the link(s). Moreover, ATOLL provides the name of the clutter class
where the probe receiver is located, the orthogonality factor, the UL and DL macro diversity gains (on
FCH and SCH) associated with the clutter class.
X and Y are the coordinates of users who try to be connected (geographic position determined by the
nd
2 random trial). The power control is based on this order.
Note : Ejected users at the end of the power control are included in this list.
st
Service, user mobility and status activity are the 1 random trial results (user distribution generation).
Terminal and user profile are based on traffic description. According to the service and activity status
assigned to a user, ATOLL determines his terminal and the corresponding user profile.
The carrier used for the mobile-transmitter connection.
DL and UL requested rates: they respectively correspond to the DL and UL effective bit rates of
service.
DL and UL obtained rates: after power control simulation, the obtained rate equals the requested rate if
the mobile is connected. Else, the obtained rate is zero.
The total power transmitted by the terminal.
The best server among the transmitters entering mobile active set.
The Connection status refers to mobile ejection causes previously defined. It gives the reasons why
the mobile, even active, is not connected to any transmitter at the end of the simulation.
The HO status HO status represents the real number of sites used compared to the number of fingers.
For example, if the terminal active set size is 6 and if its number of fingers is 3, the mobile will be able to be
connected with none, one, two or three transmitters. ATOLL will consider in simulations and in predictions
(HO status study) the following handover status, no handover (1/1), softer (1/2), soft (2/2), softer-soft (2/3),
soft-soft (3/3), or softer-softer (1/3) handovers.
The list of transmitters in connection with the mobile (Active set). The maximum number of transmitters
in active set is defined by the user in Terminal Properties and limited to 6 in ATOLL. Soft handover
can be enabled/disabled for every service.
Ec/Io values are calculated for each transmitter in active set and may be compared to Ec/Io thresholds
and T-Drop previously defined in Mobility Type Properties.
Note : Transmitters, which the Ec/Io value is AS-threshold value lower than the best one (Active Set 1), are
rejected from the active set.
The Downgrading factor for SCH: ½ means the rate on the SCH was halved to remain within the
maximum SCH power, and the maximum cell power. It results in better signal quality because reducing
the SCH rate increases the processing gain, thus reduces the required C/I ratio for successful
decoding.
The cell power transmitted on traffic channel. This parameter is determined for each (mobile –
tch − BS
The DL macro diversity gain is evaluated in case mobile receivers are connected either on DL or on
UL and DL.
DL − Macrodiver sity − Gain = ( ) ( )
Eb
Nt
DL
−
Eb
Nt
DL
tch − BS
Coverage studies where each map bin is considered as a probe user with associated terminal,
mobility and service. These are ordered in four different groups of studies, listed in a natural
planning order, from the indispensable pilot study to the study of downlink total noise, with respect
to the propagation model as defined :
− Pilot-oriented studies to determine pilot coverage by transmitter, the pilot coverage by signal
level, overlapping area, pilot quality (Ec/Io) and pilot pollution,
− Service-oriented studies to determine service availability in uplink and downlink and effective
service areas,
Except pilot coverage, coverage by signal level and overlapping studies, which are similar to
classical coverage studies, all other studies are specific to CDMA/CDMA 2000 network planning and
closely related to a particular CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulation.
Power control is achieved once only during simulation but never during prediction studies. Simulation
outputs such as uplink and downlink noise levels generated by the users may be used to evaluate the
radio reception. Therefore, prediction studies may be based on:
UL load and DL total power modelled during power control simulation for point analysis,
UL load and DL total power modelled during power control simulation for coverage studies,
User-definable UL load and DL total power for coverage studies :
Specific predictions can be based on either user defined load estimations (when filling manually the
UL_load and Total power cells from the cell table) or by using the "Commit loads" button (assigning to
these columns the calculated uplink loads and total powers from the current simulation) in the Cells tab
window of a simulation result window. To use these reported values, just select the None option from
the Simulation scrolling box.
Specific CDMA coverage studies may be performed with four different purposes:
Analyse in detail one particular simulation,
Globally analyse all simulations and evaluate network stability with regard to traffic fluctuations,
Analyse an average simulation.,
Analyse user-definable parameters such as UL load and DL total power without simulation.
For these coverage studies, since study GUI is generic, the general rule is to choose :
either a single simulation, or a group of simulations and a user-definable probability, or a group of
simulations and average option, or, finally, no simulation,
a Radio configuration, a SCH rate (or All), a service (or All),
a specific carrier or all the carriers.
and to display the results as function of the attribute you want.
In this studies, each bin may be seen as a probe mobile, which does not create any interference
Caution : If you modify radio parameters, before recalculating predictions, do not forget to replay CDMA
simulations first in order to base predictions on up-to-date simulations. Ensure consistency between
predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before further analysis. To help on that, ATOLL
provides a feature to automatically calculate CDMA predictions after simulations without any intermediary
step.
Important : Any of these specific CDMA studies requires propagation path loss on each bin.
Choose the carrier selection mode you want to consider in the Carrier scrolling menu,
Click OK or Apply to validate.
Note : when choosing a carrier, only cells using this carrier are taken into account in calculations. ATOLL
will display a coverage by carrier. To get a coverage based on all the carriers, select the All option. In this
case, ATOLL displays a multi-carrier coverage. It selects on each bin the best carrier according to the
selection mode specified in the properties of the transmitters from the current network.
You can enter a reliability level (x%) when defining prediction properties (point analysis: Profile, Reception
and AS analysis tab and coverage studies). Therefore, the evaluated pilot quality, uplink and downlink traffic
channel qualities are reliable x% of time.
Formulas used to compute shadowing margin in case of no handover and SHO (2 and 3 links) and SHO
gains are detailed in the Technical reference guide.
ATOLL performs the simulations and lists them in the CDMA/CDMA 2000 simulation folder. Then, ATOLL
carries out the prediction calculations based on the created simulations.
You can analyse different mobility and several services in a same study. For any CDMA/CDMA 2000 study,
in the Simulation tab, you can choose All in the Service or/and SCH scrolling menus. In this case, ATOLL
works out the coverage criterion for each service or/and SCH rates; a bin of the map will be covered if the
studied coverage criterion is met for any service or/and SCH rate. In addition, receiver definition and
coverage display are not linked. Parameters set in the Simulation tab are used in order to predetermine the
coverage area (area where ATOLL will display coverage) while graphical settings (available in the Display
tab) enable you to choose how to represent the coverage area. For example, it is possible to perform multi-
service or/and multi-SCH rate pilot reception analysis and to choose a coverage display per transmitter or
depending on any transmitter attribute.
The available display types (depending on the study to be carried out) are listed below :
Single colour : Coverage is mono colour; it displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied,
Colour per transmitter : Coverage displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied. Moreover, the
bin colour corresponds to the colour of the first transmitter in active set (best server)
Colour per service : The receiver is not totally defined. Its service can take all existing service types.
There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined services. For each service, coverage
layer displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied
Colour per mobility : The receiver is not totally defined. Its mobility can take all existing mobility
types. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined mobilities. For each mobility,
coverage layer displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied
Colour per probability : Coverage displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied with different
levels of probability. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined probability
thresholds (by default 0.5 and 0.9)
Colour per quality margin : Each coverage layer displays area where the quality margin is greater
than the user-defined threshold value. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined
quality margins. The quality margin is the difference between the quality level and the target quality
level. There is intersection between layers
Colour per quality level : Each coverage layer displays area where signal quality exceeds the user-
defined quality level. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined quality margins.
There is intersection between layers
Colour per handover status : Coverage displays areas where radio conditions are satisfied for at
least one transmitter pilot quality. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined
handover status. Each layer represents a handover status. There is no intersection between layers
Colour per potential active transmitter number : Each coverage layer displays area where the
number of potential active transmitters is greater than the user-defined threshold value. There are as
many graphical coverage layers as user-defined potential active transmitters. The potential active
transmitter number corresponds to transmitters checking all conditions to enter the active set. There is
intersection between layers
Colour per required power level : Each coverage layer displays area where the required terminal
power (in order for transmitter to get a service) is greater than the user-defined required power
thresholds. There are as many graphical coverage layers as user-defined required power level. There
is intersection between layers.
Colour per required power margin : Each coverage layer displays area where the required power
margin exceeds the user-defined threshold value. There are as many graphical coverage layers as
user-defined power margin. The required power margin corresponds to the difference between the
required terminal power and the maximum terminal power. There is intersection between layers
Colour per minimum noise level: The displayed noise level is the lowest of the values calculated on
all carriers.
Colour per average noise level: The displayed noise level is the average of calculated values on all
carriers.
Colour per maximum noise level: The displayed noise level is the greatest of the values calculated
on all carriers.
Colour per minimum noise rise : The displayed noise rise is the lowest of the values calculated from
the downlink total noise, on all carriers.
Colour per average noise rise : The displayed noise rise is the average of the values calculated from
the downlink total noise, on all carriers.
Colour per maximum noise rise : The displayed noise rise is the greatest of the values calculated
from the downlink total noise, on all carriers.
Colour per polluter number : The coverage displays areas where user is interfered by pilot signal
from polluter transmitters. A polluter transmitter is a transmitter that meets all the criteria to enter the
active set but which is not admitted due to the active set limit size..
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Pilot reception analysis (Ec/Io)
option from the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General,
Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice “none” refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For
example, take care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or
16 in the scrolling list).
When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers
default values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must
have been replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation.
Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply
because simulated network may be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before
further analysis.
Comment : Actually, for a circuit switched service, when there are several transmitters in active set, Eb/Nt
from different transmitters are combined in terminal and improve reception with a macro-diversity gain.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Service area (Eb/Nt) downlink
option from the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General,
Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice “none” refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For
example, take care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or
16 in the scrolling list).
When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers
default values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must
have been replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation.
Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply
because simulated network may be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before
further analysis.
Comment : The macro diversity concept is also dealt with on the uplink. Its value depends on the handover
status.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Service area (Eb/Nt) downlink
option from the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General,
Simulation, Display. An additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice “none” refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For
example, take care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or
16 in the scrolling list).
When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers
default values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must
have been replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation.
Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply
because simulated network may be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before
further analysis.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Effective service area option from
the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display.
An additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get
description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice “none” refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For
example, take care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or
16 in the scrolling list).
When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers
default values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must
have been replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation.
Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply
because simulated network may be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before
further analysis.
the selected service is available and where probe mobile has in its active set:
Only one transmitter : no handover (1/1)
Two non co-site transmitters : soft handover (2/2)
Two co-site transmitters : softer handover (1/2)
Three non co-site transmitters : soft-soft handover (3/3)
Three transmitters among them two co-site : softer-soft handover (merged with soft-softer handover)
(2/3)
Three co-site transmitters : softer-softer handover (1/3)
Comment : In parenthesis is given equivalence between usual handover name and HO status notation
sometimes used in ATOLL, referring to number of sites/number of transmitters in the active set (See
CDMA/CDMA 2000 Simulations : Overview).
Caution : Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network.
In this study, handover is allowed on areas where the service chosen by the user is available.
For each study, a simulation tab enables to connect to one or all simulations. Furthermore, you can choose
different ways of displaying the same coverage to get a better analysis and dimensioning information on the
network.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the handover status option from the
study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An
additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get
description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice “none” refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For
example, take care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or
16 in the scrolling list).
When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers
default values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must
have been replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation.
Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply
because simulated network may be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before
further analysis.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Downlink total noise option from
the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display.
An additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get
description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice “none” refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For
example, take care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or
16 in the scrolling list).
When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL load percentage and
DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled, ATOLL considers
default values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
Note : In case of given service and carrier, the calculated and displayed coverage is the same for any
selected display per noise level (average, minimum or maximum) or any display per noise rise (average,
minimum or maximum).
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Caution :
It is not recommended to modify radio parameters and recalculate only predictions. Simulation(s) must
have been replayed first.
Like point prediction, coverage prediction does not take into account possible network saturation.
Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the prediction service area is connected, simply
because simulated network may be saturated.
Ensure consistency between predictions, point analysis and simulation displayed on map before
further analysis.
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Pilot pollution option from the
study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Simulation, Display. An
additional Statistics tab is created after computation. For all of these, use the What's this help to get
description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In the Simulation tab window, you may decide which simulation to study or choose a group of
simulations and prefer either an average analysis of all the simulations included in the group or a
statistical analysis of all simulations based on a user-definable probability (probability must be a value
between 0 and 1).
Finally, you can perform prediction studies without simulation. In this case, ATOLL takes into account UL
load and DL total power defined in the Cells properties.
Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice “none” refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For
example, take care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or
16 in the scrolling list).When calculating a study based on no simulation, ATOLL takes into account UL
load percentage and DL total transmitted power defined for each cell. In case these fields are not filled,
ATOLL considers default values, 50% for UL load percentage and 40 dBm for DL total transmitted
power.
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
Representation on map may are given regarding to the number of polluters. Each layer may be displayed
independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Comment : for each study, there are as many layers as user-defined thresholds (quality level, quality
margin…). Each layer may be displayed independently by selecting visibility flag in folder.
Once computations have been achieved, the Statistics tab is available and contains the detailed results of
displayed layers. For each threshold value (corresponding to a specific layer), the surface ((Si)covered
2
stated in km ) where the prediction criterion is met and its percentage (% of i) are specified. These data
are calculated in relation to the whole computation zone and each environment class, when environments
are used to describe the traffic cartography.
% of i = (Si)covered*100 / (Si)total
Concerning pilot quality given by (Ec/Io) (which is the main parameter to enter an active set) and connection
status, with the point analysis tool, ATOLL is able to get information about the active set analysis of a CDMA
scenario (for given mobile, mobility and service) at the receiver location on the map by using the propagation
model as defined before (with priority order respect).
Move over the current map to the places where you want to make your analysis.
Note : The Point analysis window is automatically displayed when clicking on the button from the
toolbar,
Pilot quality and connection status (Pilot, Uplink, Downlink) are displayed for previous conditions and without
taking into account possible network saturation. Thus, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile in the
receiver conditions can check the point analysis diagnosis, simply because simulated network may be
saturated.
Choose from the scrolling Vertical bar representing the lower boundary
Choose from the scrolling list lists the parameters of a to enter the active set (defined as the signal
the single simulation you probe user to be studied value of the best server at the current point
want this point analysis to among the selected minus the AS_Threshold - defined in the Global
be based on simulation properties from the transmitters folder)
Displays the pilot reception of Displays the pilot reception in term of Vertical bar representing Displays the connection
transmitters out of the active set for active set components for this the Ec/Io threshold to status (pilot, uplink and
this scenario. Filled bars indicate the scenario. Active set is represented in enter the active set downlink traffic) for the
transmitters which respect the grey. Filled bars indicate the (defined in the mobility current scenario.
active set constraints. Even if more transmitters which respect the type properties page)
: successful connection,
transmitters respect the constraints, active set constraints. Even if more
the active set size is limited to the transmitters respect the constraints, : failed connection
number defined in the terminal the active set size is limited to the
properties and is function of the number defined in the terminal
current service. Transmitters with properties and is function of the
empty bars do not respect the active current service
set constraints
Bar graph shows pilot reception from all transmitters on the same carrier (with the same colours as the one
defined for each transmitter), displaying limit values required to be in active set (Ec/Io threshold, (Ec/Io)best
server-A-S threshold, T-drop). Grey background displays transmitters in active set. A third vertical bar
indicating T-Drop defined in the mobility properties boxes may be displayed on the AS analysis window.
Reminder: The transmitters taking part in the active set have to check the following conditions:
They must be using the same carrier.
The pilot quality (Ec/Io) from the best server has to exceed the Ec/Io threshold (defined for each
mobility type).
The pilot quality from other transmitters has to be greater than the T-Drop value (defined for each
mobility type).
The pilot quality difference between other transmitters and the best server must not exceed the
AS-threshold value set in the Global Parameters tab.
Other transmitters have to belong to the neighbour list of the best server if you have selected the
restricted to neighbours option (in Global parameters tab).
You may modify receiver characteristics, ATOLL will automatically check pilot quality and channel
availability:
If you Radio configuration, it will modify maximum available transmitting power in uplink and the active
set size.
If you SCH rate multiple, it will modify pilot quality thresholds and Eb/Nt target per service in downlink.
If you change service, it will modify the active set size and Eb/Nt target in downlink.
Notes :
In the SCH scrolling list, the choice “none” refers to a null SCH rate.
You must keep consistency between the chosen radio configuration and the selected SCH rate. For
example, take care not to associate a RC1 or RC2 terminal with a SCH rate different from 0 (2, 4, 8 or
16 in the scrolling list).
[RatesEbNt]
Values="Rate1 value EbNt1 value Rate2 value EbNt2 value….”
[RatesEbNt]
Values="38.4 4.5 76.8 4.5 102.6 4.3 153.6 4.5 204.8 4.1 307.2 4 614 4 921.6 4.7 1228.8 5 1843 7.4 2457
8.5"
Rate Eb/Nt
38.4 4.5
76.8 4.5
102.6 4.3
153.6 4.5
204.8 4.1
307.2 4
614 4
921.6 4.7
1228 8.5
1843 7.4
2457 8.5
Note : This file is read only when ATOLL is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the ATOLL session
and to restart it in order to take into account any modification performed in ATOLL.ini.
From rate and Eb/Nt, it is easy to calculate the corresponding C/I using the following relation:
Eb C W
= ×
Nt I R (in W)
Hence, we get:
To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the 1xEV-DO coverage option from
the study types window. The opened window is made of three tab windows : General, Receiver, and Display.
For all of these, use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows.
The General tab works exactly like in common studies (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and
overlapping), i.e. you may rename the study, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria
In this study, each bin of the map corresponds to a probe user with associated terminal and service. Hence,
in the receiver tab, you have to define choose a reliability level (in %), a Radio configuration, a service (or all)
and a carrier (or all).
The Display tab is the ATOLL generic display dialog allowing you to display your resulting coverage as
function of any compatible attribute.
On each bin, ATOLL calculates the C/I level. If you have selected a colour per C/I threshold, it just compares
the calculated value to the defined thresholds. In case of a colour per maximum data rate, ATOLL uses the
look-up table to determine the supported maximum data rate. It considers the C/I interval around the
calculated C/I and takes the rate associated to the lower C/I limit. Finally, when choosing a display per Ec/Io,
it works out Ec/Io value on each bin and compares it to the defined thresholds. Different display types are
detailed hereafter.
On each bin inside the computation zone, ATOLL calculates the C/I level.
Txi
C PM
=
I ∑ P + N term
0
Txj
M
Txj , j ≠ i
where
Tx
P max
PM =
Tx
Tx Tx
P M is the maximum signal level received from Tx ( LT ),
Tx
P max is the transmitter maximum power,
Tx
L is the transmitter-terminal total loss.
T
A bin of the map is coloured if the C/I level exceeds (=) entered thresholds (the bin colour depends on the C/I
level). Coverage consists of several independent layers which you may manage visibility in the workspace.
There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the C/I level
exceeds a defined minimum threshold.
On each bin inside the computation zone, ATOLL calculates the Ec/Io level.
Txi
Ec C PM
= =
Io C +I ∑ P + N term
Txj ,i ∈ j
0
Txj
M
A bin of the map is coloured if the Ec/Io level exceeds (=) entered thresholds (the bin colour depends on the
Ec/Io level). Coverage consists of several independent layers which you may manage visibility in the
workspace. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the
Ec/Io level exceeds a defined minimum threshold.
On each bin inside the computation zone, ATOLL calculates the C/I level. To determine the supported
maximum data rate, ATOLL uses the look-up table defined in the ATOLL.ini file if it exists or the default
table. It considers the C/I interval around the calculated C/I and takes the rate associated to the lower C/I
limit.
A bin of the map is coloured if the rate equals or exceeds entered thresholds (the bin colour depends on the
rate). Coverage consists of several independent layers which you may manage visibility in the workspace.
There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where a maximum rate
(threshold value) is supported.
Other displays
On each bin inside the computation zone, ATOLL calculates the C/I level and determines the corresponding
data rate as explained above.
A bin of the map is coloured if the calculated rate equals or exceeds the lowest rate defined in the ATOLL.ini
file or the default look-up table (38.4 kbps). Coverage consists of several independent layers which you may
manage visibility in the workspace.
Like in GSM/TDMA or UMTS, it is possible to easily allocate neighbours within ATOLL. This can be made
either manually, or automatically, imposing several constraints on the potential cells that could be part of a
neighbourhood. Then, once allocated, neighbours can be easily managed (modification or deletion). Finally,
ATOLL makes easy the visualisation of neighbourhoods on the active map.
Note : Neighbours have impact on interference calculation : all cells in a network interfer with the others.
Neighbours of any linked project in co-planning can also be displayed and chosen manually.
Manual allocation of CDMA/CDMA 2000 neighbours must be performed for each cell, one at a time. To do
this, proceed as follows :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the transmitters folder to get the related context menu,
Either,
Choose the [Cells:Open] command from the opened menu
Once the cells table is opened,
Either
Right click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Choose the record properties option from the context menu (or from the Records
menu from the menu bar),
Or
Double click on the cell from which you want to define the neighbourhood,
Click the Neighbours tab from the current window,
Use the What's this help to get information about fields available in the current window,
In the displayed window, in the top table, click on cell to choose from the scrolling box the
desired cell as a neighbour for the current one. In the scrolling box are displayed all the
transmitters located within a radius of 30 km around the reference transmitter (cell),
Click either another table cell, or the button to validate and add a new line to
the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
Or
Choose the [Cells:Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the opened menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the opened window,
In the displayed table, click on a table cell to determine either base cells or associated
neighbours in the network,
Click another table cell to validate and add a new line to the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
Notes :
You can also use manual allocation tools to check currently allocated neighbourhoods,
This feature only deals with GSM/TDMA, CDMA/CDMA 2000 and UMTS technologies.
Allocating automatically permits to allocate neighbours globally in the current network by imposing
constraints on cells of active transmitters that must be satisfied. Force neighbours reciprocity and within co-
site is possible.
When clicking on the Commit button, ATOLL assigns neighbours to cells. Neighbours are listed in the
Neighbours tab of each cell Properties window.
In the Results part, ATOLL provides the neighbour list of each cell. If cells have a current allocation, they are
flagged existing.
When selecting the Reset option, ATOLL deletes all the current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour
allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept. Therefore, if you add a new cell i and start a new
allocation without selecting the Reset option:
ATOLL determines the neighbour list of the cell i,
It examines the neighbour list of other cells. If there is space in neighbour list of another cell j:
- The cell i enters the cell j neighbour list if allocation criteria are satisfied. The cell i will be the first
one in the neighbour list.
- The cell i does not enter the cell j neighbour list if allocation criteria are not satisfied.
If the cell j belongs to the cell i neighbour list and the force symmetry option is selected:
- The cell i will enter the cell j neighbour list if there is space in the cell j neighbour list.
- If the cell j neighbour list is full, ATOLL removes the cell j from the cell i neighbour list in order to
preserve the link symmetry
Notes :
This feature only deals with GSM/TDMA, CDMA/CDMA 2000 and UMTS technologies.
No prediction study is needed to perform the automatic neighbour allocation. When starting an
automatic neighbour allocation, ATOLL automatically calculates the path loss matrices if it does not
find them.
or
Choose the [Cells:Neighbours:Neighbour lists...] command from the opened menu,
Click the Neighbours tab from the opened window,
In the displayed table, select the desired neighbour line,
Press the keyboard Del (or Suppr.) key
Click on OK to validate and close the dialog box.
Note : this can also be made for external neighbours from a linked project in co-planning.
To display the neighbours of any transmitter (whatever the carrier is), proceed as follows :
Click on the visible neighbourhood icon from the toolbar,
Left click on the desired transmitter to select it on the map,
The neighbours are displayed (colour of the reference transmitter) on the map such as :
Note : This feature only deals with GSM/TDMA, CDMA/CDMA 2000 and UMTS technologies.
Management measurements
Managing measurements
IX MANAGING MEASUREMENTS
By using the capability to compare imported measurements and ATOLL prediction calculation results, you
can apply measurements import either to select the type of model that is best adapted to the prediction
studies desired or to refine the parameters of the selected model. Furthermore, it is possible to add
predictions from other transmitters on any measurement path.
The Measurements window allows you to analyse both measurement and prediction fields very precisely
using the point analysis tool.
It is necessary the export path and measurement results in order to make them available in other
application.
Before dealing with measurements, make sure that the ATOLL coordinates display system is identical to
coordinate system measurements.
Also, it is necessary to check the reception units used in the measurements file to be imported (dBm, dBµV
or dBµV/m).
Measurements folder global properties are reachable from the associated context menu (right click on the
measurements folder).
Indicate the transmitter frequency, the receiver height and the gain of receiver antenna.
Define the reception unit compatible with measurements.
When this is made, you may either edit the opened measurement table, paste values in it, or create a
measurement path.
Notes :
To establish the measurement session, you must link it with a transmitter for the measures to be based
on.
Features available in the Measurement folder context menu are also offered in each group context
menu. Therefore, you can add a new measurement path in a group using New and Import commands
and define unique prediction, statistics and display settings for all the paths available in a group thanks
to the Properties command.
Note : if you paste only the X and Y coordinates, measurement values are set to 0 along the associated
path. If measurements are not included at this time, you won't be able to do it next.
Left click on the map with the pointer where to put the appropriate location for the
measurement points,
Press the 'Esc' button on your keyboard or double click to finish the current points adding.
Left click on the map with the pointer for each measurement path corner,
Press the 'Esc' button on your keyboard or double click to finish the current path building.
Note : adding points or adding a path is available only when no measures values have been imported in the
current measurement session. Nevertheless, you may add points to any other measurement session.
Caution : these functions cannot be used to modify the imported survey data.
Using this procedure, you may also import general data (location names, field characteristics, etc...) along
the imported measurement path, if the extra data has the same format as the imported coordinates and
measurement data. To achieve this, you just have to select the appropriate format in the cell type in each
column. When this is done, data are available to be displayed on the map with the measurement points.
Notes :
To establish the measurement session, you must link it with a transmitter for the measures to be based
on.
When the measurement file to be imported contains fields, which the name corresponds to name of an
ATOLL internal field (e.g. field “Distance”), ATOLL imports the field but changes its name to
differentiate it. In fact, ATOLL ends the imported field name with “(file)” (e.g. field “Distance(File)”).
When the imported file contains fewer lines than the defined number of the first measurement line,
ATOLL warns you the current configuration will be applied with a reinitialisation of the first
Notes : when using the Import all button, ATOLL does not import files, which the configuration does not
correspond to the selected one. It displays an error message and goes on the import with next file.
The new transmitter becomes available in the measurement session table as a new column. Computations
using this transmitter are made in the same way as computations on classical reference transmitter for a
measurement path.
Note :
Like for classical single transmitter measurement sessions, computations along the measurement
paths are possible with several transmitters.
To delete columns related to additional transmitters, delete the related field in the table management
dialog (Table tab) of the considered measurement session.
To create a import measurement configuration, you must use the generic import feature. When the import
measurements windows is opened, proceed as follows :
Define configuration characteristics in the Setup tab :
You can change some parameters in the File part such as the number of the first
measurement line, the list separator (“ “, “tab”, “;”) and decimal symbol (“,” or “.”) used
in the file to be imported,
Give a correlation between the displayed columns and ATOLL internal measurement
fields by either clicking on each cell in the Field line and then, selecting a field in the list
or by clicking on the Setup button. In the last case, the Measurement setup window,
where three ATOLL internal fields, X, Y and measurements, are listed, is displayed. The X
and Y fields have to be assigned unlike the Measurements field which is optional.
In the Configuration part, give a name to the configuration and an associated file
extension. To memorise the configuration, click on the button,
In order to go on the import, open the General tab :
Indicate the measurement path name,
Specify the name of transmitter on which the measurements refer to
Enter the transmitter frequency, the receiver height, the gain and losses of the receiver
antenna,
Define the unit of measurement and the coordinate system of measurement point
Click on the button to achieve the import measurement procedure.
Notes :
Configuration is saved as soon as you click on the Save button. It is not necessary to complete the
import procedure (by pressing the Import button).
When importing a measurement file, the existing configurations are available in the Files of type
scrolling menu (Open window). They are sorted according to their creation order. During import, if
ATOLL recognises the extension, it automatically proposes the corresponding configuration. In case
several configurations are associated with an extension, ATOLL chooses the first configuration in the
list.
The defined configurations are stored in the file “MeasImport.ini”. This file is located in the directory
where ATOLL is installed. You can copy it on other workstations (in the directory where ATOLL is
installed) in order to make available the configurations.
Caution :
It is no longer necessary to define a projection coordinate system to be able to import a measurement
path. However, in order to avoid some inconsistencies, you must specify it in case the measurement
points are stated in a geographic coordinate system.
In order to avoid some inconsistencies, do not assign the *.* extension to a configuration.
To delete an import measurement configuration, you must use the generic import feature. When the
import measurements windows is opened, proceed as follows :
Click on the Setup tab,
In the Configuration part, click on the Configuration scrolling list,
Another solution is to open the file “MeasImport.ini” (located in the directory where ATOLL is installed),
select and erase the configurations that you want to remove.
Measurements folder global properties are reachable from the associated context menu (left click on the
measurements folder).
Measure sessions properties are reachable from measurements folder subfolders associated context menus
(left click on the measurements folder subfolders).
The dialog is made of 4 tabs (General, Table, Parameters and Display) in which you can respectively
manage :
The measurement conditions,
The measurement table content,
Predictions and related filters over the measurement path,
The display of the measurement points composing the path.
Standard features for managing table contents (Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, Delete, Display columns, Filter,
Sort, Fields…) are available in a context menu (when right clicking on column(s) or record(s)) and in the
Format, Edit and Records menus. You can also access the table content management from the Table tab of
the measurement session property dialog.
To open the prediction window associated with the current measurement session, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Measurements folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Reference transmitter folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the measurement session you want to predict coverage on measurement path,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Click on the Parameters tab,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
When prediction parameters are set (filter + selection of a propagation model), Click the
button and choose the Calculate predictions command from the opened menu to
start calculation,
Statistics between measurement and predictions are automatically displayed in a new
window,
Results are then available in the measurement session table.
Notes :
This feature allows you also to predict signal level of added transmitters in an existing measurement
path.
It is also possible to use the path loss stored in the path loss matrices if they have been previously
calculated for prediction studies (select Path loss matrices instead of a propagation model). In this
case, the prediction values on the measurement path are just extracted from path loss matrices.
When a transmitter is made of several elements for which it is possible to define several powers (TRX
types in GSM/TDMA, cells in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000), ATOLL computes using the highest
power level (e.g. BCCH in GSM/TDMA)
When using the button, The Refresh geo data command update heights (Alt DTM, Clutter
height, Clutter+DTM) and clutter class of measurement points after adding new geographic maps or
modifying existing ones, and recalculates predictions to take into account modifications (Calculate
predictions command).
Filters are applied to measurement points in the table and on the map; only these points are taken into
account for statistics calculations.
Selecting the Delete points outside from the filter option enables you to definitively remove measurement
points, which do not fulfil filter criteria, from table and map.
It is possible to define advanced filters on other fields by clicking the More… button. ATOLL opens the
classical Filter dialog available for any table.
Notes :
Error corresponds to difference between measurement value and predicted signal level from reference
transmitter.
ATOLL calculates signal level predictions for all the measurement points even the filtered ones.
To display comparative results on measurements and prediction along a path, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Measurements folder by left clicking on the button,
Expand the Reference transmitter folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the measurement session you already realized some comparative predictions,
Click the button and choose the Display statistics command from the opened
menu,
Results are displayed on the in a Statistics window (per clutter class).
The Display tab window allows you to manage comparative results directly on the map.
Notes :
Even it is possible to add other transmitters in an existing measurement path, and start predictions on
them, comparison is possible only with the reference transmitter.
Thresholds, legend, tips and other handy display tools are available as classically.
Note : shp filenames are not limited in number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file
name is made of more than 8 characters.
The Measurements window is manageable by right clicking on it. From the opened scrolling menu, you may
either zoom, copy the displayed window (in order to use it in another application), print it, manage display
parameters, and add a second ordinary axis in order to study in parallel several parameters.
To use efficiently the measurement window, move the mouse pointer inside it, and you will be able to follow
the analysis along a complete selected measurement path.
Note : The X-axis represents the distance (in m) between the point measurement and the transmitter,
according to the measurement path refers to. The X-axis scale can be changed. The Y-axis (left vertical axis)
is dedicated to measurement and prediction values; its scale is user-definable. When using a second
ordinary axis, the Y’-axis (right vertical axis) is related to attribute values; its scale is fixed.
When the Measurements window is displayed, all of these data are available in the Field scrolling list
(measurement and prediction values always stay visible). Once a field is selected, a second ordinary axis
opens at extreme right and associated value is given just right to it.
Note : to come back to the initial state (no second ordinary axis), select the blank field from the field scrolling
box.
By using the 1st zoom point or last zoom point commands, it is possible to define a zoom range for the
current measurement window. In the Measurement window, place the cursor where you want to start the
zoom, right click and select the 1st zoom point command. Then, place the cursor where you want to end the
zoom, right click and select the last zoom point command. ATOLL will display the path between the first and
the last selected measurement points.
Clicking on Zoom out enables you to undo the zoom area and to display the whole path.
Note : additional data related to the second ordinary axis are kept during export.
Note : additional data related to the second ordinary axis are kept during print.
10
Co-Planning features
Co-Planning features
X CO-PLANNING FEATURES
Moreover, it is also possible to study intertechnology handover by allocating external neighbours, either
manually or automatically.
Because ATOLL is able to work connected to a database, working in co-planning in such a context is also
possible, whatever is the database in use (MS Access, SQL server, Oracle, Sybase).
This feature is enabled for any technology (UMTS, WLL, GSM, CDMA/CDMA 2000 …). More than two
networks can be compared in the same document. You can visualise sites, transmitters, prediction studies,
measurement paths and geographic maps (DTM, clutter, traffic…).
You can change project A object properties in document A or B. In any case, the modifications will be taken
into account both in the project A (source document) and in the project B (in the Workspace and Explorer
windows).
Note : When closing the project A, ATOLL displays special warning icon in the document B Explorer window
and objects relating to the document A disappear in the project B Workspace window.
Co-Planning in ATOLL also allows you to display neighbours between linked projects.
This co-planning feature is available even when using database connections (Oracle, Sybase, SQL Server,
MS Access).
From this, an external neighbours feature has been integrated to each transmitter in a network. This permits
you to choose manually, for any transmitter, neighbours from a linked project. An automatic tool is also
available.
To make active the external neighbours (from a project A.atl) window for any transmitter (from a network
B), proceed as follows :
Open both projects A.atl and B.atl,
In the document A.atl, left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Right click on the Transmitters folder in order to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Creating a link in : document B.atl command from the opened menu,
Transmitters from A are displayed in the network B,
In the document B.atl, left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Either,
Expand the transmitters folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Either,
Right click on the transmitter from which you want to define the external
neighbourhood,
Choose the properties option from the context menu,
Or
Double click on the transmitter from which you want to define the external
neighbourhood,
Click the Neighbours tab from the current window,
In the displayed window, in the bottom table, click on a cell to choose from the scrolling
box the desired transmitter as an external neighbour for the current one. In the scrolling
box are displayed all the transmitters located within a radius of 30 km around the
reference transmitter in the linked network,
Click either on the button or on Apply to validate and add a new line to the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
Or
Right click on the Transmitters folder to open the associated context menu,
Choose the Neighbours : Neighbour lists... (Cells : Neighbours : Neighbour lists... for
UMTS or CDMA/CDMA 2000 projects ) command from the scrolling list,
Click the External neighbours tab from the opened window,
In the displayed table, click on a cell to determine either reference transmitters (in the
network B) or associated neighbours (in the network A),
Click on the button to validate and add a new line to the table,
When you have completed your entry, click on OK to close the dialog box.
Note : Only external transmitters located within 30 km from the reference internal transmitter are listed in the
scrolling lists of the Neighbours dialog.
Notes :
Ticking the co-site transmitters option enables you to force co-site transmitters to be considered as
neighbours. Co-site transmitters will be first neighbours in the list.
When selecting the Reset neighbours option, ATOLL deletes all current neighbours and carries out a
new neighbour allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept.
It is also possible to allocate UMTS neighbours to GSM transmitters. In this case, you must go in the
UMTS.atl document and create a link in the GSM.atl document. Then, you can perform the automatic
allocation in the GSM.atl document (In the Transmitters folder context menu, select Neighbours and
Automatic allocation…).
To manage a single table (e.g., Sites table) in an MS Access database, proceed as follows :
Open the project B.atl in ATOLL,
Remove the transmitters from the Transmitters table and sites from the Sites table,
Export the project B.atl in the database B.mdb,
In the database, open the document B.mdb and delete the Sites table,
In ATOLL, open the project A.atl and export it in the database A.mdb,
In the Access database, open the document B.mdb,
Select the Get External Data: Link Tables… command from the File menu,
Select A.mdb from the Link window,
Click on the Link button,
Choose the Sites table in the Link tables window,
Press OK to create a Sites table linked to the A.mdb Sites table in B.mdb. Both tables contain
the same objects.
project window and select one of them. Then, by creating synonyms, you can share tables which have the
same structure as Sites, Antennas, Links or Link equipment tables. This procedure can be carried out only
by the database administrator.
To manage a single table (e.g., Sites table) in an SQL server database, proceed as follows :
Let the sites of both projects A.atl and B.atl be identical,
Let’s assume two users, user A and user B, have been created in the database,
Open the project B.atl in ATOLL, remove the transmitters from the Transmitters table and
sites from the Sites table,
Export the project B.atl in the database by logging on to user B,
In the database, log on to user B and delete the Sites table,
In ATOLL, open the project A.atl and export it in the database by logging on to user A,
In the database, log on to user A,
Click on the Sites table and select the Create a synonym on command from the associated
context menu. The Create synonym window is displayed,
Specify the synonym name (Sites), the name of the schema containing the synonym (User B),
the object type (table), the name of the schema you want to use (User A), the object which will
be the synonym model (Sites),
Click on Create to validate the synonym creation in the schema B (user B),
Therefore, the user B Sites table is the same than the user A Sites table. Both tables are linked.
To manage a single table (e.g., Sites table) in an Oracle database, proceed as follows :
Let the sites of both projects A.atl and B.atl be identical,
Let’s assume two users, user A and user B, have been created in the database,
Open the project B.atl in ATOLL, remove the transmitters from the Transmitters table and
sites from the Sites table,
Export the project B.atl in the database by logging on to user B,
In the database, log on to user B and delete the Sites table,
In ATOLL, open the project A.atl and export it in the database by logging on to user A,
In the database, log on to user A,
Click on the Sites table and select the Create a synonym on command from the associated
context menu. The Create synonym window is displayed,
Specify the synonym name (Sites), the name of the schema containing the synonym (User B),
the object type (table), the name of the schema you want to use (User A), the object which will
be the synonym model (Sites),
Click on Create to validate the synonym creation in the schema B (user B),
Therefore, the user B Sites table is the same than the user A Sites table. Both tables are linked.
To manage a single table (e.g., Sites table) in an Sybase database, proceed as follows :
Let the sites of both projects A.atl and B.atl be identical,
Let’s assume two users, user A and user B, have been created in the database,
Open the project B.atl in ATOLL, remove the transmitters from the Transmitters table and
sites from the Sites table,
Export the project B.atl in the database by logging on to user B,
In the database, log on to user B and delete the Sites table,
In ATOLL, open the project A.atl and export it in the database by logging on to user A,
In the database, log on to user A,
Click on the Sites table and select the Create a synonym on command from the associated
context menu. The Create synonym window is displayed,
Specify the synonym name (Sites), the name of the schema containing the synonym (User B),
the object type (table), the name of the schema you want to use (User A), the object which will
be the synonym model (Sites),
Click on Create to validate the synonym creation in the schema B (user B),
Therefore, the user B Sites table is the same than the user A Sites table. Both tables are linked.
11
ATOLL imports PlaNET® database even if there are errors or inconsistencies in files to be imported. Indeed,
ATOLL imports all the objects, except these which description syntax is incorrect and data which depend on
nonexistent objects (ex: station located on a site which does not exist). Errors occurred during import are
listed and described in the Events tab of the Event viewer window.
Note : Each import deletes and recreates all the objects to be imported.
Note : the button helps you to locate any file by accessing an Open file dialog window.
Selecting the PlaNET® Geo data (index) option from the File of types scrolling box is not compulsory. This
option is taken by default when importing an index file.
Other PlaNET® imports : antennas, survey data, network, carriers, neighbours, propagation models, path
loss matrices
If the database system does not allow the creation of fields by program (e.g. Oracle), it is necessary to create
the new fields in database before importing.
Note : the button helps you to locate any object in directories by accessing to a classical Open file
dialog window.
Other PlaNET® imports : survey data, network, geographic data, carriers, neighbours, propagation models,
path loss matrices
If the database system does not allow the creation of fields by program (e.g. Oracle), it is necessary to create
the new fields in database before importing.
Note : the button helps you to locate any object in directories by accessing to a classical Open file
dialog window.
Comment: transmitters cannot be created without antenna data. When importing a network, you must make
sure that antenna types referenced by sites already exist in the current project. If not, you must import the
appropriate antennas database. Therefore, select antenna import and ensure a suitable directory path for
antennas.
Important : in PlaNET® projects, transmitters are characterized by the EIRP (2G). In ATOLL 3G projects,
this field is not available, instead the pilot power has to be defined. Thus, when importing PlaNET® network
data, the pilot power is calculated from the EIRP value as follows : Pilot power = EIRP - antenna gain +
emission losses.
Other PlaNET® imports : antennas, survey data, geographic data, carriers, neighbours, propagation models,
path loss matrices
If the database system does not allow the creation of fields by program (e.g. Oracle), it is necessary to create
the new fields in database before importing.
Note : the transmitters are supposed either to exist in the ATOLL document or to be imported first.
Note : the button helps you to locate any object in directories by accessing to a classical Open file
dialog window.
Other PlaNET® imports : antennas, survey data, geographic data, network, neighbours, propagation models,
path loss matrices
Note : the button helps you to locate any object in directories by accessing to a classical Open file
dialog window.
Other PlaNET® imports : antennas, survey data, geographic data, carriers, network, propagation models,
path loss matrices
Note : the button helps you to locate any object in directories by accessing to a classical Open file
dialog window.
Note : It is necessary to know that PlaNET® deals with gains contrary to ATOLL which deals with losses.
Indeed, for PlaNET® a loss is a negative value. Hence, clutter parameters are the opposite between
PlaNET® and ATOLL. In the same way and for the same reason, K1 to K6 values are the opposite between
PlaNET® and ATOLL, except K4 (diffraction parameter) which is considered as a loss.
The automatic import of PlaNET® models is supposed to avoid that the user have to manage any
conversion.
Examples : :
Let's imagine a clutter class in a PlaNET® project for which is assigned a -10 dB gain. It is assigned a
Other PlaNET® imports : antennas, survey data, network, carriers, neighbours, geographic data, path loss
matrices
Note : the button helps you to locate any object in directories by accessing to a classical Open file
dialog window.
Comment: If you change some parameters like grid resolution…, a dialog will warn you about the fact that
calculations will be unlocked. In this case, to perform prediction studies, ATOLL will recalculate the path loss
matrices using the default model.
Other PlaNET® imports : antennas, survey data, network, carriers, neighbours, geographic data, path loss
matrices.
Note : Importing PlaNET® survey data in a UMTS project requires that the measured transmitter already
exists in the project (site + antenna + transmitter - cell). Ensure the consistency between the cell pilot power
in ATOLL UMTS project and the EIRP value defined in the PlaNET® document (Pilot power = EIRP –
transmitter antenna gain + emission losses).
Other PlaNET® imports : antennas, network, geographic data, carriers, neighbours, propagation models,
path loss matrices.
12
Multi-User Features
Multi-User features
Working with a database allows several users to share the same data without risking hidden data
consistency loss. Database do not integrate all radio and geo parameters of a network. Nevertheless, it is
also possible to create user configuration files (containing geo file paths and description (including vector or
raster traffic data), computation zone definition, prediction definitions, folder configurations) that can be
exchanged between users working on the same project. Once the database is created, it is easily possible
for each user to make modifications and either reload modified data from the database or refresh database
with pending changes. Moreover, potential data conflicts (e.g. on modified or deleted records), due to other
users actions are detected and the user is assisted in resolving them.
An ATOLL document, once connected to a database, keeps memory of the connection and allows the
user to manage data consistency in deferred processing.
Furthermore, to open an ATOLL session, connected or not to a project in a database, the tool can be started
from a command line, including several management options.
Since neither databases nor user configurations store calculation results, ATOLL features the possibility to
share externalised path loss matrices between users. So, you can work using a central .losses folder
containing matrices related to a database project shared by several users.
To create a new database from the currently opened .atl ATOLL document, proceed as follows :
From the menu bar, select the Database command in the File menu,
Then click on the Export... option from the opened menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened export
window,
Click on the button after giving the appropriate name and format (MS Access, SQL
Server, Oracle, Sybase) to the exported file.
The data which are stored in database deal with radio data (sites, transmitters, antennas, station templates,
microwave links, etc...), radio parameters (such as propagation models, frequency bands, etc...), UMTS or
CDMA/CDMA 2000 parameters, Neighbours (internal and external), custom fields, units, coordinate systems.
The data which are not saved in database are Geo data files (or paths) related parameters, folder
configurations, study definitions, computation and focus zones, traffic maps, measurements, path loss results
(matrices) and coverage areas.
The user configuration feature allows the user to save Geo data paths and related parameters, folder
configurations, study definitions, and the computation zone. Traffic maps, measurements and coverage
areas can be easily exported. Path loss results can be shared between users using a central matrix private
folder. Matrices can be also exported in external files to be used in other applications.
To create a new ATOLL document based on data from an existing database, proceed as follows :
From the menu bar, right click on the File menu, then
Either
Choose the open from a database... option from the current menu (if no project is already
opened)
Or
Select the Database option, then Choose the open from a database... option (if a project
is already opened),
Select the database file format (including databases via a Microsoft Data link file (.UDL)) and
name (Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened dialog
window),
Left click on the button to open the selected database. Connection procedure is
specific to each database type.
Note : you will have to check the accuracy of the geo data paths (clutter, traffic, etc...) that may not be valid
on your computer.
Note : To identify the provider name, check the Connection properties command from the Database menu in
ATOLL when the associated database is currently opened (the Access and Oracle provider names are
respectively Microsoft.Jet.OLEDB.4.0 and MSDAORA.1).
Caution: note that Provider, Password, UserId, DataSource and Project parameters are case sensitive in the
instructions above.
In addition to this syntax, some other options are also available. For instance, you can load a user
configuration by entering the full path of the configuration file. Therefore, you can open a project from
database and load the configuration file by entering the following syntax:
“C:\Program Files\Forsk\ATOLL\ATOLL.exe” -Provider <provider_name> -UserId <login_account> -
Password <password> -DataSource <server> -Project <project_account> -Cfg “C:\….\configuration.cfg”
Since ATOLL works from a command line with options, you can use this feature to start ATOLL entering the
following syntax:
“C:\Program Files\Forsk\ATOLL\ATOLL.exe” -Cfg “C:\….\configuration.cfg”
In this case, ATOLL is automatically started and the configuration file is loaded when creating a new project.
Finally, messages listed in the Events tab can be saved in a .log file, typing the following syntax in the
command line:
“C:\Program Files\Forsk\ATOLL\ATOLL.exe” -log “C:\….\events.log”
All these parameters are not stored in a relational database, as they were in versions previous to 2.1.
Therefore, the only way to share these settings is to create a user configuration file. Then, by importing it,
users are able to work on the same geographic data, have the same data organisation and representation
and work out the same prediction studies on a common computation zone. Moreover, they are able to carry
out any modification in their .atl documents without changing reference for the others.
Notes :
ATOLL can store path of any imported geographic data with any of the supported formats except
traffic maps. Be careful, vectors must be in the same coordinate system as the raster maps.
Projection and display coordinate systems are not stored (they are stored in the database)
The different settings (geographic data set, computation zone, folder configurations and prediction
study definition) can be stored independently. The default extension of user configuration file is .geo
when saving either geographic data set, or computation zone, or both of them.
User configuration files have an international format; they can be used on workstations with different
regional parameters.
ATOLL does not store any simulation settings such as parameters entered when creating simulation
or simulation display properties.
Since user configuration files are in standard XML format, they can be opened by XML viewers (and
modified and/or improved).
User configuration files can be created by ATOLL, imported into an existing .atl document and easily
exchanged between users.
In this case, syntax of the ATOLL desktop shortcut must not contain -Cfg <configuration_file>. If a
configuration file called ATOLL.cfg is located in the ATOLL installation directory, this configuration file is
automatically loaded when creating a new project (from template or database).
Note : In addition to the above databases, all the databases that accept .udl files and support ODBC
interface can be accessed (see below).
When possible, ATOLL allows you to interactively create your database. Some databases, MS SQL
Server for example, cannot be created by application and need administrator intervention. It is why
ATOLL just suggests to create a new MS Access database. Each database carries its own connection
dialog.
In the opened dialog, enter information about with the base to connect to as system account,
server, user name, password.
In the opened dialog, enter the name, password and server name (as defined in the
tnsnames.ora file) relative to the system account,
In the opened dialog, enter information related to the base to connect with as system account,
Notes :
By selecting the previous format, all the databases that support OD-BC interface can be accessed
Opening a project from a database use the same syntax.
A specific message box warns you if you are not currently connected to a database.
Note : you can use this feature to switch from a user/project account to another. When this made, do not
forget to use the refresh command to update your project regarding to privileges and rules related to the
current connection.
Each table may be checked independently. Inside a table, data are sorted by the kind of action you realized :
update an existing data or add a new one. You can actually check each data.
You can request a global archive of pending changes to the database using Run all or prefer to run through
differences between previous and current data values.
To detail differences, just select the record you want to check and ask ATOLL to show differences.
If you prefer to archive step by step, you can select the desired record and archive it with the Run command.
ATOLL also allows you to cancel any of the changes that have been made to your document with respect to
the initial state of the database when you connected to it (without taking into account any changes that have
been made to the database since you connected to it) by using the Undo command.
When your changes have been archived, you get either a dialog window indicating that all modifications
have been successfully archived, or a warning dialog about data conflict. ATOLL helps you to manage it
(either when modifying or deleting records).
Note : The Archive dialog window is available only when some changes have been made and not already
archived.
For example, you are connected to a MS Access database whose transmitters table has been modified
since your initial load. Indeed, the altitude of transmitter Tx34 has been increased from 30 to 35 metres
(See below in the database).
In your current project, you also increased this altitude, but from 30 to 33 metres only (See the transmitters
table from ATOLL current project below).
Ignoring that someone already modified this value, you try to archive. Trying to archive, ATOLL detects the
conflict and warns you about it with the following window :
In the opened Archive dialog window, if you select the conflicting data, ATOLL offers you to see
differences between the current document and the linked database (Show Differences command) :
In the Archive dialog window, select the conflicting data and click on the Resolve command :
A dialog box summarising the associated conflict opens. Line(s) in grey represent(s) the conflict
location(s). By ticking the box on the left, database will be updated with current ATOLL data. If you let the
box unticked, ATOLL data are loaded from the linked database.
You can then check the database. You check that Tx34 altitude is 33 metres, like in the current ATOLL
project.
Note : Only differences between database and current project on the same field of the same record can
cause a conflict.
Somebody deleted the transmitter Tx34 on Site 29. You have modified its altitude on the current ATOLL
project and you try to archive.
When trying to archive, ATOLL detects the conflict and warns you about. When using the Resolve
command, ATOLL will display the following message :
If you choose Yes, you recreate the deleted record in the database. Choosing No, you delete the record
in your document as well as in the linked database.
Note : To enable the active sharing option, you have to select the external calculation storage option.
It’s important to notice the difference between private and shared storages.
When using a private storage, the path loss matrices are either embedded in the .atl environment or stored in
an external folder (external calculation storage option ticked). In this case, each environment has internal or
external associated path loss matrices. In the case of shared storage, there is just one calculation matrix
folder for all the environments.
The feature use requires a specific work configuration. Indeed, all the users must be connected with a central
database and the project must be managed by a calculation administrator (somebody centralizing the
calculation result database) also connected with the database which will provide the calculation matrices by
externalising its results. The private external path loss matrix folder of the calculation administrator will be the
shared folder which will be used by the other users. It has a .losses extension and consists of two files per
active transmitter (a .los file and a .par file).
ATOLL performs prediction studies using the shared path loss matrices only when it does not find the
matrices in the user private external folder. Therefore, to base the prediction studies exclusively on the
shared matrices, you need to delete the matrices stored in the private external folder using the Delete
command in the Results window.
ATOLL accesses the shared path loss matrices using a “read only” mode. It temporary copies the matrices
in the user private external folder (temporary matrices cannot be locked due to consistency with read only
mode). If a user modifies in its environment some parameters, ATOLL detects which matrices are invalid
and recalculates them. Then, after saving and closing the .atl environment, it removes the temporary
matrices which have not been modified and keeps the recalculated matrices in the user private external
folder. Therefore, if you change the height of a transmitter and if you carry out predictions, ATOLL will
recalculate only the path loss matrix related to this transmitter and will save it in the private external folder
associated with the .atl environment. The prediction studies will be based on the recalculated matrix and on
the other temporary matrices coming from shared matrices.
Note : The shared matrices temporarily copied in the user external folder do not appear in the Results
window. Only the recalculated matrices definitively stored in the user private external folder are listed and
can be handled.
This feature is very useful when several users working on a same project want to perform predictions on
different areas. They can plan the network on their area and store in their private folder the associated path
loss matrices.
Note : Only the calculation administrator is able to update the shared matrices by refreshing its .atl
environment and then, restarting calculations. The calculation administrator must feed the calculation
matrices only when they are no longer used by the users.
13
Microwave Links
Microwave Links
Since several links can share their extremities (either start or end), the description of a network in ATOLL is
divided into two folders located in the explorer window :
A Sites folder which contains the set of points that can be used as link extremities. This folder can also
contain sites for 2G/3G networks.
A Links folder which contains the description of the links. Each link refers to two items in the Sites
folder.
Each folder works as the other objects from the explorer window as far as data visibility, data priority or data
display are concerned. Furthermore, each item in the Stations folder can also be used as a link extremity.
Microwave links are easy to manage, for display as well as for parameter setup. The settings are available
either in the link itself or in the radio equipment.
You can create a new link directly on the map, either on existing sites or on new sites automatically created.
During the link creation, when placing the pointer near to an existing site highlights it, indicating that it is a
potential extremity for the link. Otherwise, a new site will be created.
When the link is created, its parameters can be defined in its properties dialog box.
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the wizard dialog
windows,
Click the button to validate the new microwave link.
Note : Radio equipment must be defined before creating links. The step 3 of the creation wizard does not
allow to create a new equipment.
Due to this organisation, microwave links table benefits from all the features usually available in tables
(content management, filtering, sorting, etc...).
Notes :
- Since version 2.1, the microwave links folder benefits from the generic ATOLL display dialog in order to
make its display management easier through, for example, labels, legends, threshold definition and the tip
tool.
- If you create a new microwave link, the apply current configuration (or F5 : Refresh - icon) command
gives the colour to new links according to the display properties of the microwave links folder.
Either :
Left click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
Expand the Microwave links folder by clicking on the button in front of it,
Right click on the microwave link you want to manage,
or
Select on the map the microwave link you want to manage by left clicking on the
appropriate link,
Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
Use the What's this help to get description about the opened dialog window.
The displayed window contains at least 4 tabs (General, Link, Parameters, Display). The Other Properties
tab is available if some user defined fields have been added to the Microwave links table :
- The General tab deals with the name, the length, an the cluster name of the current link.
- The Link tab contains the names of antennas, equipment, power and losses related to each extremity of the
current link,
- The Parameters assign to the link an environment type, a rain zone and a climate type,
- The Display tab allows you to manage the colour and the style of the current link.
Note :
You can open the property dialog of the Antennas used at extremities by clicking the buttons on
the right of the antenna selection boxes in the Link tab.
Some parameters are linked with environmental behaviours. In the Parameters tab, rain zones
(America, Europe and Africa, Asia), Vapour density and atmospheric refraction (February, May,
August, November) are based on map following ITU recommendations.
To manage the radio equipment available in the current network, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Right click on the microwave links folder to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Radio equipment...,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Precise the names of each piece of equipment and the associated power, reception
threshold, FKTB, and other parameters related to interference studies and total and fading
outage probabilities computations,
Press the Close button to validate.
In addition to power, reception threshold and thermal noise (FKTB), you may specify the following
parameters in the Equipment window:
The first of them is taken into account to determine interferer and interfered sites in interference study:
Spectrum width (MHz): It corresponds to the signal spreading around the central frequency. Spectrum
width depends on the type of modulation supported by equipment.
The other ones are considered to calculate total and fading outage probabilities in link analysis:
Saturation (dBm): This parameter enables ATOLL to predict signal level enhancement (paragraph
2.3.3 in ITU–R 530-8 recommendation).
Signature width (MHz) and depth (dB): they are used to model signal distortion due to frequency
selective fading and delay during multipath propagation (paragraph 5.1 in ITU–R 530-8
recommendation).
Correction factor discrimination: This term is considered to predict reduction of cross-polar polarization
(XPD) in multipath or precipitation conditions (paragraph 4 in ITU–R 530-8 recommendation).
where (Co/I) is the carrier-to-interference ratio for a reference BER and XPIF is a laboratory-measured
cross-polarisation improvement factor.
Note : The XPDg parameter is used during the first step of the prediction. XPDg is the minimum of the
transmitting and receiving antenna boresight XPDs. ATOLL determines XPDg from cross-polar
antenna pattern in case of az = 0 and el = 0 (az and el are respectively the calculated azimuth and tilt
angles).
Caution: These parameters are taken into account only when the analysis is based on the ITU–R 530-8
recommendation.
Notes :
From this dialog, you can access the IRF dialog by clicking the button.
Transmission powers and reception thresholds of a link are automatically initialised with the equipment
values when choosing equipment in the Link tab of the link Properties window.
When no equipment is specified in the link properties, ATOLL considers the following default values :
Spectrum width = 100MHz, Saturation = 0 dBm, Signature width = 0 MHz, Signature depth = 0 dB and
Corr. Fact. Discrimination = 0
You can add customised fields in the equipment table by clicking on the Fields button.
Link analysis, considering the application of these recommendations, is made using either ITU–R 530-3
recommendation (P.530-3) or the ITU–R 530-8 one (P.530-8) in order to calculate total and fading outage
probabilities of the link.
Recommendations ITU-R PN 525-6 and ITU–R 530-3 or ITU–R 530-8 can be set.
Specify longitude and latitude, choose the recommendation and the diffraction evaluation
method you want to use in analysis,
Click OK to close the dialog.
Notes :
ATOLL automatically updates analysis report when changing any parameter.
New properties of equipment (signature width and depth, saturation, correction factor discrimination)
are considered in the link analysis only if it is based on ITU–R 530-8 recommendation. In this case,
ATOLL takes into account these parameters to calculate total and fading outage probabilities of the
link.
Computations are related to environmental behaviours. In the Parameters tab of any link property
dialog, rain zones (America, Europe and Africa, Asia), Vapour density and atmospheric refraction
(February, May, August, November) are based on maps following ITU recommendations.
Notes :
Antenna heights are generally set up using one or several Fresnel zone clearance criteria. For
example, the ITU recommends a clearance of 60% of the first Fresnel zone for standard refractivity
conditions, and LOS (line of sight) for the worst conditions.
The Profile tab of the analysis window allows interactive settings of antennas heights, with real time
display of the two different clearance criteria.
Additional information is available in the Profile tab. A vertical red line indicates the position of the main edge
along the link,
ATOLL displays, above the main edge, the diffraction loss (dB) due to this obstacle ( J (ν p ) ) in case of the
first k value and the distance (m) between the obstacle and the starting of the link extremity.
Furthermore, you may move cursor along the link and visualise its position on the map. To do this, click
anywhere on the profile to display the cursor; then, click on it without releasing the mouse and shift it along
the link. ATOLL indicates at the top of the dialog:
The distance (m) between cursor and the starting site of the link,
The penetration (h in m) of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first entered k values (1.33 by default):
h(axis) and h(obstacle) are respectively height of the Fresnel ellipsoid axis and the height of the obstacle.
To open the statistical report window for any microwave link, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Microwave links folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the microwave link for which you want to display the statistical report,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Analysis...,
Click on the Report tab from the opened window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Press OK to close the window.
Notes :
Parameters cannot be edited in the Report tab window. You can set only them in the Parameters tab
window,
When using receiver antenna diversity, ATOLL takes into account an improvement coefficient to work
out link outage probabilities. This coefficient value is provided in the Report tab.
To open the signal level propagation display dialog window, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Make active the signal profile window,
Right click on signal display zone to open the associated context menu,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Display...,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Adjust the current display parameters on graduations, Fresnel representation and earth
curvature,
Press OK or Apply to validate.
To open the parameter settings window for any microwave link, proceed as follows :
Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
Expand the Microwave links folder by left clicking on the button,
Right click on the microwave link you want to edit the profile values,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Analysis...,
Click on the Profile values tab from the opened window,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Displayed data can be accessed and modified (values, clutter class, etc...),
Press OK to validate.
In the table, it is possible to create an entire profile either by entering data manually in the cells, or by using
the copy and paste tool with values taken from other applications (SIG) button. Moreover, it is
also possible to copy values defining the profile into other applications (SIG) by selecting line(s), and using
the button.
Reminder : to select the whole table, left click in the top left-hand corner of the table.
Note : If no equipment is defined in the link properties, ATOLL considers a 100 MHz spectrum width.
When studying interference or when preparing a budget, ATOLL offers you to compute diffraction losses
with Deygout model, with or without diffraction correction method.
When calculating interference level and the propagation fading, the path loss due to the directivity of both
antennas is taken into account, as well as the path loss due to the equipment (polarization discrimination,
frequency filtering, etc.). The results can be copied and pasted into a spread sheet to allow you to make
further analysis.
Note : in order to carry out an interference analysis the radio equipment must be associated to the links
(equipment for which IRF curves have been defined).
Interference analysis can be carried out either on a particular link or on all the links.
Right click on the microwave link you want to identify interferers of one of its extremities,
Left click in the scrolling menu on Interferences...,
Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the opened window,
Tick the Find interferences victims of option from the opened window,
Select from the scrolling list the transmitter you want to study,
Enter the maximum distance at which the potential interfered transmitters must be located in
order to be taken into account,
Select the diffraction computation method (Deygout or modified Deygout method),
Click the button to run calculations,
If some transmitters meet the criteria above, they are displayed in the Results list,
Total interference and margin reduction are displayed at the bottom,
Press CLOSE to finish.
The results obtained in this case correspond to the interference analysis on each link. Following data are
displayed :
Link name,
Receiver site name,
Signal received;
Flat margin,
Accumulated interferences (Interferences column),
Accumulated margin reduction (Margin reduction column),
Effective margin.
Definitions
Interferences of B (interfering link transmitter) on A (interfered link receiver) = Signal received from B at A -
IRF
where :
Signal received from B at A = Transmitted power(B) + Weighted gain(B) - Losses(B)
Free Space Fading
Atmospheric Fading
Diffraction Fading + Weighted Gain(A) – Losses(A)
Weighted Gain(A), (resp. B) = value of A gain (resp. B) weighted by the fading values given in the radiation
pattern of A (resp. B) according to the direction of station B (resp. A). The polarization difference of the two
signals is taken into account: if the polarizations are different, the Weighted Gain(A) depends on A
crosspolar radiation pattern.
IRF
IRF (Interference Reduction Factor) = Receiver filtering protection as a function of the difference that exists
between the central frequencies of the disturbed signal and of the disturbing signal (which is user-definable).
FKTB
FKTB : equipment noise power
where F : noise figure
K : Boltzmann constant=1.38 10e(-23) J / K
T : noise temperature ~ 290 K
B : passband width (Hz)
Effective margin
Effective margin = Flat margin – Accumulated margin reduction
where
Flat margin = Signal received – Reception threshold
The opened window offers a list of all the possible equipment pairs. Each piece of equipment paired with
other pieces of equipment can be either interfered with or interferer.
For each pair, you will have to enter, in table form, the values for the deltaF(MHz) and for the Protection(dB).
Notes :
When clicking on the IRF button, ATOLL now opens IRF dialog associated to the selected interfered
equipment.
Transmission powers and reception thresholds of a link are automatically initialised with the equipment
values when choosing equipment in the Link tab of the link Properties window.
When no equipment is specified in the link properties, ATOLL considers the following default values :
Spectrum width = 100MHz, Saturation = 0dBm, Signature width = 0 MHz, Signature depth = 0 dB and
Corr. Fact. Discrimination = 0
You can add customised fields in the equipment table by clicking on the Fields button.
When no IRF value has been defined for interfering-interferer equipment pairs, there is no protection
and interference are higher.
ITU Percentage of time during which the gradient <=-100 units N/km : February
ITU Percentage of time during which the gradient <=-100 units N/km : May
ITU Percentage of time during which the gradient <=-100 units N/km : August
ITU Percentage of time during which the gradient <=-100 units N/km : November
INDEX
INDEX
INDEX
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA 2000 RADIO MANAGING THE DTM DISPLAY ........... 87 SIMULATION CONCEPTS ...............324
DATA OVERVIEW ....................... 298 MANAGING TMA EQUIPMENT ........... 121 POWER CONTROL UMTS SIMULATION
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA 2000 MANAGING TRANSMITTER PROPERTIES CONCEPTS .................................257
SIMULATION PROPERTIES ............ 321 ................................................. 115 POWER PARAMETERS IN CDMA/CDMA
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA 2000 MANAGING TRXS IN TRANSMITTERS. 204 2000 .........................................303
SIMULATION RESULTS ON THE MAP MANAGING UMTS CELL PROPERTIES POWER PARAMETERS IN UMTS .......235
................................................ 337 ................................................. 234 PREDICTING ON GIVEN CDMA/CDMA
MANAGING CDMA/CDMA 2000 SITE MANAGING UMTS ENVIRONMENT 2000 CARRIERS..........................342
EQUIPMENT................................ 300 TRAFFIC MAP DISPLAY ................. 247 PREDICTING ON GIVEN UMTS CARRIERS
MANAGING CELL TYPES................... 195 MANAGING UMTS NETWORK TERMINALS .................................................273
MANAGING CHANNEL ELEMENT ................................................. 240 PREDICTING SIGNAL LEVELS ON A
CONSUMPTION PER CDMA/CDMA MANAGING UMTS PREDICTION DISPLAY MEASUREMENT PATH ..................369
2000 SITE EQUIPMENT ................ 300 ................................................. 274 PRINTING A MAP................................42
MANAGING CHANNEL ELEMENT MANAGING UMTS RADIO DATA PRINTING A POINT ANALYSIS STUDY ..171
CONSUMPTION PER UMTS SITE OVERVIEW ................................. 230 PRINTING ANTENNA PATTERNS .........114
EQUIPMENT................................ 232 MANAGING UMTS SIMULATION PRINTING DATA TABLES .....................51
MANAGING CONTENTS IN TABLES ....... 47 PROPERTIES .............................. 253 PRINTING PREDICTION REPORTS ......182
MANAGING DISPLAY ON A MEASUREMENT MANAGING UMTS SIMULATION RESULTS PRINTING THE ACTIVE WINDOW ..........38
PATH ......................................... 370 ON THE MAP ............................... 268 PRINTING THE MEASUREMENT WINDOW
MANAGING E/GPRS EQUIPMENT MANAGING UMTS SITE EQUIPMENT . 232 .................................................373
PROPERTIES .............................. 222 MANAGING VECTOR OBJECT PROPAGATION MODELS OVERVIEW .136
MANAGING EXISTING MATRICES ....... 183 PROPERTIES ................................ 97
MANAGING FEEDER EQUIPMENT....... 122 MANAGING VECTOR OBJECT SHAPES .. 95
MANAGING FREQUENCY BANDS ....... 190 MANAGING VECTOR OBJECTS DISPLAY 88 R
MANAGING FREQUENCY DOMAINS AND MEASUREMENT WINDOW ACTIVATION RADIO EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW ........121
GROUPS .................................... 191 ................................................. 371 READING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS
MANAGING GEOGRAPHIC DATA MERGING HEXAGONAL GROUPS OF BASE ZONE AREA.................................136
OVERVIEW ................................... 73 STATIONS .................................. 121 REFRESHING A CDMA/CDMA 2000
MANAGING GLOBALLY CDMA/CDMA MICROWAVE LINKS OVERVIEW ....... 409 ENVIRONMENT TRAFFIC MAP ........314
2000 ENVIRONMENT TYPES ........ 311 MIF DATA FORMAT ........................... 82 REFRESHING A CLUTTER MAP ............91
MANAGING GLOBALLY CDMA/CDMA MODELLING SHADOWING IN REFRESHING A GSM/TDMA TRAFFIC
2000 RADIO CONFIGURATIONS ... 308 CDMA/CDMA 2000 PREDICTIONS RASTER MAP...............................207
MANAGING GLOBALLY CDMA/CDMA ................................................. 343 REFRESHING A UMTS ENVIRONMENT
2000 SERVICES ......................... 306 MODELLING SHADOWING IN TRAFFIC MAP ..............................246
MANAGING GLOBALLY CDMA/CDMA CDMA/CDMA 2000 SIMULATIONS REFRESHING MAPS AND FOLDERS ......67
2000 USER PROFILES ................. 309 ................................................. 330 REMOVING A POINT IN THE
MANAGING GLOBALLY UMTS MODELLING SHADOWING IN UMTS COMPUTATION/FOCUS ZONE ........135
ENVIRONMENT TYPES ................. 243 PREDICTIONS ............................. 274 REMOVING ATOLL ...........................28
MANAGING GLOBALLY UMTS MOBILITY MODELLING SHADOWING IN UMTS REMOVING DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING
TYPES ....................................... 238 SIMULATIONS ............................. 261 SERVER .......................................29
MANAGING GLOBALLY UMTS SERVICES MODIFYING ANTENNA PARAMETERS IN REMOVING THE POLYGON FILTER .......63
................................................ 237 TABLES ...................................... 112 RENAMING AN OBJECT .......................45
MANAGING GLOBALLY UMTS USER MODIFYING CLUTTER OR TRAFFIC REORGANIZE DATA AFTER
PROFILES .................................. 242 RASTER POLYGONS ...................... 93 MODIFICATIONS ............................62
MANAGING GSM/TDMA RADIO DATA MOVING A TRANSMITTER ON THE MAP REPAIRING A BROKEN LINK ................86
OVERVIEW ................................. 190 ................................................. 116 REPLAYING A CDMA/CDMA 2000
MANAGING GSM/TDMA TRAFFIC MAP MULTI-USER PROJECTS OVERVIEW. 393 SIMULATION ................................323
DISPLAY .................................... 208 REPLAYING A UMTS SIMULATION .....255
MANAGING HCS LAYERS ................ 199 RESIZING THE COMPUTATION/FOCUS
MANAGING HSN DOMAINS AND GROUPS N ZONE .........................................135
................................................ 192 NAMING AUTOMATICALLY SITES ....... 106 RESOLVING A CONFLICT ON A DELETED
MANAGING MEASUREMENTS OVERVIEW NAMING AUTOMATICALLY TRANSMITTERS RECORD .....................................403
................................................ 363 ................................................. 115 RESOLVING A CONFLICT ON A MODIFIED
MANAGING OBJECT VISIBILITY ............ 45 NETWORK OPTIMISATION OVERVIEW RECORD .....................................401
MANAGING PREDICTION DISPLAY ..... 176 ................................................. 214 RUNNING COVERAGE CALCULATIONS 178
MANAGING PREDICTION RESULTS
OVERVIEW ................................. 181
MANAGING PROPAGATION MODEL O S
FOLDERS ................................... 139 OPENING A MEASUREMENT DATA TABLE SAMPLE VALUES FOR SPM FORMULA
MANAGING RADIO EQUIPMENT IN A ................................................. 368 PARAMETERS .............................156
DATABASE STRUCTURE ............... 124 OPENING DIALOGS FROM TABLES ....... 48 SAVING THE EDITED RASTER POLYGONS
MANAGING RADIO EQUIPMENT IN OPERATING PRINCIPLES .................. 393 ...................................................99
MICROWAVE LINKS...................... 411 OPTIMISING THE LOADING OF RASTER SCRAMBLING CODE ALLOCATION
MANAGING RADIO NETWORK DATA MAPS ........................................... 84 PROCESS ...................................291
OVERVIEW ................................. 105 OTHER SUPPORTED FORMATS ........... 83 SCRAMBLING CODES OVERVIEW .....289
MANAGING SCANNED MAPS DISPLAY .. 88 OVSF CODES AVAILABILITY ............. 261 SELECTING A TRANSMITTER IN POINT
MANAGING SITE ALTITUDES ............. 107 OVSF CODES MANAGEMENT ........... 260 ANALYSIS ...................................169
MANAGING SITE PROPERTIES .......... 106 SELECTING PROPAGATION MODELS ..137
MANAGING SUBCELLS IN TRANSMITTERS SELECTING THE POWER DEFINITION ITEM
................................................ 202 P IN POINT ANALYSIS ......................169
MANAGING TABLE DISPLAY ................ 48 PASTING A MEASUREMENT PATH ...... 364 SETTING A CDMA/CDMA 2000 RADIO
MANAGING THE ANTENNA PROPERTIES PLANET® DATA FORMAT .................. 79 CONFIGURATION .........................307
................................................ 111 POINT ANALYSIS PREDICTIONS SETTING A DEFAULT LENGTH UNIT ......73
MANAGING THE CLUTTER PROPERTIES90 OVERVIEW ................................. 166 SETTING A UMTS MOBILITY TYPE.....238
MANAGING THE DISPLAY OF A POWER CONTROL CDMA/CDMA 2000 SETTING CALCULATION AREAS .........172
MICROWAVE LINK PROFILE .......... 414
SETTING CDMA/CDMA 2000 UPLINK (UMTS) ......................... 278 USING A GROUP BY/SORT/FILTER
ENVIRONMENT PARAMETERS ....... 311 STUDYING THE PROFILE FROM A CONFIGURATION ...........................62
SETTING CDMA/CDMA 2000 SERVICES TRANSMITTER ............................ 167 USING A SITE AS A TARGET FOR POINT
PARAMETERS ............................. 305 SUBCELL PROPERTY DETAILS .......... 203 ANALYSIS ...................................170
SETTING CDMA/CDMA 2000 TRAFFIC SUMMARISING RESULTS PER CELL USING EQUIPMENT TO COMPUTE
MAP PARAMETERS OVERVIEW .... 312 (CDMA/CDMA 2000 PROJECTS) 334 TRANSMITTER LOSSES.................123
SETTING CODING SCHEMES SUMMARISING RESULTS PER CELL USING ICONS AVAILABLE IN THE TOOL
PARAMETERS ............................. 223 (UMTS PROJECTS) .................... 265 BAR .............................................68
SETTING DEFAULT RADIO UNITS ....... 105 SUMMARISING RESULTS PER MOBILE USING IRF IN MICROWAVE LINKS ......417
SETTING DOCUMENT PRINTS ............. 67 (CDMA/CDMA 2000 PROJECTS) 335 USING RELIABILITY LEVEL ON
SETTING GEO DATA PRIORITY ............ 89 SUMMARISING RESULTS PER MOBILE PREDICTIONS..............................165
SETTING MICROWAVE LINK PROPERTIES (UMTS PROJECTS) .................... 266 USING SHORTCUTS IN ATOLL............70
................................................ 410 SUMMARISING RESULTS PER SITE USING THE AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY
SETTING PROPAGATION MODEL PRIORITY (CDMA/CDMA 2000 PROJECTS) 333 PLANNING TOOL ..........................219
................................................ 138 SUMMARISING RESULTS PER SITE USING THE PANORAMIC WINDOW ........39
SETTING SPECIFIC COVERAGE (UMTS PROJECTS) .................... 264 USING THE RECEIVER ......................167
CONDITIONS IN GSM/TDMA STUDIES SUPPORTED DATABASES OVERVIEW USING THE SITE SEARCH TOOL ...........68
................................................ 210 ................................................. 397 USING THE STATUS BAR TO GET
SETTING THE DISPLAY PROPERTIES OF A SUPPORTED GEO DATA FORMATS INFORMATION ...............................68
SITE .......................................... 109 OVERVIEW ................................... 76 USING THE TIPS TOOL TO GET
SETTING THE RECEIVER PROPERTIES164 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ................... 27 INFORMATION ...............................66
SETTING THE TRANSMITTER USING THE UNDO/REDO COMMAND ....67
CDMA/CDMA 2000 GLOBAL
PARAMETERS ............................. 301 T
SETTING TRANSMITTER ACTIVITY ..... 118 TECHNICAL SUPPORT ........................ 31 W
SETTING UMTS ENVIRONMENT TEMPLATES PROVIDED ...................... 32 WALSH CODES AVAILABILITY ............330
PARAMETERS ............................. 243 THRESHOLDS COLOURS AND LEGENDS WALSH CODES MANAGEMENT ..........328
SETTING UMTS SERVICE PARAMETERS ................................................... 64 WAYS TO GET ASSISTANCE ................31
................................................ 236 TIFF DATA FORMAT .......................... 79 WEIGHTING CDMA/CDMA 2000 USERS
SETTING UMTS TERMINAL PARAMETERS TO CALIBRATE ONE VARIABLE .......... 162 PER CLUTTER CLASS ...................312
................................................ 239 TRANSMITTERS OVERVIEW ............ 114 WEIGHTING UMTS USERS PER CLUTTER
SETTING UMTS TRAFFIC MAP TROUBLESHOOTINGS AFTER CLASS ........................................244
PARAMETERS OVERVIEW ........... 245 INSTALLATION .............................. 30 WHAT'S INSTALLED WITH ATOLL .......27
SHADOWING MARGIN TRX PROPERTY DETAILS................. 205 WHAT'S NEW IN ATOLL 2.1...............21
N PATHS ............................ 261, 330 TRX TYPES DEFINITION ................. 195 WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH A MS
SHARING PATH LOSS MATRICES TYPICAL VALUES OR LOSSES PER ACCESS DATABASE .....................379
BETWEEN USERS ........................ 404 CLUTTER CLASS (SPM)............... 158 WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH A SQL
SHP DATA FORMAT .......................... 82 SERVER DATABASE .....................379
SORTING A FOLDER .......................... 60 WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH A
SORTING AND FILTERING IN TABLES ... 52 U SYBASE DATABASE .....................380
SPM CALIBRATION DIALOG WINDOW 161 UMTS ACTIVE SET CONDITIONS ....... 238 WORKING IN CO-PLANNING WITH AN
SPM CALIBRATION TAB WINDOW ..... 159 UMTS AVERAGE SIMULATION OUTPUTS ORACLE DATABASE .....................380
SPM CLUTTER TAB WINDOW ........... 157 ON CELLS ................................... 270 WORKING WITH COST-HATA MODEL
SPM GENERAL TAB WINDOW .......... 147 UMTS CELLS DEFINITION .............. 233 OVERVIEW .................................143
SPM PARAMETERS TAB WINDOW .... 147 UMTS NETWORK OPTIMISATION WORKING WITH DOCKING OR FLOATING
SPM STATISTICS DIALOG WINDOW .. 160 OVERVIEW ................................. 285 WINDOW.......................................38
STANDARD PROPAGATION MODELS UMTS POWER CONTROL SIMULATION WORKING WITH DOCUMENT WINDOW ..37
PARAMETERS ............................. 148 INPUTS ...................................... 254 WORKING WITH ITU 370-7 MODEL
STARTING A NEW PROJECT................ 32 UMTS PREDICTION STUDIES OVERVIEW (VIENNA 93) ...............................140
STARTING ATOLL FROM THE COMMAND ................................................. 272 WORKING WITH ITU 526-5 MODEL ...140
LINE .......................................... 395 UMTS PROJECTS OVERVIEW ......... 229 WORKING WITH LONGLEY-RICE MODEL
STUDYING DOWNLINK TOTAL NOISE UMTS PROJECTS PROTOCOL .......... 230 .................................................139
(CDMA/CDMA 2000)................ 351 UMTS SIMULATION CONVERGENCE WORKING WITH OKUMURA-HATA MODEL
STUDYING DOWNLINK TOTAL NOISE METHOD .................................... 258 OVERVIEW .................................142
(UMTS) .................................... 282 UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELL WORKING WITH STANDARD
STUDYING EFFECTIVE SERVICE AREA COMPONENTS ............................ 270 PROPAGATION MODEL OVERVIEW
(CDMA/CDMA 2000)................ 348 UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELLS .................................................145
STUDYING EFFECTIVE SERVICE AREA ................................................. 269 WORKING WITH THE EXPLORER
(UMTS) .................................... 279 UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON MOBILE OVERVIEW ...................................44
STUDYING INTERFERED AREA COMPONENTS ............................ 271 WORKING WITH WLL (WIRELESS LOCAL
PREDICTIONS ............................. 211 UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON LOOP) MODEL ............................141
STUDYING INTERFERENCES WITH THE MOBILES .................................... 270
POINT ANALYSIS ......................... 213 UMTS SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON SITES
STUDYING SERVICE AREA (EB/NT) ................................................. 269 Z
DOWNLINK (CDMA/CDMA 2000) 346 UMTS SIMULATIONS OVERVIEW .... 252 ZOOMING AND PANNING .....................38
STUDYING SERVICE AREA (EB/NT) UMTS SPECIFIC CONCEPTS ............ 229 ZOOMING IN THE MEASUREMENT
DOWNLINK (UMTS) .................... 277 UMTS STANDARD DEVIATION OF WINDOW.....................................372
STUDYING SERVICE AREA (EB/NT) SIMULATION OUTPUTS ON CELLS .. 270
UPLINK (CDMA/CDMA 2000)..... 347 UMTS TRAFFIC DATA OVERVIEW ... 235
STUDYING SERVICE AREA (EB/NT) USER INTERFACE BASICS OVERVIEW 37